diff options
479 files changed, 2289 insertions, 2289 deletions
diff --git a/bin/ln/symlink.7 b/bin/ln/symlink.7 index 727b8eaa0f1..c90f8ae5ee1 100644 --- a/bin/ln/symlink.7 +++ b/bin/ln/symlink.7 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: symlink.7,v 1.8 1999/07/04 18:59:37 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: symlink.7,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:58 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: symlink.7,v 1.4 1996/04/25 15:44:56 mycroft Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993, 1994 @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ name arguments, to commands which are not traversing a file tree. .Pp Except as noted below, commands follow symbolic links named as command-line arguments. -For example, if there were a symbolic link +For example, if there were a symbolic link .Dq Li slink which pointed to a file named .Dq Li afile , @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ walk (where symbolic links referencing directories are followed). As consistently as possible, you can make commands doing a file tree walk follow any symbolic links named on the command line, regardless of the type of file they reference, by specifying the -.Fl H +.Fl H (for .Dq half\-logical ) flag. diff --git a/distrib/crunch/crunchgen/crunchgen.1 b/distrib/crunch/crunchgen/crunchgen.1 index 34bc1864820..4c041118ee2 100644 --- a/distrib/crunch/crunchgen/crunchgen.1 +++ b/distrib/crunch/crunchgen/crunchgen.1 @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ reads in the specifications in .Ar conf-file for a crunched binary, and generates a Makefile and accompanying top-level C source file that when built create the crunched executable -file from the component programs. For each component program, +file from the component programs. For each component program, .Nm crunchgen can optionally attempt to determine the object (.o) files that make up the program from its source directory Makefile. This information is @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Try to obtain libraries from .Sh CRUNCHGEN CONFIGURATION FILE COMMANDS .Nm Crunchgen -reads specifications from the +reads specifications from the .Ar conf-file that describe the components of the crunched binary. In its simplest use, the component program names are merely listed along with the @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ top-level source directories in which their sources can be found. .Nm Crunchgen then calculates (via the source makefiles) and caches the list of object files and their locations. For more specialized -situations, the user can specify by hand all the parameters that +situations, the user can specify by hand all the parameters that .Nm crunchgen needs. .Pp @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ commands are as follows: .It Nm srcdirs Ar dirname ... A list of source trees in which the source directories of the component programs can be found. These dirs are searched using the -BSD ``<source-dir>/<progname>/'' convention. Multiple +BSD ``<source-dir>/<progname>/'' convention. Multiple .Nm srcdirs lines can be specified. The directories are searched in the order they are given. @@ -145,13 +145,13 @@ Causes the crunched binary to invoke whenever .Ar linkname appears in argv[0]. This allows programs that change their behavior when -run under different names to operate correctly. +run under different names to operate correctly. .El To handle specialized situations, such as when the source is not available or not built via a conventional Makefile, the following .Nm special -commands can be used to set +commands can be used to set .Nm crunchgen parameters for a component program. .Bl -tag -width indent @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ This is normally calculated by looking for a directory named .Dq Pa obj under the .Ar srcdir , -and if that is not found, the +and if that is not found, the .Ar srcdir itself becomes the .Ar objdir . @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ itself becomes the Set the list of object files for program .Ar progname . This is normally calculated by constructing a temporary makefile that includes -.Dq Nm srcdir / Pa Makefile +.Dq Nm srcdir / Pa Makefile and outputs the value of $(OBJS). .It Nm special Ar progname Nm objpaths Ar full-pathname-to-object-file ... Sets the pathnames of the object files for program @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ list. .El .Pp -Only the +Only the .Nm objpaths parameter is actually needed by .Nm crunchgen , @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ and .Nm objs , which are in turn calculated from .Nm srcdir , -so is sometimes convenient to specify the earlier parameters and let +so is sometimes convenient to specify the earlier parameters and let .Nm crunchgen calculate forward from there if it can. @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ running make inside that program's source directory. For this to work the and .Nm objs parameters must also be valid. If they are not valid for a particular program, that -program is skipped in the +program is skipped in the .Ar objs target. .Sh EXAMPLE diff --git a/distrib/crunch/crunchide/crunchide.1 b/distrib/crunch/crunchide/crunchide.1 index be37ee28391..43aeaa82931 100644 --- a/distrib/crunch/crunchide/crunchide.1 +++ b/distrib/crunch/crunchide/crunchide.1 @@ -39,11 +39,11 @@ .Nm Crunchide hides the global symbols of .Ar object-file -such that they are ignored by subsequent runs of the linker, +such that they are ignored by subsequent runs of the linker, .Xr ld 1 . Some symbols may be left visible via the .Fl k Ar keep-symbol -and +and .Fl f Ar keep-list-file options. The .Ar keep-list-file @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ symbols, so to keep the C function ``foo'' visible, the option .Pp .Nm Crunchide -is designed as a companion program for +is designed as a companion program for .Xr crunchgen 1 , which automates the process of creating crunched binaries from multiple component programs. diff --git a/games/adventure/adventure.6 b/games/adventure/adventure.6 index 39c4fe612aa..c84d952a99c 100644 --- a/games/adventure/adventure.6 +++ b/games/adventure/adventure.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: adventure.6,v 1.3 1998/12/15 19:18:14 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: adventure.6,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:57 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -58,8 +58,8 @@ To terminate a game, enter to save a game for later resumption, enter .Dq suspend . .Sh AUTHORS -The game +The game .Nm was originally written in Fortran by Will Crowther and Don Woods. It was later translated to C and enhanced by Jim -Gillogly (jim@rand.org). +Gillogly (jim@rand.org). diff --git a/games/arithmetic/arithmetic.6 b/games/arithmetic/arithmetic.6 index f98ef9e8e7e..273aecff35c 100644 --- a/games/arithmetic/arithmetic.6 +++ b/games/arithmetic/arithmetic.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: arithmetic.6,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:07 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: arithmetic.6,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:54 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ After every 20 problems, it prints the score so far and the time taken. You can quit at any time by typing the interrupt or end-of-file character. .Pp The options are as follows: -.Bl -tag -width indent +.Bl -tag -width indent .It Fl o By default, .Nm diff --git a/games/backgammon/backgammon/backgammon.6 b/games/backgammon/backgammon/backgammon.6 index bb383a2f5c0..4bec2ef5e56 100644 --- a/games/backgammon/backgammon/backgammon.6 +++ b/games/backgammon/backgammon/backgammon.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: backgammon.6,v 1.4 1998/12/15 19:18:22 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: backgammon.6,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:54 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm backgammon .Op Fl -.Op Fl nrwb +.Op Fl nrwb .Op Fl p Ar [r | w | b] .Op Fl t Ar term .Op Fl s Ar file @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ recover previously saved game from .Ar file . .El .Pp -.\" +.\" An argument of .Fl h gets a description of possible arguments. @@ -114,8 +114,8 @@ option will be ignored. (The .Fl t option is not necessary unless the terminal type does not match -the entry in the -.Pa /etc/termcap +the entry in the +.Pa /etc/termcap data base.) .Sh QUICK REFERENCE When the program prompts by typing only your color, @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ means .El .El .Pp -Use +Use .Ic b for bar and .Ic h diff --git a/games/banner/banner.6 b/games/banner/banner.6 index fec0ca70ece..59ef9dc6cb8 100644 --- a/games/banner/banner.6 +++ b/games/banner/banner.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: banner.6,v 1.6 1998/12/15 19:18:23 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: banner.6,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:54 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .Dt BANNER 6 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm banner +.Nm banner .Nd print large banner on printer .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm banner diff --git a/games/battlestar/battlestar.6 b/games/battlestar/battlestar.6 index db259b4bb87..52298da022b 100644 --- a/games/battlestar/battlestar.6 +++ b/games/battlestar/battlestar.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: battlestar.6,v 1.4 1998/12/15 19:18:24 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: battlestar.6,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:55 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: battlestar.6,v 1.4 1995/03/21 15:06:42 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1993 @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Three to rule the world and purge the skies with thunder. .Pp In those times great wizards were known and their powers were beyond belief. They could take any object from thin air, and, uttering the -word +word .Sq su could disappear. .Pp @@ -126,11 +126,11 @@ and .Dq inven will print out your current status in the game. .Sh SAVING A GAME -The command +The command .Dq save -will save your game in a file called +will save your game in a file called .Pa ~/Bstar . -You can recover a saved game by using the +You can recover a saved game by using the .Fl r option when you start up the game, or by giving the name of the saved file as an argument. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Peter Da Silva Kevin Brown .It Edward Wang (edward%ucbarpa@berkeley.arpa) -.It +.It Ken Arnold & Company .El .Sh BUGS diff --git a/games/bcd/bcd.6 b/games/bcd/bcd.6 index d5f8238160e..5b49cef7a0d 100644 --- a/games/bcd/bcd.6 +++ b/games/bcd/bcd.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: bcd.6,v 1.6 1998/12/13 07:56:06 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: bcd.6,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:55 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1988, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ .Nm ppt .Op Ar string ... .Nm morse -.Op Fl s +.Op Fl s .Op Ar string ... .Sh DESCRIPTION The @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Available options: .It Fl s The .Fl s -option for +option for .Nm morse produces dots and dashes rather than words. .It Fl d diff --git a/games/bs/bs.6 b/games/bs/bs.6 index 48e6a76f84f..a29deb8c35c 100644 --- a/games/bs/bs.6 +++ b/games/bs/bs.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: bs.6,v 1.5 1999/07/07 10:50:15 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: bs.6,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:55 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ currently selected ship. The command will place all remaining ships randomly. The ^L command (form feed, ASCII 12) will force a screen redraw). .Sh OPTIONS -The command-line arguments control game modes. +The command-line arguments control game modes. .Bl -tag -width XxXXX .It Fl b Selects a diff --git a/games/canfield/canfield/canfield.6 b/games/canfield/canfield/canfield.6 index eac9307e13c..54743c19481 100644 --- a/games/canfield/canfield/canfield.6 +++ b/games/canfield/canfield/canfield.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: canfield.6,v 1.2 1999/03/20 18:54:43 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: canfield.6,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:55 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: canfield.6,v 1.4 1995/03/21 15:08:30 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1993 @@ -38,12 +38,12 @@ .Dt CANFIELD 6 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm canfield , +.Nm canfield , .Nm cfscores .Nd the solitaire card game canfield .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm canfield -.Nm cfscores +.Nm cfscores .Op Fl a .Op Ar user .Sh DESCRIPTION @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ If you have never played solitaire before, it is recommended that you consult a solitaire instruction book. In Canfield, tableau cards may be built on each other downward in alternate colors. An entire pile must be moved as a unit -in building. Top cards of the piles are available +in building. Top cards of the piles are available to be played on foundations, but never into empty spaces. .Pp Spaces must be filled from the stock. The top card of @@ -63,19 +63,19 @@ keep them open until he wishes to use them. Cards are dealt from the hand to the talon by threes and this repeats until there are no more cards in the hand or the player quits. To have cards dealt onto the talon the -player types -.Sq Ic ht +player types +.Sq Ic ht for his move. Foundation base cards are also automatically moved to the foundation when they become available. .Pp -The command +The command .Sq Ic c causes .Nm canfield to maintain card counting statistics -on the bottom of the screen. -When properly used this can greatly increase one's chances of +on the bottom of the screen. +When properly used this can greatly increase one's chances of winning. .Pp The rules for betting are somewhat less strict than @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Playing time is charged at a rate of $1 per minute. With no arguments, the program .Nm cfscores prints out the current status of your canfield account. -If a +If a .Ar user name is specified, it prints out the status of their canfield account. @@ -129,5 +129,5 @@ It is impossible to cheat. .Sh AUTHORS Originally written: Steve Levine. .Pp -Further random hacking by: Steve Feldman, Kirk McKusick, +Further random hacking by: Steve Feldman, Kirk McKusick, Mikey Olson, and Eric Allman. diff --git a/games/cribbage/cribbage.6 b/games/cribbage/cribbage.6 index e60e5738a50..289ac170074 100644 --- a/games/cribbage/cribbage.6 +++ b/games/cribbage/cribbage.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: cribbage.6,v 1.6 1999/06/10 22:58:19 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: cribbage.6,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:56 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ first asks the player whether he wishes to play a short game ( to 61) or a long game ( .Dq twice around , to 121). A -response of +response of .Sq Ic s will result in a short game; any other response will play a long game. @@ -138,9 +138,9 @@ or alternatively, one of: .Sq ten , .Sq jack , .Sq queen , -and +and .Sq king . -Suits may be specified as: +Suits may be specified as: .Sq s , .Sq h , .Sq d , @@ -152,16 +152,16 @@ or alternatively as: .Sq diamonds , and .Sq clubs . -A card may be specified as: +A card may be specified as: .Dq Ao rank Ac \ Aq suit , -or: +or: .Dq Ao rank Ac of Aq suit . If the single letter rank and suit designations are used, the space separating the suit and rank may be left out. Also, if only one card of the desired rank is playable, typing the rank is sufficient. -For example, if your hand was +For example, if your hand was .Dq 2H, 4D, 5C, 6H, JC, and KD -and it was desired to discard the king of diamonds, any of +and it was desired to discard the king of diamonds, any of the following could be typed: .Sq k , .Sq king , diff --git a/games/factor/factor.6 b/games/factor/factor.6 index 16e7ee5c21b..84b6349a916 100644 --- a/games/factor/factor.6 +++ b/games/factor/factor.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: factor.6,v 1.4 1998/12/15 19:18:30 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: factor.6,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:56 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ factor a number, generate primes The .Nm utility will factor integers between -2147483648 and 2147483647 inclusive. -When a number is factored, it is printed, followed by a +When a number is factored, it is printed, followed by a .Dq \: , and the list of factors on a single line. Factors are listed in ascending order, and are preceded by a space. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ utility prints primes in ascending order, one per line, starting at or above and continuing until, but not including .Ar stop . The -.Ar start +.Ar start value must be at least 0 and not greater than .Ar stop . The @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ value is terminated by a non-digit character (such as a newline). The input line must not be longer than 255 characters. .Sh BUGS .Nm factor -cannot handle the +cannot handle the .Dq 10 most wanted factor list; .Nm primes diff --git a/games/fish/fish.6 b/games/fish/fish.6 index 1048d6f1d35..1aeacedb6cb 100644 --- a/games/fish/fish.6 +++ b/games/fish/fish.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: fish.6,v 1.4 1998/12/15 19:18:31 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: fish.6,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:56 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -34,10 +34,10 @@ .\" @(#)fish.6 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93 .\" .Dd May 31, 1993 -.Dt FISH 6 +.Dt FISH 6 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm fish +.Nm fish .Nd play .Dq Go Fish .Sh SYNOPSIS @@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ a traditional children's card game. .Pp The computer deals the player and itself seven cards each, and places the rest of the deck face-down (figuratively), to be drawn from later. -The object of the game is to collect +The object of the game is to collect .Dq books , or all of the cards of a given rank. -For example, collecting four 2's would give the player a +For example, collecting four 2's would give the player a .Dq book of 2's . .Pp The options are as follows: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ up to the asking player. There must be at least one card of the requested rank already in the asking player's hand. When the asked player has no -cards of the requested rank, the asker is told to +cards of the requested rank, the asker is told to .Dq Go Fish! Then, the asker draws a card from the deck. If the card drawn is of the rank asked for, the turn continues; diff --git a/games/fortune/fortune/fortune.6 b/games/fortune/fortune/fortune.6 index 2fb9c4829ee..6a0f457dc07 100644 --- a/games/fortune/fortune/fortune.6 +++ b/games/fortune/fortune/fortune.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: fortune.6,v 1.6 1998/12/15 19:18:32 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: fortune.6,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:56 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -40,14 +40,14 @@ .Dt FORTUNE 6 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm fortune +.Nm fortune .Nd print a random, hopefully interesting, adage .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm fortune .Op Fl aefilosw -.Op Fl m Ar pattern -.Oo -.Op Ar N% +.Op Fl m Ar pattern +.Oo +.Op Ar N% .Ar file/dir/all .Oc .Sh DESCRIPTION diff --git a/games/fortune/strfile/strfile.8 b/games/fortune/strfile/strfile.8 index 7eaff5847ad..451f1c9168a 100644 --- a/games/fortune/strfile/strfile.8 +++ b/games/fortune/strfile/strfile.8 @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. .\" -.\" +.\" .\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by .\" Ken Arnold. .\" diff --git a/games/gomoku/gomoku.6 b/games/gomoku/gomoku.6 index 99d1422e1fc..04fc49b2c7e 100644 --- a/games/gomoku/gomoku.6 +++ b/games/gomoku/gomoku.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: gomoku.6,v 1.6 1999/03/20 18:54:46 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: gomoku.6,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:56 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -55,12 +55,12 @@ moves first. With no arguments, .Nm will display a playing board and prompt for moves from the user. -The interface is visual and straightforward; you move to a spot +The interface is visual and straightforward; you move to a spot using the rogue(6) / hack(6) motion keys .Em hjklyubn -and select it with either +and select it with either .Sq space -or +or .Sq return . The game will beep if you select a location that is already occupied. To save the game, type diff --git a/games/hack/hack.6 b/games/hack/hack.6 index 120dfe8ab2e..0433bcfc235 100644 --- a/games/hack/hack.6 +++ b/games/hack/hack.6 @@ -47,15 +47,15 @@ There is a 10% penalty for getting yourself killed. The administration of the game is kept in the directory specified with the .Fl d option, or, if no such option is given, in the directory specified by -the environment variable -.Ev HACKDIR , +the environment variable +.Ev HACKDIR , or, if no such variable exists, in the current directory. This same directory contains several auxiliary files such as lockfiles and the list of topscorers and a subdirectory .Pa save where games are saved. The game administrator may however choose to install hack with a fixed -playing ground, usually +playing ground, usually .Pa /var/games/hackdir . .Pp The @@ -136,10 +136,10 @@ String predefining several hack options (see help file). .El .Pp Several other environment variables are used in debugging (wizard) mode, -like +like .Ev GENOCIDED , -.Ev INVENT , -.Ev MAGIC +.Ev INVENT , +.Ev MAGIC and .Ev SHOPTYPE . .Sh BUGS diff --git a/games/hunt/hunt/hunt.6 b/games/hunt/hunt/hunt.6 index 4c342895337..91a5e850439 100644 --- a/games/hunt/hunt/hunt.6 +++ b/games/hunt/hunt/hunt.6 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" $NetBSD: hunt.6,v 1.3 1997/10/10 16:32:30 lukem Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: hunt.6,v 1.7 1999/07/07 10:50:15 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: hunt.6,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:58 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" hunt .\" Copyright (c) 1985 Conrad C. Huang, Gregory S. Couch, Kenneth C.R.C. Arnold @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ appear as the team name. A team name is a single digit to avoid conflicting with other characters used in the game. Use a team name consisting of a single space -.Pq Sq \ +.Pq Sq \ to remain on your own. .Pp The @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ The symbols on the screen are: .Bl -tag -width Ic -compact .It Li \&- \&| \&+ walls -.It Li \&/ \e +.It Li \&/ \e diagonal (deflecting) walls .It Li # doors (dispersion walls) diff --git a/games/hunt/huntd/huntd.6 b/games/hunt/huntd/huntd.6 index b284dd74057..07b169e5f09 100644 --- a/games/hunt/huntd/huntd.6 +++ b/games/hunt/huntd/huntd.6 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" $NetBSD: huntd.6,v 1.3 1998/01/09 08:03:42 perry Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: huntd.6,v 1.7 1999/07/07 10:50:15 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: huntd.6,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:58 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Hunt .\" Copyright (c) 1985 Conrad C. Huang, Gregory S. Couch, Kenneth C.R.C. Arnold @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ duration of a scan (default 20) .It mindshot minimum shot class needed to make a drone (default 2) .It simstep -minimum simulation step in microseconds. Zero means traditional blocking +minimum simulation step in microseconds. Zero means traditional blocking behaviour. Try 55000 for something reasonable (default 0) .El .Sh "SEE ALSO" diff --git a/games/mille/mille.6 b/games/mille/mille.6 index 22bc1dd4628..136c396b97c 100644 --- a/games/mille/mille.6 +++ b/games/mille/mille.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: mille.6,v 1.4 1998/12/15 19:18:42 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: mille.6,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:56 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ .\" @(#)mille.6 8.3 (Berkeley) 6/1/94 .\" .Dd June 1, 1994 -.Dt MILLE 6 +.Dt MILLE 6 .Os .Sh NAME .Nm mille @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ on your Battle Pile. Distance cards are played when you have a .Em Go card on your Battle pile, -or a +or a .Em Right of Way in your Safety area and are not stopped by a Hazard Card. They can be played in any combination that totals exactly 700 miles, diff --git a/games/monop/monop.6 b/games/monop/monop.6 index 4076a93b616..3b3d56b2de1 100644 --- a/games/monop/monop.6 +++ b/games/monop/monop.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: monop.6,v 1.4 1998/12/15 19:18:44 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: monop.6,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:57 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ no auction is held and the property remains unowned. The game, in effect, lends the player money, so it is possible to buy something which you cannot afford. However, as soon as a person goes into debt, -he must +he must .Dq fix the problem , .Em i.e. , make himself solvent, before play can continue. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ which puts the property back on the board, unowned. .Pp Any time that the response to a question is a .Em string , -e.g., a name, place or person, you can type +e.g., a name, place or person, you can type .Sq Ic ? to get a list of valid answers. It is not possible to input a negative number, nor is it ever necessary. @@ -87,13 +87,13 @@ commands): .It Name The first ten characters of the name of the square .It Own -The +The .Em number of the owner of the property. .It Price The cost of the property (if any) .It Mg -This field has a +This field has a .Sq * in it if the property is mortgaged .It \&# @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ money, get-out-of-jail-free cards, and property. .It Ic holdings show holdings list: look at anyone's holdings. It will ask you whose holdings you wish to look at. -When you are finished, type +When you are finished, type .Sq Ic done . .It Ic mortgage mortgage property: @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ and, if the file exists, confirm that you wish to overwrite it. read in a previously saved game from a file. It leaves the file intact. .It Ic roll -roll the dice and move forward to your new location. +roll the dice and move forward to your new location. If you simply hit the <RETURN> key instead of a command, it is the same as typing .Ic roll . diff --git a/games/pom/pom.6 b/games/pom/pom.6 index 0a2b837dc86..183f44a9afb 100644 --- a/games/pom/pom.6 +++ b/games/pom/pom.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pom.6,v 1.3 1998/12/15 19:18:47 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pom.6,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:57 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .Dt POM 6 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm pom +.Nm pom .Nd display the phase of the moon .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm pom @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ The .Nm utility displays the current phase of the moon. -Useful for selecting software completion target dates and predicting +Useful for selecting software completion target dates and predicting managerial behavior. .Pp .Bl -tag -width [[[[[cc]yy]mm]dd]HH] @@ -62,6 +62,6 @@ Times must be within range of the .Ux epoch. .Sh ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS -This program is based on routines from +This program is based on routines from .%B Practical Astronomy with Your Calculator, Third Edition by Peter Duffett-Smith. diff --git a/games/rain/rain.6 b/games/rain/rain.6 index 2f44836fc22..54332a974a2 100644 --- a/games/rain/rain.6 +++ b/games/rain/rain.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rain.6,v 1.8 1998/12/15 19:18:50 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: rain.6,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:57 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -37,15 +37,15 @@ .Dt RAIN 6 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm rain +.Nm rain .Nd animated raindrops display .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm rain .Op Fl d Ar delay .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm -is modeled after the -.Tn VAX/VMS +is modeled after the +.Tn VAX/VMS program of the same name. To obtain the proper effect, either the terminal must be set for 9600 baud or the @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ reasonable delay is 120; the default is 0. .Pp As with all programs that use .Tn termcap , -the +the .Ev TERM environment variable must be set (and exported) to the type of the terminal being used. diff --git a/games/robots/robots.6 b/games/robots/robots.6 index 34fd1768d92..60e6f67a26d 100644 --- a/games/robots/robots.6 +++ b/games/robots/robots.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: robots.6,v 1.4 1998/12/15 19:18:52 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: robots.6,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:57 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .Dt ROBOTS 6 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm robots +.Nm robots .Nd fight off villainous robots .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm robots @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ redraw the screen All commands can be preceded by a count. .Pp If you use the -.Sq Ic w +.Sq Ic w command and survive to the next level, you will get a bonus of 10% for each robot which died after you decided to wait. If you die, however, you get nothing. diff --git a/games/snake/snake.6 b/games/snake/snake.6 index 45580c20827..a3fbc8c68a6 100644 --- a/games/snake/snake.6 +++ b/games/snake/snake.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: snake.6,v 1.1 1999/03/13 02:08:09 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: snake.6,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:57 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: snake.6,v 1.5 1995/04/22 08:34:35 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1993 @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ .Dt SNAKE 6 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm snake , +.Nm snake , .Nm snscore .Nd display chase game .Sh SYNOPSIS @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ .br .Nm snscore .Sh DESCRIPTION -.Nm snake +.Nm snake is a display-based game. The object of the game is to make as much money as possible without getting eaten by the snake. The @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ The snake is 6 squares long and is represented by S's. The money is $, and an exit is #. Your score is posted in the upper left hand corner. .Pp -You can move around using the same conventions as +You can move around using the same conventions as .Xr vi 1 : that is, the .Ic h , @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Other possibilities include: These keys are like hjkl but form a directed pad around the d key. .It Ic HJKL These keys move you all the way in the indicated direction to the -same row or column as the money. This does +same row or column as the money. This does .Em not let you jump away from the snake, but rather saves you from having to type a key repeatedly. The snake still gets all his turns. diff --git a/games/trek/trek.6 b/games/trek/trek.6 index b12310e03aa..b3ccdce9365 100644 --- a/games/trek/trek.6 +++ b/games/trek/trek.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: trek.6,v 1.5 1999/03/12 03:02:44 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: trek.6,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:57 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: trek.6,v 1.4 1995/04/22 10:59:35 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1993 @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ .Dt TREK 6 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm trek +.Nm trek .Nd trekkie game .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm trek @@ -50,12 +50,12 @@ For complete documentation, see by Eric Allman. .Pp The game will ask you what length game you would like. -Valid responses are +Valid responses are .Dq short , .Dq medium , -and +and .Dq long . -You may also type +You may also type .Dq restart , which restarts a previously saved game. You will then be prompted for the skill, to which you must respond @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Eric Allman .It .Ic ca Ns pture .It -.Ic cl Ns oak +.Ic cl Ns oak .Ic u Ns p/ Ns Ic d Ns own .It .Ic c Ns omputer request; ... @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Eric Allman .It .Ic do Ns ck .It -.Ic dump No (save game to +.Ic dump No (save game to .Pa ./trek.dump ) .It .Ic help @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ amt1 course1 spread1 ... .It .Ic r Ns est time .It -.Ic sh Ns ields +.Ic sh Ns ields .Ic u Ns p/ Ns Ic d Ns own .It .Ic s Ns rscan diff --git a/games/worm/worm.6 b/games/worm/worm.6 index 7fcab41ecef..4aea12eb589 100644 --- a/games/worm/worm.6 +++ b/games/worm/worm.6 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: worm.6,v 1.6 1998/12/15 19:18:59 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: worm.6,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:57 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -50,11 +50,11 @@ and your head is the "@". You move with the hjkl keys (as in the game .Xr snake 6 Ns ). If you don't press any keys, you continue in the direction you last moved. The upper case HJKL keys move you as if you had pressed -several of the corresponding lower case key (9 for HL and 5 for JK, or +several of the corresponding lower case key (9 for HL and 5 for JK, or until you run into a digit, whichever comes first). .Pp On the screen you will see a digit. If your worm eats the digit it will -grow longer by that number of "o"'s. The object of the game is to see how +grow longer by that number of "o"'s. The object of the game is to see how long you can make the worm grow. .Pp The game ends when the worm runs into either the sides of the screen diff --git a/kerberosIV/afslog/afslog.1 b/kerberosIV/afslog/afslog.1 index 5b301ad1811..146f6179c02 100644 --- a/kerberosIV/afslog/afslog.1 +++ b/kerberosIV/afslog/afslog.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: afslog.1,v 1.3 1999/05/23 14:10:49 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: afslog.1,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:58 aaron Exp $ .\" $KTH: afslog.1,v 1.2 1996/11/28 13:44:40 assar Exp $ .\" .Dd April 27, 1996 @@ -20,12 +20,12 @@ obtains AFS tokens for specified cells .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm -command obtains AFS tokens, +command obtains AFS tokens, .Ar args are either a name of a cell or a pathnames of a file in the cell to -get tokens for. If an argument is +get tokens for. If an argument is .Li . -or +or .Li .. or contains a slash it is assumed to be a pathname. Otherwise it is assumed to be a name of a cell or a prefix thereof. @@ -63,8 +63,8 @@ flag is given any tokens are removed and all other arguments are ignored. It should be able to handle the MIT Athena .Nm aklog flags -.Fl hosts , -.Fl zsubs , +.Fl hosts , +.Fl zsubs , and .Fl noprdb , but does not. diff --git a/kerberosIV/kauth/kauth.1 b/kerberosIV/kauth/kauth.1 index a92aad728ea..b956e1a5a7d 100644 --- a/kerberosIV/kauth/kauth.1 +++ b/kerberosIV/kauth/kauth.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $Id: kauth.1,v 1.3 1999/05/23 14:10:50 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: kauth.1,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:58 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 4, 1996 .Dt KAUTH 1 @@ -37,20 +37,20 @@ Athena Kerberos 4 patchlevel 10 command however not in a compatible way. It requires that the remote host runs the .Xr kauthd 8 , -server. The +server. The .Fl r and .Fl t flags are useful only with this option. .It Fl r User on the remote host that should own the ticket file. -.It Fl t +.It Fl t Ticket file on remote host. .It Fl l Lifetime of tickets in minutes. A value of -1 is used for maximum ticket lifetime. .It Fl f -Srvtab to get service keys from. Default is +Srvtab to get service keys from. Default is .Pa /etc/kerberosIV/srvtab . This is mainly used with batch services that need to run authenticated. If any command is given, it will be executed in an diff --git a/kerberosIV/kprop/kprop.8 b/kerberosIV/kprop/kprop.8 index e4d3743ea9b..567e5931cf2 100644 --- a/kerberosIV/kprop/kprop.8 +++ b/kerberosIV/kprop/kprop.8 @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ database to the Kerberos slaves, where it is received by the waiting .Xr kpropd 8 daemon. .Pp -The first parameter, +The first parameter, .Nm database , is the name of the file out of which data is extracted. This file is not the db-formatted Kerberos database, @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ information. The database is a file created by the .Nm kdb_util slave dump command. It is an ASCII representation of the Kerberos database. .Pp -The second parameter that must be supplied is +The second parameter that must be supplied is .Nm slaves_file , the name of the file on the Kerberos master that lists the Kerberos slaves to which kprop diff --git a/kerberosIV/kpropd/kpropd.8 b/kerberosIV/kpropd/kpropd.8 index 129f2db797b..99834cdd1af 100644 --- a/kerberosIV/kpropd/kpropd.8 +++ b/kerberosIV/kpropd/kpropd.8 @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ This utility does not support the transfer of encrypted data. .Pp If the .Nm -P -or +or .Nm -p options are not specified and the PATH environment variable does not contain the directory with diff --git a/lib/libarch/i386/i386_get_ioperm.2 b/lib/libarch/i386/i386_get_ioperm.2 index 1c5c6772dcd..6d77be8b50a 100644 --- a/lib/libarch/i386/i386_get_ioperm.2 +++ b/lib/libarch/i386/i386_get_ioperm.2 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: i386_get_ioperm.2,v 1.6 1999/07/07 14:22:24 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: i386_get_ioperm.2,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:14 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: i386_get_ioperm.2,v 1.3 1996/02/27 22:57:17 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ sets the I/O permission bitmap from the data pointed to by .Ar iomap . This call is restricted to the super-user. .Pp -The permission bitmap contains +The permission bitmap contains 1024 bits in 32 longwords. If bit @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ allocation in a kernel structure. If you need access to ports beyond use .Xr i386_iopl 2 . .Sh SEE ALSO -.Xr i386_iopl 2 +.Xr i386_iopl 2 .Sh REFERENCES i386 Microprocessor Programmer's Reference Manual, Intel .Sh WARNING diff --git a/lib/libarch/i386/i386_get_ldt.2 b/lib/libarch/i386/i386_get_ldt.2 index 05d7888d8b6..10cb98439ed 100644 --- a/lib/libarch/i386/i386_get_ldt.2 +++ b/lib/libarch/i386/i386_get_ldt.2 @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ LDT. Both routines accept a starting selector number .Fa start_sel , an array of memory that -will contain the descriptors to be set or returned +will contain the descriptors to be set or returned .Fa descs , and the number of entries to set or return .Fa num_sels . diff --git a/lib/libarch/i386/i386_vm86.2 b/lib/libarch/i386/i386_vm86.2 index 2ef617df3af..e24cd47d997 100644 --- a/lib/libarch/i386/i386_vm86.2 +++ b/lib/libarch/i386/i386_vm86.2 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: i386_vm86.2,v 1.4 1999/07/07 14:22:24 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: i386_vm86.2,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:14 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: i386_vm86.2,v 1.1 1996/02/21 00:21:52 jtk Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -17,10 +17,10 @@ .\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. .\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software .\" must display the following acknowledgement: -.\" This product includes software developed by the NetBSD +.\" This product includes software developed by the NetBSD .\" Foundation, Inc. and its contributors. -.\" 4. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its -.\" contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived +.\" 4. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its +.\" contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived .\" from this software without specific prior written permission. .\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS @@ -56,16 +56,16 @@ will set the process into virtual 8086 mode using the registers and selectors specified by the context pointed to by .Ar vmcp . -The processor registers are set from +The processor registers are set from .Ar vmcp->substr.regs , -and the emulated processor type from +and the emulated processor type from .Ar vmcp->substr.ss_cpu_type . .Pp The kernel keeps a pointer to the context, and uses the tables stored at .Ar vmcp->int_byuser and .Ar vmcp->int21_byuser -for fast virtual interrupt handling. If the +for fast virtual interrupt handling. If the .Ar n th bit is clear in the first of these arrays, then the kernel may directly emulate the real-mode x86 INT diff --git a/lib/libc/compat-43/gethostid.3 b/lib/libc/compat-43/gethostid.3 index 18a8f67253e..40b671a90e9 100644 --- a/lib/libc/compat-43/gethostid.3 +++ b/lib/libc/compat-43/gethostid.3 @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $OpenBSD: gethostid.3,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:10:57 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: gethostid.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:14 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 2, 1993 .Dt GETHOSTID 3 @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ The .Fn gethostid and .Fn sethostid -syscalls appeared in +syscalls appeared in .Bx 4.2 and were dropped in .Bx 4.4 . diff --git a/lib/libc/compat-43/setregid.3 b/lib/libc/compat-43/setregid.3 index cd02537374d..be3b4881e75 100644 --- a/lib/libc/compat-43/setregid.3 +++ b/lib/libc/compat-43/setregid.3 @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $OpenBSD: setregid.3,v 1.5 1999/07/07 14:22:24 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: setregid.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:14 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 10, 1991 .Dt SETREGID 3 @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Supplying a value of \-1 for either the real or effective group ID forces the system to substitute the current ID in place of the \-1 parameter. .Pp -The +The .Fn setregid function was intended to allow swapping the real and effective group IDs in set-group-ID programs to temporarily relinquish diff --git a/lib/libc/compat-43/setreuid.3 b/lib/libc/compat-43/setreuid.3 index 9261fbbcc30..7cf5169e203 100644 --- a/lib/libc/compat-43/setreuid.3 +++ b/lib/libc/compat-43/setreuid.3 @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $OpenBSD: setreuid.3,v 1.5 1999/07/07 14:22:24 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: setreuid.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:14 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 10, 1991 .Dt SETREUID 3 @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ The real and effective user IDs of the current process are set according to the arguments. If .Fa ruid -or +or .Fa euid is \-1, the current UID is filled in by the system. Unprivileged users may change the real user diff --git a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigblock.3 b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigblock.3 index f3fc487a642..7689d03f184 100644 --- a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigblock.3 +++ b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigblock.3 @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $OpenBSD: sigblock.3,v 1.7 1999/05/25 01:50:57 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sigblock.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:15 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 10, 1991 .Dt SIGBLOCK 3 @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ adds the signals specified in to the set of signals currently being blocked from delivery. Signals are blocked if the -corresponding bit in +corresponding bit in .Fa mask is a 1; the macro .Fn sigmask diff --git a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigpause.3 b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigpause.3 index f1e7e06e4b1..19c11851822 100644 --- a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigpause.3 +++ b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigpause.3 @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $OpenBSD: sigpause.3,v 1.7 1999/07/07 14:22:24 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sigpause.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:15 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 10, 1991 .Dt SIGPAUSE 3 @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ .Xr sigsuspend 2 . .Pp .Fn sigpause -assigns +assigns .Fa sigmask to the set of masked signals and then waits for a signal to arrive; diff --git a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigsetmask.3 b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigsetmask.3 index 1f3c2154f4d..306a0860837 100644 --- a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigsetmask.3 +++ b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigsetmask.3 @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $OpenBSD: sigsetmask.3,v 1.7 1999/05/25 01:50:57 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sigsetmask.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:15 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 10, 1991 .Dt SIGSETMASK 3 @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This interface is made obsoleted by: .Fn sigsetmask sets the current signal mask Signals are blocked from delivery if the -corresponding bit in +corresponding bit in .Fa mask is a 1; the macro .Fn sigmask diff --git a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigvec.3 b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigvec.3 index 0196ba53319..81ccf96491d 100644 --- a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigvec.3 +++ b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigvec.3 @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $OpenBSD: sigvec.3,v 1.13 1999/05/23 14:10:58 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sigvec.3,v 1.14 1999/07/09 13:35:15 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd April 29, 1991 .Dt SIGVEC 3 @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ or .Xr sigsetmask call is made). This mask is formed by taking the union of the current signal mask, -the signal to be delivered, and +the signal to be delivered, and the signal mask associated with the handler to be invoked. .Pp .Fn sigvec diff --git a/lib/libc/crypt/arc4random.3 b/lib/libc/crypt/arc4random.3 index 988de1d0f67..b10115c4d88 100644 --- a/lib/libc/crypt/arc4random.3 +++ b/lib/libc/crypt/arc4random.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: arc4random.3,v 1.10 1999/07/04 18:59:42 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: arc4random.3,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:15 aaron Exp $ .\" Copyright 1997 Niels Provos <provos@physnet.uni-hamburg.de> .\" All rights reserved. .\" @@ -47,19 +47,19 @@ .Fn arc4random_addrandom "u_char *dat" "int datlen" .Sh DESCRIPTION The -.Fn arc4random +.Fn arc4random function uses the key stream generator employed by the arc4 cipher, which uses 8*8 8 bit S-Boxes. The S-Boxes can be in about (2**1700) states. .Pp The .Fn arc4random_stir -function reads data from +function reads data from .Pa /dev/arandom and uses it to permute the S-Boxes via .Fn arc4random_addrandom . .Pp -There is no need to call +There is no need to call .Fn arc4random_stir before using .Fn arc4random , @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ automatically initializes itself. .Xr random 3 .Sh HISTORY An algorithm call -.Pa RC4 +.Pa RC4 was designed by RSA Data Security, Inc. It was considered a trade secret, but not trademarked. A clone of this was posted anonymously to the USENET and was confirmed to @@ -81,5 +81,5 @@ Because of the trade secret situation, RSA Data Security, Inc. can do nothing about the situation. Since .Pa RC4 -used to be a trade secret, the cipher is now referred to as +used to be a trade secret, the cipher is now referred to as .Pa ARC4 . diff --git a/lib/libc/crypt/blowfish.3 b/lib/libc/crypt/blowfish.3 index 0ab44d21d26..647c8cb6b20 100644 --- a/lib/libc/crypt/blowfish.3 +++ b/lib/libc/crypt/blowfish.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: blowfish.3,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:10:58 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: blowfish.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:15 aaron Exp $ .\" Copyright 1997 Niels Provos <provos@physnet.uni-hamburg.de> .\" All rights reserved. .\" @@ -74,15 +74,15 @@ must be even. .Fn blf_dec is used for decrypting Blowfish encrypted blocks. .Pp -The functions +The functions .Fn blf_ecb_encrypt and -.Fn blf_ecb_decrypt +.Fn blf_ecb_decrypt are used for encrypting and decrypting octet streams in ECB mode. -The functions +The functions .Fn blf_cbc_encrypt and -.Fn blf_cbc_decrypt +.Fn blf_cbc_decrypt are used for encrypting and decrypting octet streams in Cipherblock Chaining Mode (CBC). .Pp diff --git a/lib/libc/crypt/crypt.3 b/lib/libc/crypt/crypt.3 index 239c9b30898..c22e4d21af5 100644 --- a/lib/libc/crypt/crypt.3 +++ b/lib/libc/crypt/crypt.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: crypt.3,v 1.12 1999/03/18 11:08:33 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: crypt.3,v 1.13 1999/07/09 13:35:15 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" FreeSec: libcrypt .\" @@ -94,42 +94,42 @@ and .Fa salt . .Ss "MD5" crypt: .Pp -For -.Tn MD5 -crypt the version number, -.Fa salt +For +.Tn MD5 +crypt the version number, +.Fa salt and the hashed password are separated by the ``$'' character. The maximum length of a password is limited by the length counter of the MD5 context, which is about -2**64. A valid MD5 password entry looks like this: +2**64. A valid MD5 password entry looks like this: .Pp ``$1$caeiHQwX$hsKqOjrFRRN6K32OWkCBf1''. .Pp -The whole MD5 password string is passed as +The whole MD5 password string is passed as .Fa setting for interpretation. .Ss "Blowfish" crypt: .Pp -The -.Tn Blowfish -version of crypt has 128 bits of -.Fa salt +The +.Tn Blowfish +version of crypt has 128 bits of +.Fa salt in order to make building dictionaries of common passwords space consuming. The initial state -of the -.Tn Blowfish -cipher is expanded using the +of the +.Tn Blowfish +cipher is expanded using the .Fa salt and the -.Fa password +.Fa password repeating the process a variable number of rounds, which is encoded in the password string. The maximum password length is 72. The final Blowfish password entry is created by encrypting -the string ``OrpheanBeholderScryDoubt'' with the -.Tn Blowfish +the string ``OrpheanBeholderScryDoubt'' with the +.Tn Blowfish state 64 times. .Pp -The version number, the logarithm of the number of rounds and +The version number, the logarithm of the number of rounds and the concatenation of salt and hashed password are separated by the ``$'' character. An encoded ``8'' would specify 256 rounds. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ A valid Blowfish password looks like this: .Pp ``$2a$12$eIAq8PR8sIUnJ1HaohxX2O9x9Qlm2vK97LJ5dsXdmB.eXF42qjchC''. .Pp -The whole Blowfish password string is passed as +The whole Blowfish password string is passed as .Fa setting for interpretation. .Ss "Traditional" crypt: @@ -285,13 +285,13 @@ first appeared in This library (FreeSec 1.0) was developed outside the United States of America as an unencumbered replacement for the U.S.-only libcrypt encryption library. -Programs linked against the +Programs linked against the .Fn crypt -interface may be exported from the U.S.A. only if they use +interface may be exported from the U.S.A. only if they use .Fn crypt solely for authentication purposes and avoid use of the other programmer interfaces listed above. Special care has been taken -in the library so that programs which only use the +in the library so that programs which only use the .Fn crypt interface do not pull in the other components. .Sh AUTHOR diff --git a/lib/libc/db/man/btree.3 b/lib/libc/db/man/btree.3 index 623c7c3341e..298f1b0e66f 100644 --- a/lib/libc/db/man/btree.3 +++ b/lib/libc/db/man/btree.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: btree.3,v 1.11 1999/07/07 10:50:04 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: btree.3,v 1.12 1999/07/09 13:35:15 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: btree.3,v 1.6 1996/05/03 21:26:48 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Phillip F Knaack. All rights reserved. @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ associated key/data pairs. .Pp The btree access method specific data structure provided to .Fn dbopen -is defined in the +is defined in the .Em <db.h> include file as follows: .Pp @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ is and a comparison routine is specified, no prefix comparison is done. .It lorder The byte order for integers in the stored database metadata. -The number should represent the order as an integer; for example, +The number should represent the order as an integer; for example, big endian order would be the number 4,321. If .Fa lorder diff --git a/lib/libc/db/man/hash.3 b/lib/libc/db/man/hash.3 index 05f7900e8e9..55492dd9564 100644 --- a/lib/libc/db/man/hash.3 +++ b/lib/libc/db/man/hash.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: hash.3,v 1.8 1999/07/07 10:50:04 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: hash.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:15 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: hash.3,v 1.6 1996/05/03 21:26:50 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Phillip F Knaack. All rights reserved. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ string and a length) and return a 32-bit quantity to be used as the hash value. .It lorder The byte order for integers in the stored database metadata. -The number should represent the order as an integer; for example, +The number should represent the order as an integer; for example, big endian order would be the number 4,321. If .Fa lorder is 0 (no order is specified) the current host order is used. diff --git a/lib/libc/db/man/ndbm.3 b/lib/libc/db/man/ndbm.3 index c235bca5d1b..60dcaba64c7 100644 --- a/lib/libc/db/man/ndbm.3 +++ b/lib/libc/db/man/ndbm.3 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" David Leonard, 1998. Placed in the public domain. -.\" $OpenBSD: ndbm.3,v 1.8 1999/07/07 10:50:04 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ndbm.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:15 aaron Exp $ .Dd May 13, 1998 .Dt NDBM 3 .Os @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ data with the key When storing, the .Fa store_mode parameter must be one of: -.Bl -tag -width DBM_REPLACE -offset indent +.Bl -tag -width DBM_REPLACE -offset indent .It Dv DBM_INSERT Only insert new keys into the database. Existing key/content pairs are untouched. diff --git a/lib/libc/db/man/recno.3 b/lib/libc/db/man/recno.3 index b69827e31b1..03dd057416c 100644 --- a/lib/libc/db/man/recno.3 +++ b/lib/libc/db/man/recno.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: recno.3,v 1.7 1999/07/07 10:50:04 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: recno.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:15 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: recno.3,v 1.6 1996/05/03 21:26:51 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Phillip F Knaack. All rights reserved. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ record number five to be renumbered to record number four, as well as the cursor, if positioned after record number one, to shift down one record. .Pp -The +The .Nm access method specific data structure provided to .Fn dbopen diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/alarm.3 b/lib/libc/gen/alarm.3 index 9fd9fa6e044..c2f4bacbe43 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/alarm.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/alarm.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: alarm.3,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:01 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: alarm.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:20 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993, 1994 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -83,10 +83,10 @@ alarm. .Sh STANDARDS The .Fn alarm -function conforms to +function conforms to .St -p1003.1-90 . .Sh HISTORY An .Fn alarm -function appeared in +function appeared in .At v7 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/confstr.3 b/lib/libc/gen/confstr.3 index 5da41b75910..c76bc532cab 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/confstr.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/confstr.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: confstr.3,v 1.9 1999/06/04 01:30:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: confstr.3,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:16 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ is a non-null pointer, and .Fa name has a value; up to .Fa len -\- 1 bytes of the value are copied into the buffer +\- 1 bytes of the value are copied into the buffer .Fa buf . The copied value is always null terminated. .Pp diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/daemon.3 b/lib/libc/gen/daemon.3 index 010b555c0e2..d00ac098e24 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/daemon.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/daemon.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: daemon.3,v 1.5 1999/04/02 16:21:35 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: daemon.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:16 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ may fail and set .Va errno for any of the errors specified for the library functions .Xr fork 2 -and +and .Xr setsid 2 . .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr fork 2 , diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/directory.3 b/lib/libc/gen/directory.3 index 95d85109f03..dea7a5f60c3 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/directory.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/directory.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: directory.3,v 1.9 1999/06/04 01:30:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: directory.3,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:16 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ are good only for the lifetime of the pointer, .Fa dirp , from which they are derived. -If the directory is closed and then reopened, the +If the directory is closed and then reopened, the .Fn telldir value may be invalidated due to undetected directory compaction. It is safe to use a previous diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/err.3 b/lib/libc/gen/err.3 index b31003fac7c..67b7e2aae4b 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/err.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/err.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: err.3,v 1.7 1999/07/02 16:57:48 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: err.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:16 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ and .Fn vwarn functions only, the error message string affiliated with the current value of the global variable -.Va errno +.Va errno is output. In all cases, the output is followed by a newline character. .Pp @@ -138,5 +138,5 @@ The .Fn err and .Fn warn -functions first appeared in +functions first appeared in .Bx 4.4 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/frexp.3 b/lib/libc/gen/frexp.3 index 8551fa6c324..a8b8d1f696c 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/frexp.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/frexp.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: frexp.3,v 1.4 1999/06/05 03:44:53 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: frexp.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:16 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ function returns the value .Li x , such that .Li x -is a +is a .Li double with magnitude in the interval .Bq 1/2 , 1 @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ times 2 raised to the power .Fa *exp . If .Fa value -is zero, both parts of the result are zero. +is zero, both parts of the result are zero. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr ldexp 3 , .Xr math 3 , diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/fts.3 b/lib/libc/gen/fts.3 index 59f4691abfc..953a378b3b2 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/fts.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/fts.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: fts.3,v 1.12 1999/06/05 03:44:53 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: fts.3,v 1.13 1999/07/09 13:35:20 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993, 1994 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ or .Fn fts_read functions, with its .Fa fts_info -field set to +field set to .Dv FTS_DNR , .Dv FTS_ERR or @@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ fields of the structures may .Em never be used in this comparison. -If the +If the .Fa fts_info field is set to .Dv FTS_NS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getcap.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getcap.3 index de9f6005b35..4c9fbf99cb2 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/getcap.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/getcap.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getcap.3,v 1.15 1999/07/02 16:57:48 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getcap.3,v 1.16 1999/07/09 13:35:16 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .Dd April 19, 1994 -.Dt GETCAP 3 +.Dt GETCAP 3 .Os .Sh NAME .Nm cgetent , @@ -82,10 +82,10 @@ file array .Fa db_array and returns a pointer to a copy of it in -.Fa buf . +.Fa buf . .Fn cgetent -will first look for files ending in -.Dq .db +will first look for files ending in +.Dq .db (see .Xr cap_mkdb 1 ) before accessing the @@ -102,35 +102,35 @@ and but may then be .Xr free Ns \&'d. On success 0 is returned, 1 if the returned -record contains an unresolved -.Ic tc +record contains an unresolved +.Ic tc expansion, \-1 if the requested record couldn't be found, \-2 if a system error occurred (couldn't open or read a file, for example) also setting -.Va errno , +.Va errno , and \-3 if a potential reference loop is detected (see .Ic tc= comments below). .Pp -.Fn cgetset +.Fn cgetset enables the addition of a character buffer containing a single capability record entry -to the capability database. +to the capability database. Conceptually, the entry is added as the first .Dq file in the database, and -is therefore searched first on the call to +is therefore searched first on the call to .Fn cgetent . -The entry is passed in +The entry is passed in .Fa ent . -If -.Fa ent +If +.Fa ent is .Dv NULL , -the current entry is removed from the database. -.Fn cgetset +the current entry is removed from the database. +.Fn cgetset must precede the database traversal. It must be called before .Fn cgetent . If a sequential access is being performed (see below), it must be called @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ before the first sequential access call ( .Fn cgetfirst or .Fn cgetnext -), or be directly preceded by a +), or be directly preceded by a .Fn cgetclose call. On success 0 is returned and \-1 on failure. @@ -207,8 +207,8 @@ be found, or \-2 if a system error was encountered (storage allocation failure). .Pp .Fn cgetustr -is identical to -.Fn cgetstr +is identical to +.Fn cgetstr except that it does not expand special characters, but rather returns each character of the capability string literally. .Pp @@ -219,38 +219,38 @@ comprise a function group that provides for sequential access of the null-terminated array of file names, .Fa db_array . -.Fn cgetfirst +.Fn cgetfirst returns the first record in the database and resets the access to the first record. -.Fn cgetnext +.Fn cgetnext returns the next record in the database with respect to the record returned by the previous .Fn cgetfirst or -.Fn cgetnext +.Fn cgetnext call. If there is no such previous call, the first record in the database is returned. Each record is returned in a -.Xr malloc Ns \&'d -copy pointed to by -.Fa buf . +.Xr malloc Ns \&'d +copy pointed to by +.Fa buf . .Ic tc expansion is done (see -.Ic tc= +.Ic tc= comments below). Upon completion of the database 0 is returned, 1 is returned upon successful -return of record with possibly more remaining (we haven't reached the end of +return of record with possibly more remaining (we haven't reached the end of the database yet), 2 is returned if the record contains an unresolved -.Ic tc +.Ic tc expansion, \-1 is returned if an system error occurred, and \-2 -is returned if a potential reference loop is detected (see +is returned if a potential reference loop is detected (see .Ic tc= comments below). Upon completion of database (0 return) the database is closed. .Pp -.Fn cgetclose -closes the sequential access and frees any memory and file descriptors -being used. Note that it does not erase the buffer pushed by a call to +.Fn cgetclose +closes the sequential access and frees any memory and file descriptors +being used. Note that it does not erase the buffer pushed by a call to .Fn cgetset . .Ss Capability database syntax Capability databases are normally @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ has value .Em number .It Em name No = Em string Ta "string capability" .Em name -has value +has value .Em string .It Em name No \&#@ Ta "the numeric capability" .Em name @@ -515,24 +515,24 @@ returns a character pointer on success and a on failure. .Pp .Fn cgetent -and +and .Fn cgetset -may fail and set +may fail and set .Va errno for any of the errors specified for the library functions -.Xr fopen 3 , +.Xr fopen 3 , .Xr fclose 3 , .Xr open 2 , -and +and .Xr close 2 . .Pp .Fn cgetent , .Fn cgetset , .Fn cgetstr , and -.Fn cgetustr -may fail and set -.Va errno +.Fn cgetustr +may fail and set +.Va errno as follows: .Bl -tag -width Er .It Bq Er ENOMEM @@ -551,6 +551,6 @@ There are no checks for loops in .Fn cgetent . .Pp -The buffer added to the database by a call to -.Fn cgetset +The buffer added to the database by a call to +.Fn cgetset is not unique to the database but is rather prepended to any database used. diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getcwd.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getcwd.3 index e3f292d61e9..13f9b4641b7 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/getcwd.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/getcwd.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getcwd.3,v 1.6 1999/06/04 01:30:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getcwd.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:16 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ allocate memory as necessary is an extension. .Sh HISTORY The .Fn getwd -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.0 . .Sh BUGS The diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getdiskbyname.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getdiskbyname.3 index fcc27f34b20..170af443249 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/getdiskbyname.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/getdiskbyname.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getdiskbyname.3,v 1.4 1999/05/29 19:11:11 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getdiskbyname.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:16 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ takes a disk name (e.g., and returns a prototype disk label describing its geometry information and the standard disk partition tables. All information is obtained from -the +the .Xr disktab 5 file. .Sh SEE ALSO @@ -60,5 +60,5 @@ file. .Sh HISTORY The .Fn getdiskbyname -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.3 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getdomainname.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getdomainname.3 index 923e84800e4..5ccb8701912 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/getdomainname.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/getdomainname.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getdomainname.3,v 1.14 1999/06/04 01:30:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getdomainname.3,v 1.15 1999/07/09 13:35:16 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ previously set by .Fn setdomainname . The parameter .Fa namelen -specifies the size of the +specifies the size of the .Fa name array. If insufficient space is provided, the returned name is truncated. The returned name is always null terminated. diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getfsent.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getfsent.3 index dd4fb08d633..cde6016b2a6 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/getfsent.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/getfsent.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getfsent.3,v 1.5 1999/06/04 01:30:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getfsent.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:16 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -128,13 +128,13 @@ file system table .Sh HISTORY The .Fn getfsent -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.0 ; the .Fn endfsent , .Fn getfsfile , .Fn getfsspec , -and +and .Fn setfsent functions appeared in .Bx 4.3 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getgrent.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getgrent.3 index d2ecf6944da..ab1b7e8afd1 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/getgrent.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/getgrent.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getgrent.3,v 1.5 1999/06/05 03:44:53 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getgrent.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:16 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ is reached or an error occurs a null pointer is returned. The .Fn setgroupent function returns the value 1 if successful, otherwise 0. -The +The .Fn endgrent and .Fn setgrent diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getgrouplist.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getgrouplist.3 index cbd5409651d..eadb6ca2476 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/getgrouplist.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/getgrouplist.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getgrouplist.3,v 1.6 1999/06/03 10:03:21 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getgrouplist.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ the group number from the password file. .Pp The resulting group list is returned in the integer array pointed to by .Fa groups . -The caller specifies the size of the +The caller specifies the size of the .Fa groups array in the integer pointed to by .Fa ngroups ; diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/gethostname.3 b/lib/libc/gen/gethostname.3 index 499e818b4f8..479e9257cc7 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/gethostname.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/gethostname.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: gethostname.3,v 1.14 1999/06/04 01:30:11 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: gethostname.3,v 1.15 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ processor, as previously set by .Fn sethostname . The parameter .Fa namelen -specifies the size of the +specifies the size of the .Fa name array. If insufficient space is provided, the returned name is truncated. The returned name is always null terminated. diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getmntinfo.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getmntinfo.3 index 8e884bec209..90d6786237f 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/getmntinfo.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/getmntinfo.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getmntinfo.3,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:54:52 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getmntinfo.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -69,20 +69,20 @@ The pointer to the array is stored into If an error occurs, zero is returned and the external variable .Va errno is set to indicate the error. -Although the pointer +Although the pointer .Fa mntbufp -will be unmodified, any information previously returned by +will be unmodified, any information previously returned by .Fn getmntinfo will be lost. .Sh ERRORS The .Fn getmntinfo function -may fail and set -.Va errno +may fail and set +.Va errno for any of the errors specified for the library routines .Xr getfsstat 2 -or +or .Xr malloc 3 . .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr getfsstat 2 , diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getnetgrent.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getnetgrent.3 index d4868fa5e7c..9cd9dbaa70c 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/getnetgrent.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/getnetgrent.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getnetgrent.3,v 1.9 1999/06/06 06:57:45 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getnetgrent.3,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ .Nm endnetgrent .Nd netgroup database operations .Sh SYNOPSIS -.Fd #include <netgroup.h> +.Fd #include <netgroup.h> .Ft int .Fn getnetgrent "const char **host" "const char **user" "const char **domain" .Ft int diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getpagesize.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getpagesize.3 index 0a40da96c4e..fad5ff1bc78 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/getpagesize.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/getpagesize.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getpagesize.3,v 1.7 1999/05/29 19:11:11 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getpagesize.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ This interface is obsoleted by .Xr sysconf 3 . Use .Fn sysconf _SC_PAGESIZE . -.Ef -.Pp +.Ef +.Pp The .Fn getpagesize function returns the number of bytes in a page. diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getpwent.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getpwent.3 index 9331e76c940..e001e020150 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/getpwent.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/getpwent.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getpwent.3,v 1.8 1999/06/05 03:44:53 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getpwent.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1988, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ .Ft struct passwd * .Fn getpwnam "const char *login" .Ft struct passwd * -.Fn getpwuid "uid_t uid" +.Fn getpwuid "uid_t uid" .Ft int .Fn setpassent "int stayopen" .Ft void @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ The function returns 0 on failure or 1 on success. The .Fn endpwent -and +and .Fn setpwent functions have no return value. diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getusershell.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getusershell.3 index 78708e7886d..a45d724cdc2 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/getusershell.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/getusershell.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getusershell.3,v 1.6 1999/06/04 01:30:11 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getusershell.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -52,9 +52,9 @@ The .Fn getusershell function returns a pointer to a legal user shell as defined by the -system manager in the file +system manager in the file .Pa /etc/shells . -If +If .Pa /etc/shells is unreadable or does not exist, .Fn getusershell @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ returns a null pointer .Sh HISTORY The .Fn getusershell -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.3 . .Sh BUGS The diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/glob.3 b/lib/libc/gen/glob.3 index 3471f21e156..0c85a71c9c7 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/glob.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/glob.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: glob.3,v 1.11 1999/06/05 03:44:53 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: glob.3,v 1.12 1999/07/09 13:35:16 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993, 1994 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ .Fd #include <glob.h> .Ft int .Fn glob "const char *pattern" "int flags" "const int (*errfunc)(const char *, int)" "glob_t *pglob" -.Ft void +.Ft void .Fn globfree "glob_t *pglob" .Sh DESCRIPTION The @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ field, and a pointer to a list of pointers to pathnames in the .Fa gl_pathv field. The first pointer after the last pathname is -.Dv NULL . +.Dv NULL . If the pattern does not match any pathnames, the returned number of matched paths is set to zero. .Pp @@ -219,29 +219,29 @@ This extension is provided to allow programs such as .Xr restore 8 to provide globbing from directories stored on tape. .It Dv GLOB_BRACE -Pre-process the pattern string to expand -.Ql {pat,pat,...} -strings like +Pre-process the pattern string to expand +.Ql {pat,pat,...} +strings like .Xr csh 1 . -The pattern +The pattern .Ql {} is left unexpanded for historical reasons. -.Xr (csh 1 -does the same thing to +.Xr (csh 1 +does the same thing to ease typing -of -.Xr find 1 +of +.Xr find 1 patterns.) .It Dv GLOB_MAGCHAR Set by the .Fn glob function if the pattern included globbing characters. -See the description of the usage of the +See the description of the usage of the .Fa gl_matchc structure member for more details. .It Dv GLOB_NOMAGIC -Is the same as -.Dv GLOB_NOCHECK +Is the same as +.Dv GLOB_NOCHECK but it only appends the .Fa pattern if it does not contain any of the special characters @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ if it does not contain any of the special characters .Ql ? , or .Ql [ . -.Dv GLOB_NOMAGIC +.Dv GLOB_NOMAGIC is provided to simplify implementing the historic .Xr csh 1 globbing behavior and should probably not be used anywhere else. @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ call to The error routine can suppress this action by testing for .Er ENOENT and -.Er ENOTDIR ; +.Er ENOTDIR ; however, the .Dv GLOB_ERR flag will still cause an immediate @@ -332,16 +332,16 @@ contain the values described below: .Bl -tag -width GLOB_NOCHECK .It Fa gl_pathc Contains the total number of matched pathnames so far. -This includes other matches from previous invocations of +This includes other matches from previous invocations of .Fn glob -if +if .Dv GLOB_APPEND was specified. .It Fa gl_matchc Contains the number of matched pathnames in the current invocation of .Fn glob . .It Fa gl_flags -Contains a copy of the +Contains a copy of the .Fa flags parameter with the bit .Dv GLOB_MAGCHAR @@ -365,9 +365,9 @@ are undefined. .Pp If .Fn glob -terminates due to an error, it sets -.Va errno -and returns one of the following non-zero constants, which are defined +terminates due to an error, it sets +.Va errno +and returns one of the following non-zero constants, which are defined in the include file .Aq Pa glob.h : .Bl -tag -width GLOB_NOCHECK @@ -427,9 +427,9 @@ Note, however, that the flags .Dv GLOB_QUOTE, and .Dv GLOB_TILDE, -and the fields +and the fields .Fa gl_matchc -and +and .Fa gl_flags should not be used by applications striving for strict standards conformance. @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ The .Fn glob and .Fn globfree -functions first appeared in +functions first appeared in .Bx 4.4 . .Sh BUGS Patterns longer than @@ -447,8 +447,8 @@ may cause unchecked errors. .Pp The .Fn glob -function may fail and set -.Va errno +function may fail and set +.Va errno for any of the errors specified for the library routines .Xr stat 2 , .Xr closedir 3 , diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/initgroups.3 b/lib/libc/gen/initgroups.3 index 27916f64a60..ec2ff8105e1 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/initgroups.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/initgroups.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: initgroups.3,v 1.7 1999/06/03 10:03:21 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: initgroups.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ returns \-1 if it was not invoked by the super-user. .Sh HISTORY The .Fn initgroups -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.2 . .Sh BUGS The diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/isalnum.3 b/lib/libc/gen/isalnum.3 index 479380ad0e8..54b310a0e50 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/isalnum.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/isalnum.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isalnum.3,v 1.4 1999/05/29 20:07:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isalnum.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Fn isalnum -macro tests for any character for which +macro tests for any character for which .Xr isalpha 3 or .Xr isdigit 3 @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/isalpha.3 b/lib/libc/gen/isalpha.3 index 4540663d02d..91da6e8fc81 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/isalpha.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/isalpha.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isalpha.3,v 1.5 1999/06/05 03:44:53 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isalpha.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ .Nd alphabetic character test .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <ctype.h> -.Ft int +.Ft int .Fn isalpha "int c" .Sh DESCRIPTION The @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/isascii.3 b/lib/libc/gen/isascii.3 index 1d81875ce89..a8d4f3f5a76 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/isascii.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/isascii.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isascii.3,v 1.6 1999/05/29 20:07:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isascii.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/isblank.3 b/lib/libc/gen/isblank.3 index 5c6164a5ae2..706f0c0b269 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/isblank.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/isblank.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isblank.3,v 1.5 1999/06/05 03:44:53 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isblank.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -81,6 +81,6 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/iscntrl.3 b/lib/libc/gen/iscntrl.3 index fe47987fd65..1ade0167108 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/iscntrl.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/iscntrl.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: iscntrl.3,v 1.4 1999/05/29 20:07:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: iscntrl.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/isdigit.3 b/lib/libc/gen/isdigit.3 index 49ba362d038..11caef61a6b 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/isdigit.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/isdigit.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isdigit.3,v 1.4 1999/05/29 20:07:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isdigit.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/isgraph.3 b/lib/libc/gen/isgraph.3 index 2ee60fa4fd7..89dc7abaaa8 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/isgraph.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/isgraph.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isgraph.3,v 1.4 1999/05/29 20:07:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isgraph.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/isinf.3 b/lib/libc/gen/isinf.3 index 8a24f7ecd5d..304d56d4023 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/isinf.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/isinf.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isinf.3,v 1.5 1999/05/29 20:07:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isinf.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:17 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -40,9 +40,9 @@ .Nd test for infinity or not-a-number .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <math.h> -.Ft int +.Ft int .Fn isinf "double n" -.Ft int +.Ft int .Fn isnan "double n" .Sh DESCRIPTION The diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/islower.3 b/lib/libc/gen/islower.3 index 2ff33867aee..404936408ac 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/islower.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/islower.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: islower.3,v 1.5 1999/06/05 03:44:53 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: islower.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/isprint.3 b/lib/libc/gen/isprint.3 index f6aa636f394..302836c7076 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/isprint.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/isprint.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isprint.3,v 1.4 1999/05/29 20:07:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isprint.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/ispunct.3 b/lib/libc/gen/ispunct.3 index 97c21c0e52e..518bdc35133 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/ispunct.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/ispunct.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ispunct.3,v 1.4 1999/05/29 20:07:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ispunct.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/isspace.3 b/lib/libc/gen/isspace.3 index 36a1bc5f839..d80ea80dbab 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/isspace.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/isspace.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isspace.3,v 1.5 1999/06/05 03:44:53 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isspace.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/isupper.3 b/lib/libc/gen/isupper.3 index e0edecc9c53..bdaf741f0ee 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/isupper.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/isupper.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isupper.3,v 1.5 1999/06/05 03:44:53 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isupper.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/isxdigit.3 b/lib/libc/gen/isxdigit.3 index ecb1ede4b41..63eec860c04 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/isxdigit.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/isxdigit.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isxdigit.3,v 1.4 1999/05/29 20:07:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isxdigit.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ non-zero if the character tests true. .Xr isupper 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/modf.3 b/lib/libc/gen/modf.3 index 0d1a5dc0ff8..12af5486fbc 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/modf.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/modf.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: modf.3,v 1.3 1999/06/05 03:44:54 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: modf.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ function breaks the argument .Fa value into integral and fractional parts, each of which has the same sign as the argument. -It stores the integral part as a +It stores the integral part as a .Li double in the object pointed to by .Fa iptr . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/nice.3 b/lib/libc/gen/nice.3 index 49b266fcf30..1e514df3361 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/nice.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/nice.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: nice.3,v 1.8 1999/06/03 10:13:29 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: nice.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -70,5 +70,5 @@ returns the same values as .Sh HISTORY A .Fn nice -syscall appeared in +syscall appeared in .At v6 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/pause.3 b/lib/libc/gen/pause.3 index 3d7844ee13f..6f52ebb1e80 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/pause.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/pause.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pause.3,v 1.6 1999/06/03 10:03:22 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pause.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -84,5 +84,5 @@ The call was interrupted. A .Fn pause syscall -appeared in +appeared in .At v6 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/psignal.3 b/lib/libc/gen/psignal.3 index fbf8e8b04e5..455965e3c4e 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/psignal.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/psignal.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: psignal.3,v 1.6 1999/06/04 01:30:11 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: psignal.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -86,5 +86,5 @@ and .Sh HISTORY The .Fn psignal -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.2 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/pwcache.3 b/lib/libc/gen/pwcache.3 index e350587e558..a66dabacb93 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/pwcache.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/pwcache.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pwcache.3,v 1.6 1999/06/04 01:30:11 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pwcache.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ The function returns the user name associated with the argument .Fa uid . The user name is cached so that multiple calls with the same -.Fa uid +.Fa uid do not require additional calls to .Xr getpwuid 3 . If there is no user associated with the diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/scandir.3 b/lib/libc/gen/scandir.3 index 0f50c78db5b..e53d4d48b9d 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/scandir.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/scandir.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: scandir.3,v 1.5 1999/06/03 10:03:22 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: scandir.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -106,5 +106,5 @@ The .Fn scandir and .Fn alphasort -functions appeared in +functions appeared in .Bx 4.2 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/setjmp.3 b/lib/libc/gen/setjmp.3 index 5cf0403a319..df0fc58d4f5 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/setjmp.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/setjmp.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: setjmp.3,v 1.8 1999/06/06 06:57:45 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: setjmp.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ and .Fn longjmp functions conform to .St -ansiC . -The +The .Fn sigsetjmp and .Fn siglongjmp diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/setproctitle.3 b/lib/libc/gen/setproctitle.3 index 4eefb790427..37653d5e3cd 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/setproctitle.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/setproctitle.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: setproctitle.3,v 1.7 1999/07/02 16:57:48 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: setproctitle.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994, 1995 Christopher G. Demetriou .\" All rights reserved. @@ -71,5 +71,5 @@ setproctitle("foo! (%d)", getpid()); .Sh HISTORY The .Fn setproctitle -function first appeared in +function first appeared in .Nx 0.9a . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/siginterrupt.3 b/lib/libc/gen/siginterrupt.3 index 86200e067c1..048310350c8 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/siginterrupt.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/siginterrupt.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: siginterrupt.3,v 1.7 1999/06/03 10:03:23 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: siginterrupt.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:18 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ and no data has been transferred, the system call will return \-1 with the global variable .Va errno set to -.Er EINTR . +.Er EINTR . Interrupted system calls that have started transferring data will return the amount of data actually transferred. System call interrupt is the signal behavior found on @@ -108,5 +108,5 @@ specified. .Sh HISTORY The .Fn siginterrupt -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.3 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/signal.3 b/lib/libc/gen/signal.3 index 4cf084a1126..21f070bef6e 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/signal.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/signal.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: signal.3,v 1.11 1999/05/29 21:24:20 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: signal.3,v 1.12 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ automatically blocked and .Fa func is called. .Pp -The handled signal is unblocked when +The handled signal is unblocked when .Fa func returns and the process continues from where it left off when the signal occurred. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ function; ignored signals remain ignored. .Sh RETURN VALUES The previous action is returned on a successful call. -Otherwise, +Otherwise, .Fa SIG_ERR is returned and the global variable .Va errno @@ -231,5 +231,5 @@ or .Sh HISTORY This .Fn signal -facility appeared in +facility appeared in .Bx 4.0 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/sigsetops.3 b/lib/libc/gen/sigsetops.3 index 1f6a541fafc..61e1692fdf2 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/sigsetops.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/sigsetops.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: sigsetops.3,v 1.5 1999/06/05 03:44:54 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sigsetops.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -63,9 +63,9 @@ or must be called for every object of type .Li sigset_t before any other use of the object. -.Fn sigemptyset +.Fn sigemptyset and -.Fn sigfillset +.Fn sigfillset are provided as macros, but actual functions are available if their names are undefined (with #undef .Ar name ) . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/sleep.3 b/lib/libc/gen/sleep.3 index e08222975d3..84c3d2c0d31 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/sleep.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/sleep.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: sleep.3,v 1.5 1999/05/29 21:24:21 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sleep.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ with other uses of .Fn sleep interferes with interval timers anymore). .Sh RETURN VALUE -If the +If the .Fn sleep function returns because the requested time has elapsed, the value -returned will be zero. If the +returned will be zero. If the .Fn sleep function returns due to the delivery of a signal, the value returned will be the unslept amount (the request time minus the time actually @@ -82,9 +82,9 @@ slept) in seconds. .Xr pause 3 , .Xr usleep 3 .Sh STANDARDS -The -.Fn sleep -function conforms to +The +.Fn sleep +function conforms to .St -p1003.1-90 . .Sh HISTORY A diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/sysconf.3 b/lib/libc/gen/sysconf.3 index 1221ec086af..ad432335843 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/sysconf.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/sysconf.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: sysconf.3,v 1.10 1999/06/03 10:03:23 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sysconf.3,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ The maximum number of repeated occurrences of a regular expression permitted when using interval notation. .It Li _SC_2_VERSION The version of POSIX 1003.2 with which the system attempts to comply. -.It Li _SC_2_C_BIND +.It Li _SC_2_C_BIND Return 1 if the system's C-language development facilities support the C-Language Bindings Option, otherwise \-1. .It Li _SC_2_C_DEV diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/sysctl.3 b/lib/libc/gen/sysctl.3 index 2de353c1a90..8dd1f16e41e 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/sysctl.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/sysctl.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: sysctl.3,v 1.26 1999/07/04 18:59:42 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sysctl.3,v 1.27 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ The information available from .Fn sysctl consists of integers, strings, and tables. Information may be retrieved and set from the command interface -using the +using the .Xr sysctl 8 utility. .Pp @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ and should be set to .Dv NULL . .Pp -The size of the available data can be determined by calling +The size of the available data can be determined by calling .Fn sysctl with a .Dv NULL @@ -171,9 +171,9 @@ Each time it runs, .Fn sysctl gets the list of debugging variables from the kernel and displays their current values. -The system defines twenty +The system defines twenty .Li struct ctldebug -variables named +variables named .Va debug0 through .Va debug19 . @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ attempts to retrieve any of the .Dv KERN_PROF values will fail with .Er EOPNOTSUPP . -The third level names for the string and integer profiling information +The third level names for the string and integer profiling information is detailed below. The changeable column shows whether a process with appropriate privileges may change the value. @@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ privileges may change the value. Get or set various global information about the .Tn IP security protocols. -The third level name is the protocol. +The third level name is the protocol. The fourth level name is the variable name. The currently defined protocols and names are: .Bl -column "Protocol name" "Variable name" "integer" -offset indent diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/syslog.3 b/lib/libc/gen/syslog.3 index 68a12813529..3dc53dd111c 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/syslog.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/syslog.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: syslog.3,v 1.6 1999/06/06 06:57:45 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: syslog.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ cannot pass the message to .Xr syslogd it will attempt to write the message to the console .Pq Pa /dev/console . -.It Dv LOG_NDELAY +.It Dv LOG_NDELAY Open the connection to .Xr syslogd immediately. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Similarly for .Dv LOG_LOCAL1 through .Dv LOG_LOCAL7 . -.El +.El .Pp The .Fn closelog @@ -267,5 +267,5 @@ syslog(LOG_INFO|LOG_LOCAL2, "foobar error: %m"); .Xr syslogd 8 .Sh HISTORY These -functions appeared in +functions appeared in .Bx 4.2 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/times.3 b/lib/libc/gen/times.3 index 669d4b4d1fc..eea2c3c513a 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/times.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/times.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: times.3,v 1.6 1999/06/05 03:44:54 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: times.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ .Nd process times .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <sys/times.h> -.Ft clock_t +.Ft clock_t .Fn times "struct tms *tp" .Sh DESCRIPTION .Bf -symbolic @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ If an error occurs, .Fn times returns the value .Pq Em clock_t No - 1 , -and sets +and sets .Va errno to indicate the error. .Sh ERRORS diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/toascii.3 b/lib/libc/gen/toascii.3 index 88819a206ee..10d8fc88df7 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/toascii.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/toascii.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: toascii.3,v 1.4 1999/05/29 21:24:18 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: toascii.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: toascii.3,v 1.2 1997/07/16 06:20:20 mikel Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1993 @@ -68,6 +68,6 @@ function always returns a valid ASCII character. .Xr isupper 3 , .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/tolower.3 b/lib/libc/gen/tolower.3 index 52e7e6669ae..bf67f324e80 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/tolower.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/tolower.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: tolower.3,v 1.7 1999/05/29 20:07:14 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: tolower.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ If the argument to the .Fn _tolower function is an upper-case letter, the corresponding lower-case letter is returned; otherwise the output is undefined. -.\" In the +.\" In the .\" .Em ``C'' .\" locale, .\" .Fn tolower @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ is returned; otherwise the output is undefined. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr toupper 3 , +.Xr toupper 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS The diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/toupper.3 b/lib/libc/gen/toupper.3 index 0fc16e18854..8ce6d914384 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/toupper.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/toupper.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: toupper.3,v 1.9 1999/05/29 20:07:14 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: toupper.3,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ is returned; otherwise the output is undefined. .\" .Xr islower .\" is true to the corresponding characters for which .\" .Xr isupper -.\" is true. +.\" is true. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr isalnum 3 , .Xr isalpha 3 , @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ is returned; otherwise the output is undefined. .Xr isxdigit 3 , .Xr stdio 3 , .Xr toascii 3 , -.Xr tolower 3 , +.Xr tolower 3 , .Xr ascii 7 .Sh STANDARDS The diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/ttyname.3 b/lib/libc/gen/ttyname.3 index 706ec728153..fc9d5f9bc48 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/ttyname.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/ttyname.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ttyname.3,v 1.8 1999/06/04 01:30:11 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ttyname.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ type devices. These descriptors are not related to the standard typedef, but refer to the special device files found in .Pa /dev and named -.Pa /dev/tty Ns Em XX +.Pa /dev/tty Ns Em XX and for which an entry exists in the initialization file .Pa /etc/ttys @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ is true. The .Fn ttyname_r function stores the null-terminated -pathname of the terminal associated with +pathname of the terminal associated with the file descriptor .Fa fd in the character array referenced by @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ and functions return the null-terminated name if the device is found and .Fn isatty -is true; otherwise +is true; otherwise a null pointer is returned and .Dv errno is set to indicate the error. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ The .Fa fd argument does not refer to a terminal device. .It Bq Er ERANGE -The value of +The value of .Fa namesize is smaller than the length of the string to be returned including the terminating NUL character. diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/ualarm.3 b/lib/libc/gen/ualarm.3 index 7affd255ae8..b89f065fe17 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/ualarm.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/ualarm.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ualarm.3,v 1.10 1999/05/29 22:38:36 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ualarm.3,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ .Nd schedule signal after specified time .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <unistd.h> -.Ft useconds_t +.Ft useconds_t .Fn ualarm "useconds_t microseconds" "useconds_t interval" .Sh DESCRIPTION .Bf -symbolic @@ -93,5 +93,5 @@ function conforms to .Sh HISTORY The .Fn ualarm -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.3 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/unvis.3 b/lib/libc/gen/unvis.3 index 61e5f67fe11..84d7fcdcfe7 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/unvis.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/unvis.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: unvis.3,v 1.8 1999/07/02 20:58:00 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: unvis.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -40,9 +40,9 @@ .Nd decode a visual representation of characters .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <vis.h> -.Ft int +.Ft int .Fn unvis "char *cp" "char c" "int *astate" "int flag" -.Ft int +.Ft int .Fn strunvis "char *dst" "char *src" .Sh DESCRIPTION The @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ function, back into the original form. .Fn unvis is called with successive characters in -.Fa c +.Fa c until a valid sequence is recognized, at which time the decoded character is available at the character pointed to by @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ has several return codes that must be handled properly. They are: .Bl -tag -width UNVIS_VALIDPUSH .It Li \&0 (zero) Another character is necessary; nothing has been recognized yet. -.It Dv UNVIS_VALID +.It Dv UNVIS_VALID A valid character has been recognized and is available at the location pointed to by .Fa cp . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/usleep.3 b/lib/libc/gen/usleep.3 index 76d7211ae63..4f1f2ecc7bb 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/usleep.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/usleep.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: usleep.3,v 1.9 1999/06/03 10:03:24 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: usleep.3,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:20 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ microseconds of time. System activity or time spent in processing the call may lengthen the sleep slightly. .Pp -This routine is implemented using +This routine is implemented using .Xr nanosleep 2 ; it requires one system call each time it is invoked. A similar but less compatible function can be obtained with a single @@ -64,12 +64,12 @@ with other uses of .Fn usleep interferes with interval timers anymore). .Sh RETURN VALUE -If the +If the .Fn usleep function returns because the requested time has elapsed, the value returned will be zero. .Pp -If the +If the .Fn usleep function returns due to the delivery of a signal, the value returned will be the \-1, and the global variable @@ -107,5 +107,5 @@ function conforms to .Sh HISTORY The .Fn usleep -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.3 . diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/utime.3 b/lib/libc/gen/utime.3 index 0f48cdfb3ac..f73fcc22655 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/utime.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/utime.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: utime.3,v 1.10 1999/06/05 03:44:54 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: utime.3,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:19 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -57,16 +57,16 @@ If is .Dv NULL , the access and modification times are set to the current time. -The calling process must be the owner of the file or have permission to +The calling process must be the owner of the file or have permission to write the file. .Pp -If +If .Fa timep is non-null -.Fa time +.Fa time is assumed to be a pointer to a .Li utimbuf -structure, as defined in +structure, as defined in .Aq Pa utime.h : .Bd -literal -offset indent struct utimbuf { @@ -81,11 +81,11 @@ member, and the modification time is set to the value of the .Fa modtime member. The times are measured in -seconds since 0 hours, 0 minutes, 0 seconds, January 1, 1970, Coordinated +seconds since 0 hours, 0 minutes, 0 seconds, January 1, 1970, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The calling process must be the owner of the file or be the super-user. .Pp -In either case, the inode change-time of the file is set to the current +In either case, the inode change-time of the file is set to the current time. .Sh RETURN VALUES Upon successful completion, a value of 0 is returned. diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/valloc.3 b/lib/libc/gen/valloc.3 index 7e2ce6e4425..3b22ff48113 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/valloc.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/valloc.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: valloc.3,v 1.7 1999/06/04 01:30:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: valloc.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:20 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ null pointer is returned. .Sh HISTORY The .Fn valloc -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 3.0 . .Sh BUGS A diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/vis.3 b/lib/libc/gen/vis.3 index 3548ca887b2..49d8e7ea422 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gen/vis.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gen/vis.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: vis.3,v 1.8 1999/06/05 03:44:54 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: vis.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:20 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -43,9 +43,9 @@ .Fd #include <vis.h> .Ft char * .Fn vis "char *dst" "char c" "int flag" "char nextc" -.Ft int +.Ft int .Fn strvis "char *dst" "char *src" "int flag" -.Ft int +.Ft int .Fn strvisx "char *dst" "char *src" "int len" "int flag" .Sh DESCRIPTION The @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ forms return the number of characters in (not including the trailing NUL). .Pp The encoding is a unique, invertible representation composed entirely of -graphic characters; it can be decoded back into the original form using +graphic characters; it can be decoded back into the original form using the .Xr unvis 3 or @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ functions. .Pp There are two parameters that can be controlled: the range of characters that are encoded, and the type -of representation used. +of representation used. By default, all non-graphic characters. except space, tab, and newline are encoded (see @@ -131,25 +131,25 @@ alter this: .Bl -tag -width VIS_WHITEX .It Dv VIS_SP Also encode space. -.It Dv VIS_TAB +.It Dv VIS_TAB Also encode tab. .It Dv VIS_NL Also encode newline. -.It Dv VIS_WHITE +.It Dv VIS_WHITE Synonym for .Dv VIS_SP \&| .Dv VIS_TAB \&| .Dv VIS_NL . -.It Dv VIS_SAFE +.It Dv VIS_SAFE Only encode .Dq unsafe characters. These are control characters which may cause common terminals to perform unexpected functions. Currently this form allows space, tab, newline, backspace, bell, and return -- in addition -to all graphic characters -- unencoded. +to all graphic characters -- unencoded. .El .Pp There are three forms of encoding. diff --git a/lib/libc/gmon/moncontrol.3 b/lib/libc/gmon/moncontrol.3 index fe2b5d412fe..aea5995fbe3 100644 --- a/lib/libc/gmon/moncontrol.3 +++ b/lib/libc/gmon/moncontrol.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: moncontrol.3,v 1.3 1999/05/23 14:11:01 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: moncontrol.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:20 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1992, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ to resume the collection of histogram ticks and call counts use .Fn moncontrol 1 . This feature allows the cost of particular operations to be measured. Note that an output file will be produced on program exit -regardless of the state of +regardless of the state of .Fn moncontrol . .Pp Programs that are not loaded with @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ the lowest address sampled is that of .Fa lowpc and the highest is just below .Fa highpc . -Only functions in that range that have been compiled with the +Only functions in that range that have been compiled with the .Fl pg option to .Xr cc 1 diff --git a/lib/libc/hash/rmd160.3 b/lib/libc/hash/rmd160.3 index 746459c2a38..9978b67e486 100644 --- a/lib/libc/hash/rmd160.3 +++ b/lib/libc/hash/rmd160.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rmd160.3,v 1.9 1999/07/07 10:50:04 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: rmd160.3,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:20 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Todd C. Miller <Todd.Miller@courtesan.com> .\" All rights reserved. @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ of a message called a message digest. The algorithm takes a message less than 2^64 bits as input and produces a 160-bit digest suitable for use as a digital signature. .Pp -The RMD160 functions are considered to be more secure than the +The RMD160 functions are considered to be more secure than the .Xr md4 3 and .Xr md5 3 @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ and stores a message digest in the parameter. When a null pointer is passed to .Fn RMD160Final -as first argument only the final padding will be applied and the +as first argument only the final padding will be applied and the current context can still be used with .Fn RMD160Update . .Pp diff --git a/lib/libc/hash/sha1.3 b/lib/libc/hash/sha1.3 index 34fe47ec702..0e94679e93a 100644 --- a/lib/libc/hash/sha1.3 +++ b/lib/libc/hash/sha1.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: sha1.3,v 1.14 1999/07/07 10:50:04 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sha1.3,v 1.15 1999/07/09 13:35:20 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Todd C. Miller <Todd.Miller@courtesan.com> .\" All rights reserved. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ of a message called a message digest. The algorithm takes a message less than 2^64 bits as input and produces a 160-bit digest suitable for use as a digital signature. .Pp -The SHA1 functions are considered to be more secure than the +The SHA1 functions are considered to be more secure than the .Xr md4 3 and .Xr md5 3 @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ and stores a message digest in the parameter. When a null pointer is passed to .Fn SHA1Final -as first argument only the final padding will be applied and the +as first argument only the final padding will be applied and the current context can still be used with .Fn SHA1Update . .Pp diff --git a/lib/libc/locale/nl_langinfo.3 b/lib/libc/locale/nl_langinfo.3 index 6931205bf82..a4364652a76 100644 --- a/lib/libc/locale/nl_langinfo.3 +++ b/lib/libc/locale/nl_langinfo.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: nl_langinfo.3,v 1.4 1999/07/05 03:34:34 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: nl_langinfo.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:20 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Written by J.T. Conklin <jtc@netbsd.org>. .\" Public domain. @@ -17,12 +17,12 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Fn nl_langinfo -function returns a pointer to a string containing information +function returns a pointer to a string containing information set by the program's locale. .Pp The names and values of .Fa item -are defined in +are defined in .Aq Pa langinfo.h . .Sh RETURN VALUE .Fn nl_langinfo diff --git a/lib/libc/md/mdX.3 b/lib/libc/md/mdX.3 index 00718b52be1..68fe07d5507 100644 --- a/lib/libc/md/mdX.3 +++ b/lib/libc/md/mdX.3 @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ .\" this stuff is worth it, you can buy me a beer in return. Poul-Henning Kamp .\" ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- .\" -.\" $OpenBSD: mdX.3,v 1.11 1999/05/10 17:56:29 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: mdX.3,v 1.12 1999/07/09 13:35:14 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd October 9, 1996 .Dt MDX 3 @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ The MDX functions calculate a 128-bit cryptographic checksum (digest) for any number of input bytes. A cryptographic checksum is a one-way hash-function, that is, you cannot find (except by exhaustive search) -the input corresponding to a particular output. This net result is +the input corresponding to a particular output. This net result is a ``fingerprint'' of the input-data, which doesn't disclose the actual input. .Pp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ and finally extract the result using .Fn MDXFinal . When a null pointer is passed to .Fn MDXFinal -as first argument only the final padding will be applied and the +as first argument only the final padding will be applied and the current context can still be used with .Fn MDXUpdate . .Pp @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ which converts the return value to a 33-character string which represents the 128 bits in hexadecimal. .Pp .Fn MDXFile -calculates the digest of a file, and uses +calculates the digest of a file, and uses .Fn MDXEnd to return the result. If the file cannot be opened, a null pointer is returned. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ When using .Fn MDXFile , or .Fn MDXData , -the +the .Ar buf argument can be a null pointer, in which case the returned string is allocated with @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ is allocated with and subsequently must be explicitly deallocated using .Xr free 3 after use. -If the +If the .Ar buf argument is non-null it must point to at least 33 characters of buffer space. .Sh SEE ALSO @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ argument is non-null it must point to at least 33 characters of buffer space. .%O RFC 1321 .Re .Rs -.%A RSA Laboratories +.%A RSA Laboratories .%T Frequently Asked Questions About today's Cryptography .%O \&<http://www.rsa.com/rsalabs/faq/> .Re @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ These functions appeared in .Ox 2.0 . .Sh BUGS Hans Dobbertin has shown collisions for the full version of MD4 and -found a collision in the compress function of MD5. The use of SHA or +found a collision in the compress function of MD5. The use of SHA or RIPEMD-160 is recommended instead. .Pp MD2 has only been licensed for use in Privacy Enhanced Mail. diff --git a/lib/libc/regex/re_format.7 b/lib/libc/regex/re_format.7 index a91dbbc4809..3f2ff55ab09 100644 --- a/lib/libc/regex/re_format.7 +++ b/lib/libc/regex/re_format.7 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: re_format.7,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:02 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: re_format.7,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:22 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Phillip F Knaack. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -60,24 +60,24 @@ they will be discussed at the end. `\(dg' marks decisions on these aspects that may not be fully portable to other 1003.2 implementations. .Pp -A (modern) RE is one\(dg or more non-empty\(dg +A (modern) RE is one\(dg or more non-empty\(dg .Em branches , separated by `|'. It matches anything that matches one of the branches. .Pp -A branch is one\(dg or more +A branch is one\(dg or more .Em pieces , concatenated. It matches a match for the first, followed by a match for the second, etc. .Pp A piece is an .Em atom -possibly followed by a single\(dg `*', `+', `?', or +possibly followed by a single\(dg `*', `+', `?', or .Em bound . An atom followed by `*' matches a sequence of 0 or more matches of the atom. An atom followed by `+' matches a sequence of 1 or more matches of the atom. An atom followed by `?' matches a sequence of 0 or 1 matches of the atom. .Pp -A +A .Em bound is `{' followed by an unsigned decimal integer, possibly followed by `,' @@ -95,12 +95,12 @@ An atom followed by a bound containing two integers \fIi\fR and \fIj\fR matches a sequence of \fIi\fR through \fIj\fR (inclusive) matches of the atom. .Pp -An +An .Em atom is a regular expression enclosed in `()' (matching a match for the regular expression), an empty set of `()' (matching the null string)\(dg, -a +a .Em "bracket expression" (see below), `.' (matching any single character), `^' (matching the null string at the @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ A `{' followed by a character other than a digit is an ordinary character, not the beginning of a bound\(dg. It is illegal to end an RE with `\e'. .Pp -A +A .Em "bracket expression" is a list of characters enclosed in `[]'. It normally matches any single character from the list (but see below). @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ it matches any single character .Em not from the rest of the list. If two characters in the list are separated by `\-', this is shorthand -for the full +for the full .Em range of characters between those two (inclusive) in the collating sequence, @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ or a collating-sequence name for either) enclosed in `[.' and `.]' stands for the sequence of characters of that collating element. The sequence is a single element of the bracket expression's list. -A bracket expression containing a multi-character collating element +A bracket expression containing a multi-character collating element can thus match more than one character, e.g. if the collating sequence includes a `ch' collating element, then the RE `[[.ch.]]*c' matches the first five characters @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ then `[[=o=]]', `[[=\o'o^'=]]', and `[o\o'o^']' are all synonymous. An equivalence class may not\(dg be an endpoint of a range. .Pp -Within a bracket expression, the name of a +Within a bracket expression, the name of a .Em "character class" enclosed in `[:' and `:]' stands for the list of all characters belonging to that @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ RE or\(dg the end of a parenthesized subexpression, and `*' is an ordinary character if it appears at the beginning of the RE or the beginning of a parenthesized subexpression (after a possible leading `^'). -Finally, there is one new type of atom, a +Finally, there is one new type of atom, a .Em "back reference" : `\e' followed by a non-zero decimal digit .Em d diff --git a/lib/libc/regex/regex.3 b/lib/libc/regex/regex.3 index fe81eff0779..3262a9e4b16 100644 --- a/lib/libc/regex/regex.3 +++ b/lib/libc/regex/regex.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: regex.3,v 1.10 1999/07/04 18:59:43 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: regex.3,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:22 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Phillip F Knaack. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ REs are anchors, not ordinary characters. .Xr grep 1 , .Xr re_format 7 .Pp -POSIX 1003.2, sections 2.8 (Regular Expression Notation) +POSIX 1003.2, sections 2.8 (Regular Expression Notation) and B.5 (C Binding for Regular Expression Matching). .Sh DIAGNOSTICS @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ exceeding 0 is expensive; .Fa nmatch exceeding 1 is worse. .Fn regexec -is largely insensitive to RE complexity +is largely insensitive to RE complexity .Em except that back references are massively expensive. RE length does matter; in particular, there is a strong speed bonus diff --git a/lib/libc/rpc/bindresvport.3 b/lib/libc/rpc/bindresvport.3 index 9d0ac2d6ad5..4960277753f 100644 --- a/lib/libc/rpc/bindresvport.3 +++ b/lib/libc/rpc/bindresvport.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: bindresvport.3,v 1.10 1999/07/07 14:22:24 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: bindresvport.3,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:22 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 9, 1997 .Dt BINDRESVPORT 3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ chooses another privileged port number automatically. .Sh RETURN VALUES .Fn bindresvport returns 0 if it is successful, otherwise \-1 is returned and -.Va errno +.Va errno set to reflect the cause of the error. .Sh ERRORS The diff --git a/lib/libc/rpc/getrpcent.3 b/lib/libc/rpc/getrpcent.3 index 3f5258fca9a..17ae973f9e3 100644 --- a/lib/libc/rpc/getrpcent.3 +++ b/lib/libc/rpc/getrpcent.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: getrpcent.3,v 1.4 1997/12/10 00:15:02 weingart Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: getrpcent.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:22 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd December 14, 1987 .Dt GETRPCENT 3 @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ .Fn getrpcbynumber "int number" .Ft void .Fn setrpcent "int stayopen" -.Ft void +.Ft void .Fn endrpcent void .Sh DESCRIPTION .Fn getrpcent , @@ -58,9 +58,9 @@ opens and rewinds the file. If the .Fa stayopen flag is non-zero, the net data base will not be closed after each call to -.Fn getrpcent +.Fn getrpcent (either directly, or indirectly through one of -the other +the other .Dq getrpc calls). .Pp @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ program number is found, or until end-of-file is encountered. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS A .Dv NULL -pointer is returned on +pointer is returned on .Dv EOF or error. .Sh BUGS diff --git a/lib/libc/rpc/xdr.3 b/lib/libc/rpc/xdr.3 index ce2ff42b6ff..570cfe00e0b 100644 --- a/lib/libc/rpc/xdr.3 +++ b/lib/libc/rpc/xdr.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: xdr.3,v 1.11 1999/07/05 06:08:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: xdr.3,v 1.12 1999/07/09 13:35:22 aaron Exp $ .\" Mostly converted to mandoc by Theo de Raadt, Tue Feb 24 04:04:46 MST 1998 .\" .Dd February 16, 1988 @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ stream, but never is a filter primitive that translates between C strings and their corresponding external representations. Strings cannot be longer than .Fa maxsize . -Note: +Note: .Fa sp is the address of the string's pointer. This routine returns one if it succeeds, zero otherwise. diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/ferror.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/ferror.3 index ddd828f3ba7..351aee534fb 100644 --- a/lib/libc/stdio/ferror.3 +++ b/lib/libc/stdio/ferror.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ferror.3,v 1.3 1998/02/04 21:29:55 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ferror.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:23 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -100,5 +100,5 @@ conform to .St -ansiC . The function .Fn fileno -conforms to +conforms to .St -p1003.1-90 . diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/fgets.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/fgets.3 index 37472c9f104..5a64ff70208 100644 --- a/lib/libc/stdio/fgets.3 +++ b/lib/libc/stdio/fgets.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: fgets.3,v 1.5 1999/05/25 13:06:46 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: fgets.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:23 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -82,11 +82,11 @@ if any, is sufficiently short to fit in the string. .Sh RETURN VALUES Upon successful completion, .Fn fgets -and +and .Fn gets return a pointer to the string. -If end-of-file or an error occurs before any characters are read, +If end-of-file or an error occurs before any characters are read, they return .Dv NULL . The diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/fseek.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/fseek.3 index cd695ec9e1d..ec46cdbdbd2 100644 --- a/lib/libc/stdio/fseek.3 +++ b/lib/libc/stdio/fseek.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: fseek.3,v 1.3 1999/05/27 14:08:39 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: fseek.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:23 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ The new position, measured in bytes, is obtained by adding .Fa offset bytes to the position specified by .Fa whence . -If +If .Fa whence is set to .Dv SEEK_SET , @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ and (with whence set to .Dv SEEK_SET ), setting and storing the current value of -the file offset into or from the object referenced by +the file offset into or from the object referenced by .Fa pos . On some .Pq non- Ns Tn UNIX @@ -138,11 +138,11 @@ return 0, and .Fn ftell returns the current offset. -Otherwise, +Otherwise, .Fn fseek -returns \-1 and +returns \-1 and the others -return a nonzero value and the global variable +return a nonzero value and the global variable .Va errno is set to indicate the error. .Sh ERRORS @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ is not a seekable stream. .It Bq Er EINVAL The .Fa whence -argument to +argument to .Fn fseek was not .Dv SEEK_SET , @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ The function .Fn fgetpos , .Fn fseek , .Fn fsetpos , -and +and .Fn ftell may also fail and set .Va errno @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ for any of the errors specified for the routines .Xr fflush 3 , .Xr fstat 2 , .Xr lseek 2 , -and +and .Xr malloc 3 . .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr lseek 2 diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/funopen.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/funopen.3 index 268f415e939..8962b347ca2 100644 --- a/lib/libc/stdio/funopen.3 +++ b/lib/libc/stdio/funopen.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: funopen.3,v 1.7 1999/05/12 13:26:47 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: funopen.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:23 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ The function associates a stream with up to four .Dq Tn I/O No functions . -Either +Either .Fa readfn or .Fa writefn @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ close the new stream. .Pp In general, omitting a function means that any attempt to perform the associated operation on the resulting stream will fail. -If the close function is omitted, closing the stream will flush +If the close function is omitted, closing the stream will flush any buffered output and then succeed. .Pp The calling conventions of @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ and .Xr close 2 with the exceptions that they are passed the .Fa cookie -argument specified to +argument specified to .Fn funopen in place of the traditional file descriptor argument and that the seek function takes an fpos_t argument and not an off_t @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Additionally, all of the functions should set the external variable .Va errno appropriately if an error occurs. .Pp -An error on +An error on .Fn closefn does not keep the stream open. .Pp @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ as calls to .Fn funopen with only a read or write function specified. .Sh RETURN VALUES -Upon successful completion, +Upon successful completion, .Fn funopen returns a .Dv FILE diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/remove.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/remove.3 index d4e08a93842..79bf9b8ba61 100644 --- a/lib/libc/stdio/remove.3 +++ b/lib/libc/stdio/remove.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: remove.3,v 1.6 1999/07/07 14:22:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: remove.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:23 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ is the equivalent of Otherwise, it is the equivalent of .Fn unlink "path" . .Sh RETURN VALUES -Upon successful completion, +Upon successful completion, .Fn remove returns 0. Otherwise, \-1 is returned and the global variable diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/setbuf.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/setbuf.3 index 77b59bc1dab..2f9c7c99ec3 100644 --- a/lib/libc/stdio/setbuf.3 +++ b/lib/libc/stdio/setbuf.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: setbuf.3,v 1.7 1999/05/23 14:11:02 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: setbuf.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:23 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ output or input is read from any stream attached to a terminal device The function .Xr fflush 3 may be used to force the block out early. -(See +(See .Xr fclose 3 . ) .Pp Normally all files are block buffered. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ The parameter may be given as zero to obtain deferred optimal-size buffer allocation as usual. If it is not zero, -then except for unbuffered files, the +then except for unbuffered files, the .Fa buf argument should point to a buffer at least .Fa size @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ but may have peculiar side effects (such as discarding input or flushing output) if the stream is ``active''. Portable applications should call it only once on any given stream, -and before any +and before any .Tn I/O is performed. .Pp diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/stdio.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/stdio.3 index c9d1b2093ae..93886ed4b2e 100644 --- a/lib/libc/stdio/stdio.3 +++ b/lib/libc/stdio/stdio.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: stdio.3,v 1.9 1999/05/23 14:11:02 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: stdio.3,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:23 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -111,10 +111,10 @@ At program startup, three streams are predefined and need not be opened explicitly: .Bl -bullet -compact -offset indent .It -.Em standard input +.Em standard input (for reading conventional input), .It -.Em standard output +.Em standard output (for writing conventional output), and .It .Em standard error diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/tmpnam.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/tmpnam.3 index c2a71d55933..05307cf9b99 100644 --- a/lib/libc/stdio/tmpnam.3 +++ b/lib/libc/stdio/tmpnam.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: tmpnam.3,v 1.5 1999/02/27 21:55:50 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: tmpnam.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:23 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1988, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ In either case, .Fn tmpnam returns a pointer to the file name. .Pp -The buffer referenced by +The buffer referenced by .Fa s is expected to be at least .Dv L_tmpnam @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ cannot depend on that. For these reasons, .Xr ld 8 will output a warning message whenever it links code that uses the -functions +functions .Fn tmpnam or .Fn tempnam . diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/msgget.2 b/lib/libc/sys/msgget.2 index fd056d449a9..ab7517404ff 100644 --- a/lib/libc/sys/msgget.2 +++ b/lib/libc/sys/msgget.2 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: msgget.2,v 1.7 1999/06/29 14:10:09 aaron Exp $ -.\" $NetBSD: msgget.2,v 1.1 1995/10/16 23:49:19 jtc Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: msgget.2,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:21 aaron Exp $ +.\" $NetBSD: msgget.2,v 1.1 1995/10/16 23:49:19 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Frank van der Linden .\" All rights reserved. diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/semop.2 b/lib/libc/sys/semop.2 index 7fb2d17ade3..eb1e4123f07 100644 --- a/lib/libc/sys/semop.2 +++ b/lib/libc/sys/semop.2 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: semop.2,v 1.7 1999/06/29 14:10:18 aaron Exp $ -.\" $NetBSD: semop.2,v 1.1 1995/10/16 23:49:28 jtc Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: semop.2,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:21 aaron Exp $ +.\" $NetBSD: semop.2,v 1.1 1995/10/16 23:49:28 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Frank van der Linden .\" All rights reserved. diff --git a/lib/libc/time/strftime.3 b/lib/libc/time/strftime.3 index 2e4495a350f..1fe3c1ac705 100644 --- a/lib/libc/time/strftime.3 +++ b/lib/libc/time/strftime.3 @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)strftime.3 5.12 (Berkeley) 6/29/91 -.\" $OpenBSD: strftime.3,v 1.8 1999/07/02 17:04:16 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: strftime.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:21 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd January 18, 1998 .Dt STRFTIME 3 @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ as a decimal number [00,99]. .It Cm \&%c is replaced by the locale's appropriate date and time representation. .It Cm \&%D -is replaced by the date in the format +is replaced by the date in the format .Dq Li %m/%d/%y . .It Cm \&%d is replaced by the day of the month as a decimal number [01,31]. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ is replaced by the month as a decimal number [01,12]. .It Cm %n is replaced by a newline. .It Cm %p -is replaced by the locale's equivalent of either +is replaced by the locale's equivalent of either .Dq Tn AM or .Dq Tn PM . @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ or is replaced by the time in the format .Dq Li %H:%M . .It Cm \&%r -is replaced by the locale's representation of 12-hour clock time +is replaced by the locale's representation of 12-hour clock time using AM/PM notation. .It Cm \&%S is replaced by the second as a decimal number [00,61]. diff --git a/lib/libc/time/time2posix.3 b/lib/libc/time/time2posix.3 index 8babca3917b..55db815c8b5 100644 --- a/lib/libc/time/time2posix.3 +++ b/lib/libc/time/time2posix.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: time2posix.3,v 1.8 1999/05/25 00:49:41 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: time2posix.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:21 aaron Exp $ .Dd May 24, 1999 .Dt TIME2POSIX 3 .Os @@ -30,8 +30,8 @@ however, no such adjustment is needed and .Fa time_t values continue to increase over leap events -.Po -as a true +.Po +as a true .Sq seconds since... value .Pc . @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ and functions are provided to address this .Fa time_t mismatch by converting -between local +between local .Fa time_t values and their POSIX equivalents. This is done by accounting for the number of time-base changes that @@ -85,15 +85,15 @@ or when communicating with POSIX-compliant systems. .Fn time2posix is single-valued. That is, -every local +every local .Fa time_t -corresponds to a single POSIX +corresponds to a single POSIX .Fa time_t . .Fn posix2time is less well-behaved: for a positive leap second hit the result is not unique, and for a negative leap second hit the corresponding -POSIX +POSIX .Fa time_t doesn't exist so an adjacent value is returned. Both of these are good indicators of the inferiority of the diff --git a/lib/libc/time/tzfile.5 b/lib/libc/time/tzfile.5 index 9cc450aedab..5b5de5ae523 100644 --- a/lib/libc/time/tzfile.5 +++ b/lib/libc/time/tzfile.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: tzfile.5,v 1.7 1999/05/25 00:49:42 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: tzfile.5,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:21 aaron Exp $ .Dd May 24, 1999 .Dt TZFILE 5 .Os @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ time zone information files, followed by sixteen bytes reserved for future use, followed by six four-byte values of type .Fa long -written in a +written in a .Dq standard byte order .Po diff --git a/lib/libc/time/tzset.3 b/lib/libc/time/tzset.3 index b6e91f71b94..daafc4533e7 100644 --- a/lib/libc/time/tzset.3 +++ b/lib/libc/time/tzset.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: tzset.3,v 1.10 1999/05/25 00:55:57 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: tzset.3,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:21 aaron Exp $ .Dd May 24, 1999 .Dt TZSET 3 .Os @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ .Nd initialize time conversion information .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <time.h> -.Ft void +.Ft void .Fn tzset "void" .Sh DESCRIPTION .Fn tzset @@ -34,13 +34,13 @@ correction). .Pp If .Ev TZ -appears in the environment and its value begins with a colon, +appears in the environment and its value begins with a colon, it is used as a pathname of a file from which to read the time conversion information. .Pp If .Ev TZ -appears in the environment and its value does not begin with a colon, +appears in the environment and its value does not begin with a colon, it is first used as the pathname of a file from which to read the time conversion information, and, if that file cannot be read, is used directly as a specification of @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ is used directly as a specification of the time conversion information, it must have the following syntax (spaces inserted for clarity): .Bd -ragged -offset indent .Ar std -.Ar offset +.Ar offset .Op Ar dst Op Ar offset .Op , Ar rule .Ed @@ -98,14 +98,14 @@ Coordinated Universal Time. has the form .Pq spaces inserted for clarity : .Bd -ragged -offset indent -.Ar hh +.Ar hh .Op : Ar mm Op : Ar ss .Ed .Pp The minutes .Pq Ar mm and seconds -.Pq Ar ss +.Pq Ar ss are optional. The hour .Pq Ar hh is required and may be a single digit. The @@ -130,11 +130,11 @@ Indicates when to change to and back from summer time. has the form (spaces added for clarity): .Pp .Bd -ragged -offset indent -.Ar date -/ -.Ar time , -.Ar date -/ +.Ar date +/ +.Ar time , +.Ar date +/ .Ar time .Ed .Pp @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ The zero-based Julian day \&<\&= 365 .Pc . Leap days are counted, and it is possible to refer to February 29. -.It Xo M Ar m No . Ar n +.It Xo M Ar m No . Ar n .No . Ar d .Xc Day @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ of week .Ar n .Po 1 \&<\&= -.Ar n +.Ar n \&<\&= 5 .Pc of month @@ -195,11 +195,11 @@ of month .Ar m \&<\&= 12 .Pc , -where week 5 means -.Do -the last -.Ar d -day in month +where week 5 means +.Do +the last +.Ar d +day in month .Ar m .Dc which may occur in either the fourth or the fifth week. Week 1 is the @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ has the same format as except that no leading sign .Po .Dq \&- -or +or .Dq \&+ .Pc is allowed. The default, if @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ values in .Ev TZ . .Pp For compatibility with System V Release 3.1, a semicolon -.Pq Sq \&; +.Pq Sq \&; may be used to separate the .Ar rule from the rest of the specification. diff --git a/lib/libc/time/zdump.8 b/lib/libc/time/zdump.8 index e2c9c956280..4d056d866c2 100644 --- a/lib/libc/time/zdump.8 +++ b/lib/libc/time/zdump.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: zdump.8,v 1.5 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: zdump.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:21 aaron Exp $ .Dd May 23, 1999 .Dt ZDUMP 8 .Os @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ .Nm zdump .Op Fl v .Op Fl c Ar cutoffyear -.Op Ar zonename Ar ... +.Op Ar zonename Ar ... .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm prints the current time in each @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ otherwise. Cut off the verbose output near the start of the given year. .El .Sh SEE ALSO -.Xr ctime 3 , -.Xr tzfile 5 , +.Xr ctime 3 , +.Xr tzfile 5 , .Xr zic 8 .\" @(#)zdump.8 7.3 diff --git a/lib/libc/time/zic.8 b/lib/libc/time/zic.8 index 2dbc8d20783..2cbc3356ccf 100644 --- a/lib/libc/time/zic.8 +++ b/lib/libc/time/zic.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: zic.8,v 1.8 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: zic.8,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:21 aaron Exp $ .Dd May 23, 1999 .Dt ZIC 8 .Os @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ the earliest transition time recorded in the compiled file is correct. standard directory used for created files .El .Sh SEE ALSO -.Xr ctime 3 , +.Xr ctime 3 , .Xr tzfile 5 , .Xr zdump 8 .\" @(#)zic.8 7.18 diff --git a/lib/libc/yp/ypclnt.3 b/lib/libc/yp/ypclnt.3 index 2f8391248e7..b1a13c38a0b 100644 --- a/lib/libc/yp/ypclnt.3 +++ b/lib/libc/yp/ypclnt.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ypclnt.3,v 1.8 1999/03/11 01:35:02 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ypclnt.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:21 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ All YP lookup calls (the functions .Fn yp_match , .Fn yp_next , .Fn yp_order ) -require a YP domain name and a YP map name. The default domain name may be +require a YP domain name and a YP map name. The default domain name may be obtained by calling .Fn yp_get_default_domain , and should thus be used before all other YP calls in a client program. diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pread.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pread.3 index 3262800cf38..c4f151650ab 100644 --- a/lib/libc_r/man/pread.3 +++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pread.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pread.3,v 1.6 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pread.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" David Leonard <d@openbsd.org>, 1998. Public domain. .Dd September 7, 1998 .Dt PREAD 3 @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ in the file opened on file descriptor .Fa filedes. .Pp This function is provided for use in a threaded, parallel I/O -environment, where race conditions may exist between two threads +environment, where race conditions may exist between two threads non-atomically seeking and reading from the same file descriptor. .Sh RETURN VALUES The diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_detach.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_detach.3 index 8fdebe5c6a1..ca62e49ea2c 100644 --- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_detach.3 +++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_detach.3 @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ can be reclaimed when the thread terminates. If .Fa thread has not terminated, .Fn pthread_detach -will not cause it to terminate. The effect of multiple +will not cause it to terminate. The effect of multiple .Fn pthread_detach calls on the same target thread is unspecified. .Sh RETURN VALUES diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_exit.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_exit.3 index a6016203c97..d12b2290d02 100644 --- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_exit.3 +++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_exit.3 @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ is undefied if called from a cancellation handler or destructor function that was invoked as the result of an implicit or explicit call to .Fn pthread_exit . .Pp -After a thread has terminated, the result of access to local (auto) +After a thread has terminated, the result of access to local (auto) variables of the thread is undefined. Thus, references to local variables of the exiting thread should not be used for the .Fn pthread_exit diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_once.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_once.3 index f33a6901f6b..2454d61dd92 100644 --- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_once.3 +++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_once.3 @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ The function is not a cancellation point. However, if .Fn init_routine is a cancellation point and is cancelled, the effect on -.Fa once_control is as if +.Fa once_control is as if .Fn pthread_once was never called. .Pp diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3 index 8a3fa008de0..3ad133ff3aa 100644 --- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3 +++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3 @@ -22,8 +22,8 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: pthread_rwlock_destroy.3,v 1.3 1999/05/14 21:03:31 alex Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: pthread_rwlock_destroy.3,v 1.3 1999/05/14 21:03:31 alex Exp $ +.\" $Id: pthread_rwlock_destroy.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pthread_rwlock_destroy.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 4, 1998 .Dt PTHREAD_RWLOCK_DESTROY 3 @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Fn pthread_rwlock_destroy -function is used to destroy a read/write lock previously created with +function is used to destroy a read/write lock previously created with .Fn pthread_rwlock_init . .Sh RETURN VALUES If successful, the diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3 index 9dfe3718994..41a04620933 100644 --- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3 +++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3 @@ -22,8 +22,8 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3,v 1.3 1999/05/14 21:03:32 alex Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3,v 1.3 1999/05/14 21:03:32 alex Exp $ +.\" $Id: pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 4, 1998 .Dt PTHREAD_RWLOCKATTR_DESTROY 3 @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ The .Fn pthread_rwlockattr_destroy function is used to destroy a read/write lock attribute object -previously created with +previously created with .Fn pthread_rwlockattr_init . .Sh RETURN VALUES If successful, the diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_single_np.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_single_np.3 index ed24ab68eab..80f6ff8b4c0 100644 --- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_single_np.3 +++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_single_np.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pthread_single_np.3,v 1.2 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pthread_single_np.3,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" David Leonard <d@openbsd.org>, 1999. Public domain. .Dd March 21, 1999 .Dt PTHREAD_SINGLE_NP 3 @@ -17,12 +17,12 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Fn pthread_single_np -function causes the process to +function causes the process to enter single-threaded (non-POSIX) scheduling mode. .Pp The .Fn pthread_multi_np -function causes the process to +function causes the process to return to multi-threaded scheduling mode. .Sh RETURN VALUES The diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_testcancel.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_testcancel.3 index a6a0093f915..aaf37e26acc 100644 --- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_testcancel.3 +++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_testcancel.3 @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ to the indicated .Fa type and returns the previous cancelability type at the location referenced by .Fa oldtype . -Legal values for +Legal values for .Fa type are .Dv PTHREAD_CANCEL_DEFERRED @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ cancellation requests are held pending until a cancellation point (see below) is reached. If cancelability is disabled, the setting of the cancelability type has no immediate effect as all cancellation requests are held pending; however, once cancelability is enabled again the new -type will be in effect. +type will be in effect. .El .Ss Cancellation Points Cancellation points will occur when a thread is executing the following @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ The .Fn pthread_setcancelstate and .Fn pthread_setcanceltype -functions are used to control the points at which a thread may be +functions are used to control the points at which a thread may be asynchronously canceled. For cancellation control to be usable in modular fashion, some rules must be followed. .Pp diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthreads.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthreads.3 index e6887d9166d..774d56b7c53 100644 --- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthreads.3 +++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthreads.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pthreads.3,v 1.5 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pthreads.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:24 aaron Exp $ .\" David Leonard <d@openbsd.org>, 1998. Public domain. .Dd August 17, 1998 .Dt PTHREADS 3 @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ to alter the process virtual timer will have undefined effects. The .Dv SIGVTALRM will never be delivered to threads in a process. .Pp -Due to the +Due to the type definition of .Ft fd_set and the internal reliance on diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pwrite.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pwrite.3 index 3041753a588..0de1b53e5ec 100644 --- a/lib/libc_r/man/pwrite.3 +++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pwrite.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pwrite.3,v 1.6 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pwrite.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" David Leonard <d@openbsd.org>, 1998. Public domain. .Dd September 7, 1998 .Dt PWRITE 3 @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ in the file opened on file descriptor .Fa filedes. .Pp This function is provided for use in a threaded, parallel I/O -environment, where race conditions may exist between two threads +environment, where race conditions may exist between two threads non-atomically seeking and writing to the same file descriptor. .Sh RETURN VALUES The diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.1/ftime.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.1/ftime.3 index 2220558f7b0..b6446206e60 100644 --- a/lib/libcompat/4.1/ftime.3 +++ b/lib/libcompat/4.1/ftime.3 @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ .Fn ftime "struct timeb *tp" .Sh DESCRIPTION .Bf -symbolic -This interface is obsoleted by +This interface is obsoleted by .Xr gettimeofday 2 . It is available from the compatibility library, libcompat. .Ef @@ -80,5 +80,5 @@ Daylight Saving time applies locally during the appropriate part of the year. .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.2 . diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.1/getpw.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.1/getpw.3 index b2e525a06ea..6f3b28dff29 100644 --- a/lib/libcompat/4.1/getpw.3 +++ b/lib/libcompat/4.1/getpw.3 @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ .Fn getpw uid "char *buf" .Sh DESCRIPTION .Bf -symbolic -The getpw function is made obsolete by +The getpw function is made obsolete by .Xr getpwuid 3 . It is available from the compatibility library, libcompat. .Ef @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ character. .Sh RETURN VALUES The .Fn getpw -function returns the zero if successful, otherwise +function returns the zero if successful, otherwise a non-zero if the entry does not exist. .Sh FILES .Bl -tag -width /etc/passwd - compact diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.1/stty.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.1/stty.3 index b3ac1a4a020..04fa64d3a24 100644 --- a/lib/libcompat/4.1/stty.3 +++ b/lib/libcompat/4.1/stty.3 @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ .Fn gtty "int fd" "struct sgttyb *buf" .Sh DESCRIPTION .Bf -symbolic -These interfaces are obsoleted by +These interfaces are obsoleted by .Xr ioctl 2 . They are available from the compatibility library, libcompat. .Ef @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ the .Fn gtty call is .Ql ioctl(fd, TIOCGETP, buf) . -See +See .Xr ioctl 2 and .Xr tty 4 @@ -90,5 +90,5 @@ The .Fn stty and .Fn gtty -functions appeared in +functions appeared in .Bx 4.2 . diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.1/vlimit.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.1/vlimit.3 index 700be6fc668..3c798ec1aff 100644 --- a/lib/libcompat/4.1/vlimit.3 +++ b/lib/libcompat/4.1/vlimit.3 @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ It is available from the compatibility library, libcompat. .Ef .Pp Limits the consumption by the current process and each process -it creates to not individually exceed +it creates to not individually exceed .Fa value on the specified .Fa resource . @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ time limit. .Sh HISTORY The .Fn vlimit -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.2 . .Sh BUGS .Dv LIM_NORAISE diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.1/vtimes.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.1/vtimes.3 index aaf4fbc7a5f..72bd2aaa464 100644 --- a/lib/libcompat/4.1/vtimes.3 +++ b/lib/libcompat/4.1/vtimes.3 @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ .Fn vtimes "struct vtimes *par_vm" "struct vtimes *ch_vm" .Sh DESCRIPTION .Bf -symbolic -This interface is obsoleted by +This interface is obsoleted by .Xr getrusage 2 . It is available from the compatibility library, libcompat. .Ef @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ returns accounting information for the current process and for the terminated child processes of the current process. Either .Fa par_vm -or +or .Fa ch_vm or both may be 0, in which case only the information for the pointers which are non-zero is returned. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ pages over 1 cpu-second for its data and stack, then .Fa vm_idsrss would have the value 5*60, where .Fa vm_utime+vm_stime -would be the 60. +would be the 60. The .Fa vm_idsrss argument @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ variable reports the maximum instantaneous sum of the text+data+stack core-resident page count. .Pp -The +The .Fa vm_majflt field gives the number of page faults which resulted in disk activity; the @@ -138,5 +138,5 @@ to the first process to read or write the data. .Sh HISTORY The .Fn vlimit -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.2 . diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.3/insque.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.3/insque.3 index 0cf594d3473..59002e25489 100644 --- a/lib/libcompat/4.3/insque.3 +++ b/lib/libcompat/4.3/insque.3 @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: insque.3,v 1.2 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: insque.3,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:24 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 12, 1993 .Dt INSQUE 3 @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ .Ft }; .br .br -.Ft void +.Ft void .Fn insque "struct qelem *elem" "struct qelem *pred" .Ft void .Fn remque "struct qelem *elem" diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.3/lsearch.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.3/lsearch.3 index 6b128c8ff9e..2b57f51bb55 100644 --- a/lib/libcompat/4.3/lsearch.3 +++ b/lib/libcompat/4.3/lsearch.3 @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ is a comparison routine which is used to compare two elements. It takes two arguments which point to the .Fa key object and to an array member, in that order, and must return an integer -less than, equivalent to, or greater than zero if the +less than, equivalent to, or greater than zero if the .Fa key object is considered, respectively, to be less than, equal to, or greater than the array member. diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.3/re_comp.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.3/re_comp.3 index d10ef653765..10f2bb42906 100644 --- a/lib/libcompat/4.3/re_comp.3 +++ b/lib/libcompat/4.3/re_comp.3 @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ It is available from the compatibility library, libcompat. The .Fn re_comp function -compiles a string into an internal form suitable for pattern matching. +compiles a string into an internal form suitable for pattern matching. The .Fn re_exec function @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ function returns 0 if the string .Fa s was compiled successfully; otherwise a string containing an -error message is returned. If +error message is returned. If .Fn re_comp is passed 0 or a null string, it returns without changing the currently compiled regular expression. @@ -86,10 +86,10 @@ The strings passed to both .Fn re_comp and .Fn re_exec -may have trailing or embedded newline characters; +may have trailing or embedded newline characters; they are terminated by .Dv NUL Ns s. -The regular expressions recognized are described in the manual entry for +The regular expressions recognized are described in the manual entry for .Xr ed 1 , given the above difference. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS @@ -122,5 +122,5 @@ The .Fn re_comp and .Fn re_exec -functions appeared in +functions appeared in .Bx 4.0 . diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.3/rexec.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.3/rexec.3 index 7dfa79aa3b9..a1849a9769d 100644 --- a/lib/libcompat/4.3/rexec.3 +++ b/lib/libcompat/4.3/rexec.3 @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ .Fn rexec ahost "int inport" "char *user" "char *passwd" "char *cmd" "int *fd2p" .Sh DESCRIPTION .Bf -symbolic -This interface is obsoleted by +This interface is obsoleted by .Xr krcmd 3 . It is available from the compatibility library, libcompat. .Ef @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ specifies which well-known Internet port to use for the connection; the call .Ql getservbyname(\\*qexec\\*q, \\*qtcp\\*q) -(see +(see .Xr getservent 3 ) will return a pointer to a structure, which contains the necessary port. @@ -105,10 +105,10 @@ as the secondary connection is set up after authorization has been verified. If .Fa fd2p -is 0, then the +is 0, then the .Em stderr (unit 2 of the remote -command) will be made the same as the +command) will be made the same as the .Em stdout and no provision is made for sending arbitrary signals to the remote process, @@ -119,5 +119,5 @@ although you may be able to get its attention by using out-of-band data. .Sh HISTORY The .Fn rexec -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.2 . diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.4/cuserid.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.4/cuserid.3 index 4b6145a22ef..550b46f8d70 100644 --- a/lib/libcompat/4.4/cuserid.3 +++ b/lib/libcompat/4.4/cuserid.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)ctermid.3 5.2 (Berkeley) 4/19/91 -.\" $Id: cuserid.3,v 1.2 1999/07/02 21:12:58 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: cuserid.3,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:23 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd November 28, 1993 .Dt CUSERID 3 @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This interface is available from the compatibility library, libcompat. .Pp The .Fn cuserid -function returns a character string representation of the user name +function returns a character string representation of the user name associated with the effective user ID of the calling process. .Pp If @@ -68,25 +68,25 @@ file bytes long. Otherwise, the user name is copied to a static buffer. .Sh RETURN VALUES -If +If .Fa buf is not the -.Dv NULL +.Dv NULL pointer, -.Fa buf +.Fa buf is returned; otherwise the address of the static buffer is returned. .Pp -If the user name could not be determined, if +If the user name could not be determined, if .Fa buf -is not the +is not the .Dv NULL pointer, the null character .Sq \e0 -will be stored at +will be stored at .Fa *buf ; otherwise -the +the .Dv NULL pointer is returned. .Sh SEE ALSO @@ -99,16 +99,16 @@ function conforms to .St -p1003.1-88 . .Sh BUGS Due to irreconcilable differences in historic implementations, -.Fn cuserid +.Fn cuserid was removed from the -.St -p1003.1-90 +.St -p1003.1-90 standard. This implementation exists purely for compatibility with existing programs. -New programs should use one of the following three alternatives to +New programs should use one of the following three alternatives to obtain the user name: .Pp .Bl -enum -offset indent -compact -.It +.It .Fn getlogin to return the user's login name. .It @@ -123,10 +123,10 @@ The .Fn cuserid function uses .Fn getpwuid ; -thus the results of a user's call to +thus the results of a user's call to .Fn getpwent , .Fn getpwnam or .Fn getpwuid -will be overwritten by subsequent calls to +will be overwritten by subsequent calls to .Fn cuserid . diff --git a/lib/libedit/editline.3 b/lib/libedit/editline.3 index 93489f31acc..e5ff2b031bd 100644 --- a/lib/libedit/editline.3 +++ b/lib/libedit/editline.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: editline.3,v 1.8 1999/07/07 14:22:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: editline.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: editline.3,v 1.4 1997/01/14 04:17:23 lukem Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ may be modified by .Fn el_parse . The colon between .Dq prog -and the command, +and the command, .Ar command , will be replaced with a NUL .Po @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Otherwise, the current signal handlers will be used. Perform the .Ic bind built-in command. -Refer to +Refer to .Xr editrc 5 for more information. .It Dv EL_ECHOTC , Xo @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ for more information. Perform the .Ic echotc built-in command. -Refer to +Refer to .Xr editrc 5 for more information. .It Dv EL_SETTC , Xo @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ for more information. Perform the .Ic settc built-in command. -Refer to +Refer to .Xr editrc 5 for more information. .It Dv EL_SETTY , Xo @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ for more information. Perform the .Ic setty built-in command. -Refer to +Refer to .Xr editrc 5 for more information. .It Dv EL_TELLTC , Xo @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ for more information. Perform the .Ic telltc built-in command. -Refer to +Refer to .Xr editrc 5 for more information. .It Dv EL_ADDFN , Xo @@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ should be the value returned by .It Fn el_source Initialise .Nm -by reading the contents of +by reading the contents of .Fa file . .Fn el_parse is called for each line in @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ if there isn't one. .It Dv H_ENTER , Fa "const char *str" Add .Fa str -as a new element to the history, and, if necessary, +as a new element to the history, and, if necessary, removing the oldest entry to keep the list to the created size. .It Dv H_PREV_STR , Fa "const char *str" Return the closest previous event that starts with diff --git a/lib/libedit/editrc.5 b/lib/libedit/editrc.5 index 6ea7b1b6684..044b0271e99 100644 --- a/lib/libedit/editrc.5 +++ b/lib/libedit/editrc.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: editrc.5,v 1.7 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: editrc.5,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: editrc.5,v 1.4 1997/04/24 20:20:31 christos Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Refer to .Sx BUILT-IN COMMANDS for more information. .Pp -.Ar prog +.Ar prog is the program name string that a program defines when it calls .Xr el_init 3 to setup @@ -118,11 +118,11 @@ Options include: .It Fl e Bind all keys to the standard GNU Emacs-like bindings. .It Fl v -Bind all keys to the standard +Bind all keys to the standard .Xr vi 1 -like bindings. .It Fl a -List or change key bindings in the +List or change key bindings in the .Xr vi 1 mode alternate (command mode) key map. .It Fl k diff --git a/lib/libkeynote/keynote.1 b/lib/libkeynote/keynote.1 index 0a91a266056..184eb48e1c6 100644 --- a/lib/libkeynote/keynote.1 +++ b/lib/libkeynote/keynote.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: keynote.1,v 1.7 1999/07/07 14:22:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: keynote.1,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:29 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" The author of this code is Angelos D. Keromytis (angelos@dsl.cis.upenn.edu) .\" @@ -6,11 +6,11 @@ .\" in April-May 1998 .\" .\" Copyright (C) 1998, 1999 by Angelos D. Keromytis. -.\" +.\" .\" Permission to use, copy, and modify this software without fee .\" is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice is included in .\" all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or -.\" modification of this software. +.\" modification of this software. .\" You may use this code under the GNU public license if you so wish. Please .\" contribute changes back to the author. .\" @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ and can contain underscores. .Fa value is a quoted string, and can contain any character, and escape (backslash) processing is performed, as specified in the KeyNote -draft. +draft. .Pp The remaining options are: .Bl -tag -width indent @@ -217,10 +217,10 @@ flags should be given per invocation. If no flags are given, .Xr keynote 3 , .Xr keynote 4 .Bl -tag -width "AAAAAAA" -.It ``The KeyNote Trust-Management System'' +.It ``The KeyNote Trust-Management System'' M. Blaze, J. Feigenbaum, A. D. Keromytis, Internet Drafts, draft-ietf-trustmgt-keynote-00.txt -.It ``Decentralized Trust Management'' +.It ``Decentralized Trust Management'' M. Blaze, J. Feigenbaum, J. Lacy, 1996 IEEE Conference on Privacy and Security .It ``Compliance-Checking in the PolicyMaker Trust Management System'' diff --git a/lib/libkeynote/keynote.3 b/lib/libkeynote/keynote.3 index 8035ad50a52..7e192c9a7e7 100644 --- a/lib/libkeynote/keynote.3 +++ b/lib/libkeynote/keynote.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: keynote.3,v 1.8 1999/07/07 14:22:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: keynote.3,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:29 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" The author of this code is Angelos D. Keromytis (angelos@dsl.cis.upenn.edu) .\" @@ -6,11 +6,11 @@ .\" in April-May 1998 .\" .\" Copyright (C) 1998, 1999 by Angelos D. Keromytis. -.\" +.\" .\" Permission to use, copy, and modify this software without fee .\" is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice is included in .\" all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or -.\" modification of this software. +.\" modification of this software. .\" You may use this code under the GNU public license if you so wish. Please .\" contribute changes back to the author. .\" @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ struct keynote_binary .Va keynote_errno contains an error code if some library call failed. Failed calls return \-1 (if their return value is integer), or -.Dv NULL +.Dv NULL (if their return value is a pointer) and set .Va keynote_errno . The defined error codes are: @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ session, and performs any necessary initializations. On success, this function returns the new session ID, which is used by all subsequent calls with a .Fa sessid -argument. +argument. On failure, it returns \-1 and sets .Va keynote_errno to @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ attribute. In this case, .Fa name is a regular expression that may match more than one attribute. -In case of conflict between a regular expression and a ``simple'' +In case of conflict between a regular expression and a ``simple'' attribute, the latter will be given priority. In case of conflict between two regular expression attributes, the one added later will be given priority. A callback function should never change the current @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ and the highest-ordered value is .Fa returnvalues[numvalues - 1] . If .Fa returnvalues -is +is .Dv NULL , the .Fa returnvalues @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ for syntactic or semantic errors. .It KEYNOTE_ERROR_MEMORY for memory-related problems. .It KEYNOTE_ERROR_SIGNATURE -if the assertion could be be cryptographically verified. +if the assertion could be be cryptographically verified. .El .Pp These values are defined in keynote.h. An application can then delete @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ and frees all related resources, deleting action attributes, action authorizers, and assertions. On success, this function returns 0. On failure, it returns \-1 and sets .Va keynote_errno -to +to .Er ERROR_NOTFOUND if the session was not found. .Pp @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ in this implementation. describes how the key should be binary-encoded. This implementation supports .DV INTERNAL_ENC_PKCS1 -for RSA keys, +for RSA keys, .Dv INTERNAL_ENC_ASN1 for DSA keys, and .Dv INTERNAL_ENC_NONE @@ -658,7 +658,7 @@ and pointing to an algorithm-dependent structure. In this implementation, this is an SSLeay/OpenSSL-defined .Fa DSA * -for DSA keys, +for DSA keys, .Fa RSA * for RSA keys, and a .Fa keynote_binary * @@ -746,10 +746,10 @@ algorithm was not supported. .Xr keynote 1 , .Xr keynote 4 .Bl -tag -width "AAAAAAA" -.It ``The KeyNote Trust-Management System'' +.It ``The KeyNote Trust-Management System'' M. Blaze, J. Feigenbaum, A. D. Keromytis, Internet Drafts, draft-ietf-trustmgt-keynote-00.txt -.It ``Decentralized Trust Management'' +.It ``Decentralized Trust Management'' M. Blaze, J. Feigenbaum, J. Lacy, 1996 IEEE Conference on Privacy and Security .It ``Compliance-Checking in the PolicyMaker Trust Management System'' diff --git a/lib/libkeynote/keynote.4 b/lib/libkeynote/keynote.4 index 4375d5279a1..92d4fefc8ac 100644 --- a/lib/libkeynote/keynote.4 +++ b/lib/libkeynote/keynote.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: keynote.4,v 1.8 1999/07/07 10:50:06 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: keynote.4,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:29 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" The author of this code is Angelos D. Keromytis (angelos@dsl.cis.upenn.edu) .\" @@ -6,11 +6,11 @@ .\" in April-May 1998 .\" .\" Copyright (C) 1998, 1999 by Angelos D. Keromytis. -.\" +.\" .\" Permission to use, copy, and modify this software without fee .\" is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice is included in .\" all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or -.\" modification of this software. +.\" modification of this software. .\" You may use this code under the GNU public license if you so wish. Please .\" contribute changes back to the author. .\" @@ -233,10 +233,10 @@ actions. .Xr keynote 1 , .Xr keynote 3 .Bl -tag -width "AAAAAAA" -.It ``The KeyNote Trust-Management System'' +.It ``The KeyNote Trust-Management System'' M. Blaze, J. Feigenbaum, A. D. Keromytis, Internet Drafts, draft-ietf-trustmgt-keynote-00.txt -.It ``Decentralized Trust Management'' +.It ``Decentralized Trust Management'' M. Blaze, J. Feigenbaum, J. Lacy, 1996 IEEE Conference on Privacy and Security .It ``Compliance-Checking in the PolicyMaker Trust Management System'' diff --git a/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_geterr.3 b/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_geterr.3 index 641f2b48bdc..c54f37dc53b 100644 --- a/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_geterr.3 +++ b/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_geterr.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_geterr.3,v 1.1 1996/03/19 23:15:31 niklas Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_geterr.3,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ on the descriptor The results are undefined if the most recent .Xr kvm 3 library call did not produce an error. -The string returned is stored in memory owned by +The string returned is stored in memory owned by .Xr kvm 3 so the message should be copied out and saved elsewhere if necessary. .Sh BUGS @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ call, since failure is indicated by returning a .Dv NULL descriptor. Therefore, errors on open are output to the special error buffer -passed to +passed to .Fn kvm_openfiles . This option is not available to .Fn kvm_open . diff --git a/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_getprocs.3 b/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_getprocs.3 index 3cb7ea0b0ad..887f36c3df6 100644 --- a/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_getprocs.3 +++ b/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_getprocs.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_getprocs.3,v 1.3 1999/07/02 21:13:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_getprocs.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ .Sh NAME .Nm kvm_getprocs , .Nm kvm_getargv , -.Nm kvm_getenvv +.Nm kvm_getenvv .Nd access user process state .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <kvm.h> @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ describes the filtering predicate as follows: .It Sy KERN_PROC_ALL all processes .It Sy KERN_PROC_PID -processes with process id +processes with process id .Fa arg .It Sy KERN_PROC_PGRP processes with process group @@ -96,13 +96,13 @@ The number of processes found is returned in the reference parameter .Fa cnt . The processes are returned as a contiguous array of kinfo_proc structures. This memory is locally allocated, and subsequent calls to -.Fn kvm_getprocs -and +.Fn kvm_getprocs +and .Fn kvm_close will overwrite this storage. .Pp .Fn kvm_getargv -returns a null-terminated argument vector that corresponds to the +returns a null-terminated argument vector that corresponds to the command line arguments passed to process indicated by .Fa p . Most likely, these arguments correspond to the values passed to @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Note that the original command name can be found, unaltered, in the p_comm field of the process structure returned by .Fn kvm_getprocs . .Pp -The +The .Fa nchr argument indicates the maximum number of characters, including null bytes, to use in building the strings. If this amount is exceeded, the string @@ -126,13 +126,13 @@ that print only a one line summary of a command and should not copy out large amounts of text only to ignore it. If .Fa nchr -is zero, no limit is imposed and all argument strings are returned in +is zero, no limit is imposed and all argument strings are returned in their entirety. .Pp The memory allocated to the argv pointers and string storage -is owned by the kvm library. Subsequent -.Fn kvm_getprocs -and +is owned by the kvm library. Subsequent +.Fn kvm_getprocs +and .Xr kvm_close 3 calls will clobber this storage. .Pp diff --git a/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_open.3 b/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_open.3 index 101f7216389..e297dd20052 100644 --- a/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_open.3 +++ b/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_open.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_open.3,v 1.2 1998/08/24 06:15:56 millert Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_open.3,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -58,10 +58,10 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The functions .Fn kvm_open -and +and .Fn kvm_openfiles return a descriptor used to access kernel virtual memory -via the +via the .Xr kvm 3 library routines. Both active kernels and crash dumps are accessible through this interface. @@ -75,13 +75,13 @@ the currently running system is assumed, which is indicated by .Dv _PATH_KSYMS , if it exists, otherwise -.Dv _PATH_UNIX +.Dv _PATH_UNIX is used. Both are defined in <paths.h>. .Pp -.Fa corefile +.Fa corefile is the kernel memory device file. It can be either /dev/mem -or a crash dump core generated by +or a crash dump core generated by .Xr savecore 8 . If .Fa corefile @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ should indicate the swap device. If from <paths.h> is used. .Pp The -.Fa flags +.Fa flags argument indicates read/write access as in .Xr open 2 and applies only to the core file. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ and .Dv O_RDWR are permitted. .Pp -There are two open routines which differ only with respect to +There are two open routines which differ only with respect to the error mechanism. One provides backward compatibility with the SunOS kvm library, while the other provides an improved error reporting framework. @@ -120,11 +120,11 @@ function is the Sun kvm compatible open call. Here, the .Fa errstr argument indicates how errors should be handled. If it is .Dv NULL , -no errors are reported and the application cannot know the +no errors are reported and the application cannot know the specific nature of the failed kvm call. If it is not .Dv NULL , -errors are printed to stderr with +errors are printed to stderr with .Fa errstr prepended to the message, as in .Xr perror 3 . @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ argument. This buffer should be _POSIX2_LINE_MAX characters large (from .Sh RETURN VALUES The .Fn kvm_open -and +and .Fn kvm_openfiles functions both return a descriptor to be used in all subsequent kvm library calls. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ On failure, .Dv NULL is returned, in which case .Fn kvm_openfiles -writes the error message into +writes the error message into .Fa errbuf . .Pp The diff --git a/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_read.3 b/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_read.3 index a7f1628ac68..969bed16b28 100644 --- a/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_read.3 +++ b/lib/libkvm.old/kvm_read.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_read.3,v 1.1 1996/03/19 23:15:41 niklas Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_read.3,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -65,19 +65,19 @@ for information regarding opening kernel virtual memory and crash dumps. The .Fn kvm_read function transfers -.Fa nbytes +.Fa nbytes bytes of data from the kernel space address .Fa addr to .Fa buf . -Conversely, +Conversely, .Fn kvm_write transfers data from .Fa buf to .Fa addr . -Unlike their SunOS counterparts, these functions cannot be used to +Unlike their SunOS counterparts, these functions cannot be used to read or write process address spaces. .Sh RETURN VALUES Upon success, the number of bytes actually transferred is returned. diff --git a/lib/libkvm/kvm_dump.3 b/lib/libkvm/kvm_dump.3 index ffddb95f4a2..fa51b1bc1c8 100644 --- a/lib/libkvm/kvm_dump.3 +++ b/lib/libkvm/kvm_dump.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_dump.3,v 1.2 1999/07/07 14:22:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_dump.3,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: kvm_dump.3,v 1.1 1996/03/18 21:11:12 leo Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Leo Weppelman @@ -54,10 +54,10 @@ First note that the functions described here were designed to be used by .Pp The function .Fn kvm_dump_mkheader -checks if the physical memory file associated with +checks if the physical memory file associated with .Fa kd contains a valid crash-dump header as generated by a dumping kernel. When a -valid header is found, +valid header is found, .Fn kvm_dump_mkheader initializes the internal kvm data structures as if a crash-dump generated by the diff --git a/lib/libkvm/kvm_geterr.3 b/lib/libkvm/kvm_geterr.3 index 1d1899dc02f..d1977d8f1de 100644 --- a/lib/libkvm/kvm_geterr.3 +++ b/lib/libkvm/kvm_geterr.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_geterr.3,v 1.2 1996/05/05 14:57:02 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_geterr.3,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: kvm_geterr.3,v 1.2 1996/03/18 22:33:20 thorpej Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ on the descriptor The results are undefined if the most recent .Xr kvm 3 library call did not produce an error. -The string returned is stored in memory owned by +The string returned is stored in memory owned by .Xr kvm 3 so the message should be copied out and saved elsewhere if necessary. .Sh BUGS @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ call, since failure is indicated by returning a .Dv NULL descriptor. Therefore, errors on open are output to the special error buffer -passed to +passed to .Fn kvm_openfiles . This option is not available to .Fn kvm_open . diff --git a/lib/libkvm/kvm_getprocs.3 b/lib/libkvm/kvm_getprocs.3 index b983d307133..3b6b2d07b39 100644 --- a/lib/libkvm/kvm_getprocs.3 +++ b/lib/libkvm/kvm_getprocs.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_getprocs.3,v 1.5 1999/07/02 21:13:04 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_getprocs.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: kvm_getprocs.3,v 1.3 1996/05/20 16:58:03 mrg Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ .Sh NAME .Nm kvm_getprocs , .Nm kvm_getargv , -.Nm kvm_getenvv +.Nm kvm_getenvv .Nd access user process state .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <kvm.h> @@ -97,13 +97,13 @@ The number of processes found is returned in the reference parameter .Fa cnt . The processes are returned as a contiguous array of kinfo_proc structures. This memory is locally allocated, and subsequent calls to -.Fn kvm_getprocs -and +.Fn kvm_getprocs +and .Fn kvm_close will overwrite this storage. .Pp .Fn kvm_getargv -returns a null-terminated argument vector that corresponds to the +returns a null-terminated argument vector that corresponds to the command line arguments passed to process indicated by .Fa p . Most likely, these arguments correspond to the values passed to @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ in the field of the process structure returned by .Fn kvm_getprocs . .Pp -The +The .Fa nchr argument indicates the maximum number of characters, including null bytes, to use in building the strings. If this amount is exceeded, the string @@ -129,13 +129,13 @@ that print only a one line summary of a command and should not copy out large amounts of text only to ignore it. If .Fa nchr -is zero, no limit is imposed and all argument strings are returned in +is zero, no limit is imposed and all argument strings are returned in their entirety. .Pp The memory allocated to the argv pointers and string storage -is owned by the kvm library. Subsequent -.Fn kvm_getprocs -and +is owned by the kvm library. Subsequent +.Fn kvm_getprocs +and .Xr kvm_close 3 calls will clobber this storage. .Pp diff --git a/lib/libkvm/kvm_open.3 b/lib/libkvm/kvm_open.3 index 7b2aba5aa06..56620ace6a8 100644 --- a/lib/libkvm/kvm_open.3 +++ b/lib/libkvm/kvm_open.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_open.3,v 1.4 1999/07/07 14:22:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_open.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: kvm_open.3,v 1.2 1996/03/18 22:33:52 thorpej Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 @@ -59,10 +59,10 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The functions .Fn kvm_open -and +and .Fn kvm_openfiles return a descriptor used to access kernel virtual memory -via the +via the .Xr kvm 3 library routines. Both active kernels and crash dumps are accessible through this interface. @@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ if it exists, otherwise is used. Both are defined in <paths.h>. .Pp -.Fa corefile +.Fa corefile is the kernel memory device file. It can be either /dev/mem -or a crash dump core generated by +or a crash dump core generated by .Xr savecore 8 . If .Fa corefile @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ should indicate the swap device. If from <paths.h> is used. .Pp The -.Fa flags +.Fa flags argument indicates read/write access as in .Xr open 2 and applies only to the core file. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ and .Dv O_RDWR are permitted. .Pp -There are two open routines which differ only with respect to +There are two open routines which differ only with respect to the error mechanism. One provides backward compatibility with the SunOS kvm library, while the other provides an improved error reporting framework. @@ -121,11 +121,11 @@ function is the Sun kvm compatible open call. Here, the .Fa errstr argument indicates how errors should be handled. If it is .Dv NULL , -no errors are reported and the application cannot know the +no errors are reported and the application cannot know the specific nature of the failed kvm call. If it is not .Dv NULL , -errors are printed to stderr with +errors are printed to stderr with .Fa errstr prepended to the message, as in .Xr perror 3 . @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ argument. This buffer should be _POSIX2_LINE_MAX characters large (from .Sh RETURN VALUES The .Fn kvm_open -and +and .Fn kvm_openfiles functions both return a descriptor to be used in all subsequent kvm library calls. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ On failure, .Dv NULL is returned, in which case .Fn kvm_openfiles -writes the error message into +writes the error message into .Fa errbuf . .Pp The diff --git a/lib/libkvm/kvm_read.3 b/lib/libkvm/kvm_read.3 index 8a296db375d..43017b7b835 100644 --- a/lib/libkvm/kvm_read.3 +++ b/lib/libkvm/kvm_read.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_read.3,v 1.3 1999/07/07 14:22:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: kvm_read.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: kvm_read.3,v 1.2 1996/03/18 22:34:01 thorpej Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 @@ -66,19 +66,19 @@ for information regarding opening kernel virtual memory and crash dumps. The .Fn kvm_read function transfers -.Fa nbytes +.Fa nbytes bytes of data from the kernel space address .Fa addr to .Fa buf . -Conversely, +Conversely, .Fn kvm_write transfers data from .Fa buf to .Fa addr . -Unlike their SunOS counterparts, these functions cannot be used to +Unlike their SunOS counterparts, these functions cannot be used to read or write process address spaces. .Sh RETURN VALUES Upon success, the number of bytes actually transferred is returned. diff --git a/lib/libm/man/acos.3 b/lib/libm/man/acos.3 index e9c73e400c1..6cf587f93e7 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/acos.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/acos.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)acos.3 5.1 (Berkeley) 5/2/91 -.\" $Id: acos.3,v 1.5 1999/07/01 00:06:39 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: acos.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 2, 1991 .Dt ACOS 3 @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ The and .Fn acosf functions compute the principal value of the arc cosine of -.Fa x +.Fa x in the range .Bq 0 , \*(Pi . .Sh RETURN VALUES diff --git a/lib/libm/man/acosh.3 b/lib/libm/man/acosh.3 index ffd15f739c8..87f97737b3d 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/acosh.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/acosh.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)acosh.3 5.2 (Berkeley) 5/6/91 -.\" $Id: acosh.3,v 1.5 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: acosh.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 6, 1991 .Dt ACOSH 3 @@ -71,5 +71,5 @@ to EDOM. .Sh HISTORY The .Fn acosh -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.3 . diff --git a/lib/libm/man/asin.3 b/lib/libm/man/asin.3 index 1a2bedc1db6..cf6a4bafe46 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/asin.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/asin.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)asin.3 5.1 (Berkeley) 5/2/91 -.\" $Id: asin.3,v 1.5 1999/07/01 00:06:39 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: asin.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 2, 1991 .Dt ASIN 3 @@ -48,10 +48,10 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Fn asin -and +and .Fn asinf functions compute the principal value of the arc sine of -.Fa x +.Fa x in the range .Bk -words .Bq -\*(Pi/2, +\*(Pi/2 . diff --git a/lib/libm/man/asinh.3 b/lib/libm/man/asinh.3 index 3f28fea895f..ea7abe185ee 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/asinh.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/asinh.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)asinh.3 6.4 (Berkeley) 5/6/91 -.\" $Id: asinh.3,v 1.5 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: asinh.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 6, 1991 .Dt ASINH 3 @@ -69,5 +69,5 @@ functions return the inverse hyperbolic sine of .Sh HISTORY The .Fn asinh -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.3 . diff --git a/lib/libm/man/atan.3 b/lib/libm/man/atan.3 index 3eb9513dfd9..b7b8db5bb39 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/atan.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/atan.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)atan.3 5.1 (Berkeley) 5/2/91 -.\" $Id: atan.3,v 1.5 1999/07/01 00:06:39 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: atan.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 2, 1991 .Dt ATAN 3 @@ -48,10 +48,10 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Fn atan -and +and .Fn atanf functions compute the principal value of the arc tangent of -.Fa x +.Fa x in the range .Bk -words .Bq -\*(Pi/2 , +\*(Pi/2 . diff --git a/lib/libm/man/atan2.3 b/lib/libm/man/atan2.3 index eb6363d4118..a88acea6866 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/atan2.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/atan2.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)atan2.3 5.1 (Berkeley) 5/2/91 -.\" $Id: atan2.3,v 1.4 1999/07/01 00:06:39 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: atan2.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 2, 1991 .Dt ATAN2 3 @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ the return value. The .Xr atan2 function, if successful, -returns the arc tangent of +returns the arc tangent of .Ar y/ Ns Ar x in the range .Bk -words diff --git a/lib/libm/man/cos.3 b/lib/libm/man/cos.3 index 87de19d799b..5fdf6a399ff 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/cos.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/cos.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)cos.3 5.1 (Berkeley) 5/2/91 -.\" $Id: cos.3,v 1.4 1999/07/01 00:06:40 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: cos.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 2, 1991 .Dt COS 3 @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ and functions compute the cosine of .Fa x (measured in radians). -A large magnitude argument may yield a result with little or no +A large magnitude argument may yield a result with little or no significance. For a discussion of error due to roundoff, see .Xr math 3 . diff --git a/lib/libm/man/erf.3 b/lib/libm/man/erf.3 index 6d7a8559388..84410342c4c 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/erf.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/erf.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)erf.3 6.4 (Berkeley) 4/20/91 -.\" $Id: erf.3,v 1.6 1999/07/07 10:50:06 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: erf.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd April 20, 1991 .Dt ERFC 3 @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ calculates the error function of x; where .if n \{\ erf(x) = 2/sqrt(pi)\(**\|integral from 0 to x of exp(\-t\(**t) dt. \} .if t \{\ -erf\|(x) := +erf\|(x) := (2/\(sr\(*p)\|\(is\d\s8\z0\s10\u\u\s8x\s10\d\|exp(\-t\u\s82\s10\d)\|dt. \} .Ed .Pp diff --git a/lib/libm/man/exp.3 b/lib/libm/man/exp.3 index 56349bb3883..90ce33bf4cf 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/exp.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/exp.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)exp.3 6.12 (Berkeley) 7/31/91 -.\" $Id: exp.3,v 1.6 1999/07/07 10:50:06 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: exp.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:26 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd July 31, 1991 .Dt EXP 3 @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ function computes the value exp(x)\-1 accurately even for tiny argument .Pp The .Fn log -function computes the value of the natural logarithm of argument +function computes the value of the natural logarithm of argument .Fa x. .Pp The @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ of to the exponent .Ar y . .Sh ERROR (due to Roundoff etc.) -exp(x), log(x), expm1(x) and log1p(x) are accurate to within +exp(x), log(x), expm1(x) and log1p(x) are accurate to within an .Em ulp , and log10(x) to within about 2 @@ -244,10 +244,10 @@ Any program that already tests whether x is zero (or infinite or \*(Na) before computing x**0 cannot care whether 0**0 = 1 or not. Any program that depends upon 0**0 to be invalid is dubious anyway since that -expression's meaning and, if invalid, its consequences +expression's meaning and, if invalid, its consequences vary from one computer system to another. .It -Some Algebra texts (e.g. Sigler's) define x**0 = 1 for +Some Algebra texts (e.g. Sigler's) define x**0 = 1 for all x, including x = 0. This is compatible with the convention that accepts a[0] as the value of polynomial @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ The reason for setting 0**0 = 1 anyway is this: If x(z) and y(z) are .Em any functions analytic (expandable -in power series) in z around z = 0, and if there +in power series) in z around z = 0, and if there x(0) = y(0) = 0, then x(z)**y(z) \(-> 1 as z \(-> 0. .Ed .It diff --git a/lib/libm/man/fabs.3 b/lib/libm/man/fabs.3 index b95b256751c..4464cffba87 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/fabs.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/fabs.3 @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)fabs.3 5.1 (Berkeley) 5/2/91 -.\" $Id: fabs.3,v 1.4 1999/07/01 00:06:40 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: fabs.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 2, 1991 .Dt FABS 3 @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Fn fabs -and +and .Fn fabsf functions compute the absolute value of a floating-point number .Fa x . diff --git a/lib/libm/man/floor.3 b/lib/libm/man/floor.3 index b940ad01163..abe9a8e3d88 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/floor.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/floor.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)floor.3 6.5 (Berkeley) 4/19/91 -.\" $Id: floor.3,v 1.4 1999/07/01 00:06:40 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: floor.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 10, 1994 .Dt FLOOR 3 @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ The .Fn floor and .Fn floorf -functions return the largest integral value +functions return the largest integral value less than or equal to .Fa x . .Sh SEE ALSO diff --git a/lib/libm/man/fmod.3 b/lib/libm/man/fmod.3 index ecc4748892b..8c724622b5b 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/fmod.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/fmod.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)fmod.3 5.1 (Berkeley) 5/2/91 -.\" $Id: fmod.3,v 1.3 1999/07/01 00:06:40 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: fmod.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 2, 1991 .Dt FMOD 3 @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ function computes the floating-point remainder of .Fa x Ns / Fa y . .Sh RETURN VALUES The -.Fn fmod -and +.Fn fmod +and .Fn fmodf functions return the value .Sm off diff --git a/lib/libm/man/ieee.3 b/lib/libm/man/ieee.3 index 02035285c35..bd273827574 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/ieee.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/ieee.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)ieee.3 6.4 (Berkeley) 5/6/91 -.\" $Id: ieee.3,v 1.4 1999/07/02 17:04:16 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: ieee.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd February 25, 1994 .Dt IEEE 3 @@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ .Nd Functions for IEEE arithmetic .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <math.h> -.Ft double +.Ft double .Fn copysign "double x" "double y" .Ft float .Fn copysignf "float x" "float y" -.Ft int +.Ft int .Fn finite "double x" .Ft int .Fn finitef "float x" @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ .Fn ilogb "double x" .Ft int .Fn ilogbf "float x" -.Ft double +.Ft double .Fn nextafter "double x" "double y" .Ft float .Fn nextafterf "float x" "float y" @@ -71,12 +71,12 @@ .Fn remainder "double x" "double y" .Ft float .Fn remainderf "float x" "float y" -.Ft double +.Ft double .Fn scalbn "double x" "int n" .Ft float .Fn scalbnf "float x" "int n" .Sh DESCRIPTION -These functions are required or recommended by +These functions are required or recommended by .St -ieee754 . .Pp .Fn copysign @@ -103,16 +103,16 @@ returns .Fa x Ns 's exponent .Fa n , in integer format. -.Fn ilogb \*(Pm\*(If -returns +.Fn ilogb \*(Pm\*(If +returns .Dv INT_MAX and .Fn ilogb 0 -returns +returns .Dv INT_MIN . .Pp -.Fn nextafter -returns the next machine representable number from +.Fn nextafter +returns the next machine representable number from .Fa x in direction .Fa y . @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ computed by exponent manipulation. .Sh HISTORY The .Nm ieee -functions appeared in +functions appeared in .Bx 4.3 . .Sh STANDARDS .St -ieee754 diff --git a/lib/libm/man/ieee_test.3 b/lib/libm/man/ieee_test.3 index 247a7f1855e..2b48a72abe2 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/ieee_test.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/ieee_test.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)ieee.3 6.4 (Berkeley) 5/6/91 -.\" $Id: ieee_test.3,v 1.5 1999/07/07 10:50:06 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: ieee_test.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 10, 1994 .Dt IEEE_TEST 3 @@ -45,11 +45,11 @@ .Nd IEEE test functions .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <math.h> -.Ft double +.Ft double .Fn logb "double x" .Ft float .Fn logbf "float x" -.Ft double +.Ft double .Fn scalb "double x" "double n" .Ft float .Fn scalbf "float x" "float n" @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ .Ft float .Fn significandf "float x" .Sh DESCRIPTION -These functions allow users to test conformance to +These functions allow users to test conformance to .St -ieee754 . Their use is not otherwise recommended. .Pp @@ -77,18 +77,18 @@ returns .Fa x Ns \(**(2** Ns Fa n ) computed by exponent manipulation. .Pp -.Fn significand x -returns +.Fn significand x +returns .Fa sig , -where -.Fa x -:= +where +.Fa x +:= .Fa sig No \(** 2** Ns Fa n -with 1 \(<= +with 1 \(<= .Fa sig < 2. .Fn significand x -is not defined when +is not defined when .Fa x is 0, \*(Pm\*(If, or \*(Na. .Sh SEE ALSO diff --git a/lib/libm/man/infnan.3 b/lib/libm/man/infnan.3 index 8cd1ffca369..7d16f7e83e8 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/infnan.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/infnan.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: infnan.3,v 1.3 1999/07/01 00:06:40 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: infnan.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ (temporary) .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <math.h> -.Ft double +.Ft double .Fn infnan "int iarg" .Sh DESCRIPTION At some time in the future, some of the useful properties of @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ in appropriate places in .Xr libm 3 . When better exception\-handling is implemented in -.Tn UNIX , +.Tn UNIX , only .Fn infnan among the codes in @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ when they invoke .Fn infnan iarg under analogous circumstances on a -.Tn VAX . +.Tn VAX . Currently .Fn infnan stops computation under all those @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ and a value for a revised .Fn infnan to return. And a C program to -implement that suggestion follows. +implement that suggestion follows. .sp 0.5 .Bd -filled -offset indent .Bl -column "IEEE Signal" "IEEE Default" XXERANGE ERANGEXXorXXEDOM @@ -178,5 +178,5 @@ and .Sh HISTORY The .Fn infnan -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.3 . diff --git a/lib/libm/man/j0.3 b/lib/libm/man/j0.3 index 1de052ff934..497398d7c88 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/j0.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/j0.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)j0.3 6.7 (Berkeley) 4/19/91 -.\" $Id: j0.3,v 1.6 1999/07/07 10:50:06 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: j0.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd April 19, 1991 .Dt J0 3 @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ .Fn ynf "int n" "float x" .Sh DESCRIPTION The functions -.Fn j0 , +.Fn j0 , .Fn j0f , .Fn j1 and @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ and compute the .Em Bessel function of the second kind for the integer order .Fa n -for the positive +for the positive .Em integer value .Fa x diff --git a/lib/libm/man/lgamma.3 b/lib/libm/man/lgamma.3 index 61b080b500e..eff8e0b3d70 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/lgamma.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/lgamma.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)lgamma.3 6.6 (Berkeley) 12/3/92 -.\" $Id: lgamma.3,v 1.7 1999/07/02 21:13:06 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: lgamma.3,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd December 3, 1992 .Dt LGAMMA 3 @@ -94,5 +94,5 @@ is set to .Sh HISTORY The .Fn lgamma -function appeared in +function appeared in .Bx 4.3 . diff --git a/lib/libm/man/sinh.3 b/lib/libm/man/sinh.3 index d784b6192fd..e0ccd54b072 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/sinh.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/sinh.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)sinh.3 6.6 (Berkeley) 4/19/91 -.\" $Id: sinh.3,v 1.4 1999/07/01 00:06:40 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: sinh.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .Dd April 19, 1991 .Dt SINH 3 .Os @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ function computes the hyperbolic sine of The .Fn sinh function returns the hyperbolic sine value unless -the magnitude +the magnitude of .Fa x is too large; in this event, the global variable diff --git a/lib/libm/man/sqrt.3 b/lib/libm/man/sqrt.3 index 81532f9d05e..ef4cccab632 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/sqrt.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/sqrt.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)sqrt.3 6.4 (Berkeley) 5/6/91 -.\" $Id: sqrt.3,v 1.4 1999/07/01 00:06:40 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: sqrt.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 6, 1991 .Dt SQRT 3 @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ sets the global variable .Va errno to EDOM. .Sh SEE ALSO -.Xr math 3 +.Xr math 3 .Sh HISTORY The .Fn cbrt diff --git a/lib/libm/man/tan.3 b/lib/libm/man/tan.3 index b10472c9b49..e687afa3999 100644 --- a/lib/libm/man/tan.3 +++ b/lib/libm/man/tan.3 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)tan.3 5.1 (Berkeley) 5/2/91 -.\" $Id: tan.3,v 1.4 1999/07/01 00:06:40 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: tan.3,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 2, 1991 .Dt TAN 3 @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Fn tan -and +and .Fn tanf functions compute the tangent of .Fa x diff --git a/lib/libocurses/ocurses.3 b/lib/libocurses/ocurses.3 index 8d6ffb7c776..30c3e23a944 100644 --- a/lib/libocurses/ocurses.3 +++ b/lib/libocurses/ocurses.3 @@ -196,5 +196,5 @@ as changed .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -package appeared in +package appeared in .Bx 4.0 . diff --git a/lib/libocurses/otermcap.3 b/lib/libocurses/otermcap.3 index 3bd4e77a4f4..daf7bf368d1 100644 --- a/lib/libocurses/otermcap.3 +++ b/lib/libocurses/otermcap.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: otermcap.3,v 1.2 1999/07/07 10:50:06 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: otermcap.3,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:27 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: termcap.3,v 1.5 1995/06/05 19:45:48 pk Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 @@ -270,5 +270,5 @@ user's terminal capability data base .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -functions appeared in +functions appeared in .Bx 4.0 . diff --git a/lib/libossaudio/ossaudio.3 b/lib/libossaudio/ossaudio.3 index 57514a0c4ce..c2f53d174dc 100644 --- a/lib/libossaudio/ossaudio.3 +++ b/lib/libossaudio/ossaudio.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ossaudio.3,v 1.3 1999/07/07 10:50:06 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ossaudio.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:28 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: ossaudio.3,v 1.6 1998/02/05 18:52:19 perry Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS @@ -53,14 +53,14 @@ library only for porting programs. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr audio 4 .Sh BUGS -The emulation uses an #define for +The emulation uses an #define for .Va ioctl() so some obscure programs can fail to compile. .Pp The emulation is incomplete. .Pp -The emulation only covers +The emulation only covers .Va ioctl() , there are other differences as well. E.g., on a write that would block in non-blocking mode Linux returns diff --git a/lib/libpcap/pcap.3 b/lib/libpcap/pcap.3 index 3934ec05eab..bc5d1ad943f 100644 --- a/lib/libpcap/pcap.3 +++ b/lib/libpcap/pcap.3 @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ in .Fn pcap_lookupdev , and .Fn pcap_lookupnet -is assumed to be able to hold at least +is assumed to be able to hold at least .Dv PCAP_ERRBUFF_SIZE chars. .Pp diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pread.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pread.3 index 3262800cf38..c4f151650ab 100644 --- a/lib/libpthread/man/pread.3 +++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pread.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pread.3,v 1.6 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pread.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" David Leonard <d@openbsd.org>, 1998. Public domain. .Dd September 7, 1998 .Dt PREAD 3 @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ in the file opened on file descriptor .Fa filedes. .Pp This function is provided for use in a threaded, parallel I/O -environment, where race conditions may exist between two threads +environment, where race conditions may exist between two threads non-atomically seeking and reading from the same file descriptor. .Sh RETURN VALUES The diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_detach.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_detach.3 index 8fdebe5c6a1..ca62e49ea2c 100644 --- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_detach.3 +++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_detach.3 @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ can be reclaimed when the thread terminates. If .Fa thread has not terminated, .Fn pthread_detach -will not cause it to terminate. The effect of multiple +will not cause it to terminate. The effect of multiple .Fn pthread_detach calls on the same target thread is unspecified. .Sh RETURN VALUES diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_exit.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_exit.3 index a6016203c97..d12b2290d02 100644 --- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_exit.3 +++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_exit.3 @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ is undefied if called from a cancellation handler or destructor function that was invoked as the result of an implicit or explicit call to .Fn pthread_exit . .Pp -After a thread has terminated, the result of access to local (auto) +After a thread has terminated, the result of access to local (auto) variables of the thread is undefined. Thus, references to local variables of the exiting thread should not be used for the .Fn pthread_exit diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_once.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_once.3 index f33a6901f6b..2454d61dd92 100644 --- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_once.3 +++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_once.3 @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ The function is not a cancellation point. However, if .Fn init_routine is a cancellation point and is cancelled, the effect on -.Fa once_control is as if +.Fa once_control is as if .Fn pthread_once was never called. .Pp diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3 index 8a3fa008de0..3ad133ff3aa 100644 --- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3 +++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3 @@ -22,8 +22,8 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: pthread_rwlock_destroy.3,v 1.3 1999/05/14 21:03:31 alex Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: pthread_rwlock_destroy.3,v 1.3 1999/05/14 21:03:31 alex Exp $ +.\" $Id: pthread_rwlock_destroy.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pthread_rwlock_destroy.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 4, 1998 .Dt PTHREAD_RWLOCK_DESTROY 3 @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Fn pthread_rwlock_destroy -function is used to destroy a read/write lock previously created with +function is used to destroy a read/write lock previously created with .Fn pthread_rwlock_init . .Sh RETURN VALUES If successful, the diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3 index 9dfe3718994..41a04620933 100644 --- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3 +++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3 @@ -22,8 +22,8 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3,v 1.3 1999/05/14 21:03:32 alex Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3,v 1.3 1999/05/14 21:03:32 alex Exp $ +.\" $Id: pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 4, 1998 .Dt PTHREAD_RWLOCKATTR_DESTROY 3 @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ The .Fn pthread_rwlockattr_destroy function is used to destroy a read/write lock attribute object -previously created with +previously created with .Fn pthread_rwlockattr_init . .Sh RETURN VALUES If successful, the diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_single_np.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_single_np.3 index ed24ab68eab..80f6ff8b4c0 100644 --- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_single_np.3 +++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_single_np.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pthread_single_np.3,v 1.2 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pthread_single_np.3,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" David Leonard <d@openbsd.org>, 1999. Public domain. .Dd March 21, 1999 .Dt PTHREAD_SINGLE_NP 3 @@ -17,12 +17,12 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Fn pthread_single_np -function causes the process to +function causes the process to enter single-threaded (non-POSIX) scheduling mode. .Pp The .Fn pthread_multi_np -function causes the process to +function causes the process to return to multi-threaded scheduling mode. .Sh RETURN VALUES The diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_testcancel.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_testcancel.3 index a6a0093f915..aaf37e26acc 100644 --- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_testcancel.3 +++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_testcancel.3 @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ to the indicated .Fa type and returns the previous cancelability type at the location referenced by .Fa oldtype . -Legal values for +Legal values for .Fa type are .Dv PTHREAD_CANCEL_DEFERRED @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ cancellation requests are held pending until a cancellation point (see below) is reached. If cancelability is disabled, the setting of the cancelability type has no immediate effect as all cancellation requests are held pending; however, once cancelability is enabled again the new -type will be in effect. +type will be in effect. .El .Ss Cancellation Points Cancellation points will occur when a thread is executing the following @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ The .Fn pthread_setcancelstate and .Fn pthread_setcanceltype -functions are used to control the points at which a thread may be +functions are used to control the points at which a thread may be asynchronously canceled. For cancellation control to be usable in modular fashion, some rules must be followed. .Pp diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthreads.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthreads.3 index e6887d9166d..774d56b7c53 100644 --- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthreads.3 +++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthreads.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pthreads.3,v 1.5 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pthreads.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:24 aaron Exp $ .\" David Leonard <d@openbsd.org>, 1998. Public domain. .Dd August 17, 1998 .Dt PTHREADS 3 @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ to alter the process virtual timer will have undefined effects. The .Dv SIGVTALRM will never be delivered to threads in a process. .Pp -Due to the +Due to the type definition of .Ft fd_set and the internal reliance on diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pwrite.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pwrite.3 index 3041753a588..0de1b53e5ec 100644 --- a/lib/libpthread/man/pwrite.3 +++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pwrite.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pwrite.3,v 1.6 1999/07/07 10:50:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pwrite.3,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:25 aaron Exp $ .\" David Leonard <d@openbsd.org>, 1998. Public domain. .Dd September 7, 1998 .Dt PWRITE 3 @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ in the file opened on file descriptor .Fa filedes. .Pp This function is provided for use in a threaded, parallel I/O -environment, where race conditions may exist between two threads +environment, where race conditions may exist between two threads non-atomically seeking and writing to the same file descriptor. .Sh RETURN VALUES The diff --git a/lib/libtermlib/terminfo.3 b/lib/libtermlib/terminfo.3 index 278a24922ab..a40a8f6b23b 100644 --- a/lib/libtermlib/terminfo.3 +++ b/lib/libtermlib/terminfo.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: terminfo.3,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:56:04 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: terminfo.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:28 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Todd C. Miller <Todd.Miller@courtesan.com> .\" All rights reserved. @@ -270,8 +270,8 @@ routine instantiates the string .Ar str , substituting the parameters %p1 through %p9 with the values of -.Ar p1 -through +.Ar p1 +through .Ar p9 . A pointer is returned to the result of .Ar str diff --git a/lib/libutil/pw_getconf.3 b/lib/libutil/pw_getconf.3 index cffa555c7f2..65bcee7b6ca 100644 --- a/lib/libutil/pw_getconf.3 +++ b/lib/libutil/pw_getconf.3 @@ -42,12 +42,12 @@ The function reads .Pa /etc/passwd.conf and retrieves the value of the option specified -by +by .Pa option -from the section given be -.Pa key . +from the section given be +.Pa key . If no suitable entry is found -for the +for the .Pa key an empty string will be returned in data. .Pp diff --git a/lib/libutil/uucplock.3 b/lib/libutil/uucplock.3 index 7c1eebc2e34..adca519e39e 100644 --- a/lib/libutil/uucplock.3 +++ b/lib/libutil/uucplock.3 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -.\" +.\" .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -20,14 +20,14 @@ .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. -.\" -.\" $Id: uucplock.3,v 1.5 1999/07/07 14:22:26 aaron Exp $ +.\" +.\" $Id: uucplock.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:28 aaron Exp $ .\" " .Dd March 30, 1997 .Dt uucplock 3 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm uu_lock , +.Nm uu_lock , .Nm uu_unlock , .Nm uu_lockerr .Nd acquire and release control of a serial device diff --git a/lib/libwrap/hosts_access.3 b/lib/libwrap/hosts_access.3 index b94e61d1e6f..af0e2e1c08f 100644 --- a/lib/libwrap/hosts_access.3 +++ b/lib/libwrap/hosts_access.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: hosts_access.3,v 1.3 1997/06/23 11:12:40 downsj Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: hosts_access.3,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:28 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .Nm hosts_access , .Nm hosts_ctl , .Nm request_init , -.Nm request_set +.Nm request_set .Nd access control library .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <tcpd.h> @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ .Ft int .Fn hosts_ctl "char *daemon" "char *client_name" "char *client_addr" "char *client_user" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The routines described in this document are part of the +The routines described in this document are part of the .Nm libwrap.a library. They implement a rule-based access control language with optional shell commands that are executed when a rule fires. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ arguments should contain valid data or STRING_UNKNOWN. .Fn hosts_ctl returns zero if access should be denied. .Pp -The +The .Fa allow_severity and .Fa deny_severity @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ library function. This may interfere with other code that relies on Wietse Venema (wietse@wzv.win.tue.nl) Department of Mathematics and Computing Science Eindhoven University of Technology -Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, +Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, 5600 MB Eindhoven, The Netherlands .Ed \" @(#) hosts_access.3 1.8 96/02/11 17:01:26 diff --git a/lib/libwrap/hosts_access.5 b/lib/libwrap/hosts_access.5 index ae287e9e9a5..40f9336116f 100644 --- a/lib/libwrap/hosts_access.5 +++ b/lib/libwrap/hosts_access.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: hosts_access.5,v 1.6 1997/07/27 18:43:30 downsj Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: hosts_access.5,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:28 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -49,9 +49,9 @@ document. .\" The extensions are turned on at .\" program build time by building with -DPROCESS_OPTIONS. .Pp -In the following text, +In the following text, .Ar daemon -is the process name of a network daemon process, and +is the process name of a network daemon process, and .Ar client is the name and/or address of a host requesting service. Network daemon process names are specified in the inetd configuration file. @@ -61,12 +61,12 @@ at the first match: .Bl -bullet -tag -width XXX .It Access will be granted when a (daemon,client) pair matches an entry in -the +the .Pa /etc/hosts.allow file. .It Otherwise, access will be denied when a (daemon,client) pair matches an -entry in the +entry in the .Pa /etc/hosts.deny file. .It @@ -102,21 +102,21 @@ daemon_list : client_list [ : shell_command ] .Ar daemon_list is a list of one or more daemon process names .Pf ( Va argv[0] -values) or wildcards (see below). +values) or wildcards (see below). .Pp .Ar client_list is a list of one or more host names, host addresses, patterns or wildcards (see below) that will be matched against the client host name or address. .Pp -The more complex forms +The more complex forms .Ar daemon@host -and +and .Ar user@host are explained in the sections on server endpoint patterns and on client username lookups, respectively. .Pp -List elements should be separated by blanks and/or commas. +List elements should be separated by blanks and/or commas. .Pp With the exception of NIS (YP) netgroup lookups, all access control checks are case insensitive. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ A string that begins with a .Sc character. A host name is matched if the last components of its name match the specified pattern. For -example, the pattern +example, the pattern .Sq .tue.nl matches the host name .Sq wzv.win.tue.nl . @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ what type of network it is talking to. .IP EXCEPT Intended use is of the form: .Sq list_1 EXCEPT list_2 ; -this construct matches anything that matches +this construct matches anything that matches .Ar list_1 unless it matches .Ar list_2 . @@ -211,10 +211,10 @@ would parse as .Sh SHELL COMMANDS If the first-matched access control rule contains a shell command, that command is subjected to %<letter> substitutions (see next section). -The result is executed by a +The result is executed by a .Pa /bin/sh child process with standard -input, output and error connected to +input, output and error connected to .Pa /dev/null . Specify an .Sq & @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Shell commands should not rely on the PATH setting of the inetd. Instead, they should use absolute path names, or they should begin with an explicit PATH=whatever statement. .Pp -The +The .Xr hosts_options 5 document describes an alternative language that uses the shell command field in a different and incompatible way. @@ -295,11 +295,11 @@ daemon_list : ... user_pattern@host_pattern ... The daemon wrappers can be configured at compile time to perform rule-driven username lookups (default) or to always interrogate the client host. In the case of rule-driven username lookups, the above -rule would cause username lookup only when both the +rule would cause username lookup only when both the .Ar daemon_list -and the +and the .Ar host_pattern -match. +match. .Pp A user pattern has the same syntax as a daemon process pattern, so the same wildcards apply (netgroup membership is not supported). One @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ client connection and the IDENT lookup, although doing so is much harder than spoofing just a client connection. It may also be that the client\'s IDENT server is lying. .Pp -Note: IDENT lookups don\'t work with UDP services. +Note: IDENT lookups don\'t work with UDP services. .Sh EXAMPLES The language is flexible enough that different types of access control policy can be expressed with a minimum of fuss. Although the language @@ -370,13 +370,13 @@ including address and/or network/netmask information, to reduce the impact of temporary name server lookup failures. .Sh MOSTLY CLOSED In this case, access is denied by default. Only explicitly authorized -hosts are permitted access. +hosts are permitted access. .Pp The default policy (no access) is implemented with a trivial deny file: .Pp .Bd -unfilled -offset indent -/etc/hosts.deny: +/etc/hosts.deny: .Bd -unfilled -offset indent 2 ALL: ALL .Ed @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ The explicitly authorized hosts are listed in the allow file. For example: .Pp .Bd -unfilled -offset indent -/etc/hosts.allow: +/etc/hosts.allow: .Bd -unfilled -offset indent 2 ALL: LOCAL @some_netgroup ALL: .foobar.edu EXCEPT terminalserver.foobar.edu @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ The first rule permits access from hosts in the local domain (no .So .Ns . .Sc -in the host name) and from members of the +in the host name) and from members of the .Ar some_netgroup netgroup. The second rule permits access from all hosts in the .Ar foobar.edu @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ domain (notice the leading dot), with the exception of .Ar terminalserver.foobar.edu . .Sh MOSTLY OPEN Here, access is granted by default; only explicitly specified hosts are -refused service. +refused service. .Pp The default policy (access granted) makes the allow file redundant so that it can be omitted. The explicitly non-authorized hosts are listed @@ -491,7 +491,7 @@ netgroup lookups are case sensitive. Wietse Venema (wietse@wzv.win.tue.nl) Department of Mathematics and Computing Science Eindhoven University of Technology -Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, +Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, 5600 MB Eindhoven, The Netherlands .Ed \" @(#) hosts_access.5 1.20 95/01/30 19:51:46 diff --git a/lib/libwrap/hosts_options.5 b/lib/libwrap/hosts_options.5 index 0bd7e6f7973..7287a72259c 100644 --- a/lib/libwrap/hosts_options.5 +++ b/lib/libwrap/hosts_options.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: hosts_options.5,v 1.2 1997/06/23 11:12:41 downsj Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: hosts_options.5,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:29 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ in the .Xr hosts_access 5 document. .\" The extensions are enabled at program build time. -.\" For example, by editing the Makefile and turning on the +.\" For example, by editing the Makefile and turning on the .\" PROCESS_OPTIONS compile-time option. .Pp The extensible language uses the following format: @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ The extensible language uses the following format: daemon_list : client_list : option : option ... .Ed .Pp -The first two fields are described in the +The first two fields are described in the .Xr hosts_access 5 manual page. The remainder of the rules is a list of zero or more options. Any ":" @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ to emphasize or to ignore specific events. Grant (deny) service. These options must appear at the end of a rule. .El .Pp -The +The .Ar allow and .Ar deny @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ telnetd : ... : twist PATH=/some/other; exec in.telnetd .Ed .Pp Warning: in case of UDP services, do not twist to commands that use -the standard I/O or the +the standard I/O or the .Xr read 2 or .Xr write 2 @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ it is still connected to a server. The keepalive option is not useful for datagram (UDP) services. .It "linger number_of_seconds" Specifies how long the kernel will try to deliver not-yet delivered -data after the server process closes a connection. +data after the server process closes a connection. .El .Sh USERNAME LOOKUP .Bl -tag -width "rfc931 [ timeout_in_seconds ]" @@ -178,9 +178,9 @@ value is taken. .Sh MISCELLANEOUS .Bl -tag -width "banners /some/directory" .It "banners /some/directory" -Look for a file in +Look for a file in .Pa /some/directory -with the same name as the daemon process (for example +with the same name as the daemon process (for example .Nm telnetd for the telnet service), and copy its contents to the client. Newline characters are replaced by carriage-return newline, and %<letter> @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Warning: banners are supported for connection-oriented (TCP) network services only. .It "nice [ number ]" Change the nice value of the process (default 10). Specify a positive -value to spend more CPU resources on other processes. +value to spend more CPU resources on other processes. .It "setenv name value" Place a (name, value) pair into the process environment. The value is subjected to %<letter> expansions and may contain whitespace (but @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ and service is denied. Wietse Venema (wietse@wzv.win.tue.nl) Department of Mathematics and Computing Science Eindhoven University of Technology -Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, +Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, 5600 MB Eindhoven, The Netherlands .Ed \" @(#) hosts_options.5 1.10 94/12/28 17:42:28 diff --git a/libexec/atrun/atrun.8 b/libexec/atrun/atrun.8 index 1688b32c534..679f8ce1a2a 100644 --- a/libexec/atrun/atrun.8 +++ b/libexec/atrun/atrun.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: atrun.8,v 1.6 1999/07/04 19:25:20 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: atrun.8,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ .\" $FreeBSD: atrun.man,v 1.3 1997/02/22 14:20:55 peter Exp $ .Dd April 12, 1995 .Dt ATRUN 8 @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Directory containing job files .Xr crontab 5 , .Xr cron 8 .Sh BUGS -The functionality of +The functionality of .Nm atrun should be merged into .Xr cron 8 . diff --git a/libexec/fingerd/fingerd.8 b/libexec/fingerd/fingerd.8 index bffe7a9b042..62cc55c2b94 100644 --- a/libexec/fingerd/fingerd.8 +++ b/libexec/fingerd/fingerd.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: fingerd.8,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: fingerd.8,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:50 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)fingerd.8 8.1 (Berkeley) 6/4/93 -.\" $Id: fingerd.8,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: fingerd.8,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:50 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 4, 1993 .Dt FINGERD 8 @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ closes its connections as soon as the output is finished. .Pp If the line is null (i.e. just a .Aq Tn CRLF -is sent) then +is sent) then .Xr finger returns a .Dq default @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Use an alternate program as the local information provider. The default local program executed by .Nm fingerd -is +is .Xr finger 1 . By specifying a customized local server, this option allows a system manager diff --git a/libexec/ftpd/ftpd.8 b/libexec/ftpd/ftpd.8 index eeadf875672..a8111613f32 100644 --- a/libexec/ftpd/ftpd.8 +++ b/libexec/ftpd/ftpd.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ftpd.8,v 1.21 1999/06/14 00:16:56 millert Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ftpd.8,v 1.22 1999/07/09 13:35:50 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: ftpd.8,v 1.8 1996/01/14 20:55:23 thorpej Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1988, 1991, 1993 @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ defines in <netinet/in.h>. In .Ox they are set to 49152 and 65535 respectively. .It Fl l -Each successful and failed +Each successful and failed .Xr ftp 1 session is logged using syslog with a facility of LOG_FTP. If this option is specified twice, the retrieve (get), store (put), append, @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ If the file .Pa /etc/ftpwelcome exists, .Nm -prints it before issuing the +prints it before issuing the .Dq ready message. If the file @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ This allows users to utilize the metacharacters .Dq Li \&*?[]{}~ . .Pp .Nm Ftpd -authenticates users according to five rules. +authenticates users according to five rules. .Pp .Bl -enum -offset indent .It @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Bellcore. The login name must not appear in the file .Pa /etc/ftpusers . .It -The user must have a standard shell returned by +The user must have a standard shell returned by .Xr getusershell 3 . .It If the user name appears in the file @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ as for an or .Dq ftp account (see next item). However, the user must still supply a password. -This feature is intended as a compromise between a fully anonymous account +This feature is intended as a compromise between a fully anonymous account and a fully privileged account. The account should also be set up as for an anonymous account. .It @@ -300,10 +300,10 @@ to log in by specifying any password (by convention an email address for the user should be used as the password). .El .Pp -In the last case, +In the last case, .Nm ftpd takes special measures to restrict the client's access privileges. -The server performs a +The server performs a .Xr chroot 2 to the home directory of the .Dq ftp @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ The files pwd.db (see .Xr pwd_mkdb 8 ) and .Xr group 5 -must be present for the +must be present for the .Xr ls command to be able to produce owner names rather than numbers. The password field in diff --git a/libexec/getNAME/getNAME.8 b/libexec/getNAME/getNAME.8 index 99a7eff040d..89769611b64 100644 --- a/libexec/getNAME/getNAME.8 +++ b/libexec/getNAME/getNAME.8 @@ -39,9 +39,9 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm -program looks inside manual sources to retrieve the NAME section of -the manual page. It can be used to create a table of contents, report -the style of manual, or to create an introduction to the manual section. +program looks inside manual sources to retrieve the NAME section of +the manual page. It can be used to create a table of contents, report +the style of manual, or to create an introduction to the manual section. By default, .Nm returns data for use in an diff --git a/libexec/getty/getty.8 b/libexec/getty/getty.8 index 0af7b99acdf..bda3f8f3fa5 100644 --- a/libexec/getty/getty.8 +++ b/libexec/getty/getty.8 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)getty.8 8.1 (Berkeley) 6/4/93 -.\" $Id: getty.8,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:04 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: getty.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:50 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 4, 1993 .Dt GETTY 8 @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ .Nd set terminal mode .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm getty -.Oo +.Oo .Ar type .Op Ar tty .Oc diff --git a/libexec/getty/ttys.5 b/libexec/getty/ttys.5 index c8862660166..77c73dc771f 100644 --- a/libexec/getty/ttys.5 +++ b/libexec/getty/ttys.5 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)ttys.5 8.1 (Berkeley) 6/4/93 -.\" $Id: ttys.5,v 1.3 1997/09/20 07:04:02 millert Exp $ +.\" $Id: ttys.5,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:50 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 4, 1993 .Dt TTYS 5 @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ and control the use of terminal special files. This information is read with the .Xr getttyent 3 library routines. -There is one line in the +There is one line in the .Nm ttys file per special device file. Fields are separated by tabs and/or spaces. diff --git a/libexec/identd/identd.8 b/libexec/identd/identd.8 index 595f7afa224..a480f95cf98 100644 --- a/libexec/identd/identd.8 +++ b/libexec/identd/identd.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: identd.8,v 1.12 1999/06/11 16:56:21 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: identd.8,v 1.13 1999/07/09 13:35:50 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -67,12 +67,12 @@ connections and returning the user name of the process owning the connection. .Sh OPTIONS .Bl -tag -width Ds -.It Fl i -Tells +.It Fl i +Tells .Nm identd -to run as a process started from +to run as a process started from .Xr inetd 8 -with the "nowait" option in the +with the "nowait" option in the .Pa /etc/inetd.conf file. Use of this mode will make .Xr inetd 8 @@ -80,17 +80,17 @@ start one .Nm daemon for each connection request. This is the default mode of operation. .It Fl w -Tells +Tells .Nm identd -to run as a process started from +to run as a process started from .Xr inetd 8 -with the "wait" option in the +with the "wait" option in the .Pa /etc/inetd.conf file. This mode of operation will start a copy of .Nm at the first connection request and then .Nm -will handle subsequent requests. +will handle subsequent requests. Previous versions listed this as the preferred mode of operation due to the initial overhead of parsing the kernel nlist. This version does not use kmem or nlist parsing, so this reasoning @@ -119,24 +119,24 @@ switch to after binding itself to the .Tn TCP/IP port if running as a stand alone daemon .It Fl p Ar port -Specify an alternative port number or service name -on which to listen when running as a stand alone daemon +Specify an alternative port number or service name +on which to listen when running as a stand alone daemon Default is "auth" (113). .It Fl a Ar address -Specify a local IP address in dotted quad format -to bind the listen socket to if +Specify a local IP address in dotted quad format +to bind the listen socket to if running as a standalone daemon. by default the daemon listens on all local IP addresses. .It Fl V Print the version number and the exit. .It Fl l -Use +Use .Xr syslogd 8 for logging purposes. .It Fl v -Log every request to syslog if +Log every request to syslog if .Fl l -above is specified. +above is specified. .It Fl o Do not reveal operating system type; always return @@ -159,11 +159,11 @@ in upper case characters. .It Fl n Always return uid numbers instead of usernames. .It Fl N -When replying with a user name or ID, first +When replying with a user name or ID, first check for a file .Pa .noident -in the user's home directory. If this file is accessible, return -.Dq HIDDEN-USER +in the user's home directory. If this file is accessible, return +.Dq HIDDEN-USER instead of the normal USERID response. .It Fl m Allow multiple requests to be @@ -181,14 +181,14 @@ that should not be available to outsiders. .Xr inetd.conf 5 .Sh NOTES .Nm -uses the +uses the .Li LOG_DAEMON .Xr syslogd 8 facility to log messages. .Pp -Unlike previous versions of +Unlike previous versions of .Nm identd, -this version uses +this version uses .Xr sysctl 3 to obtain information from the kernel instead of parsing kmem. This version does not require privilege beyond what is needed to bind @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ the listen port if running as a standalone daemon. .Sh BUGS Since .Nm identd -should typically not be run as a privileged user or group, +should typically not be run as a privileged user or group, .Pa .noident files for use when running with the .Fl N diff --git a/libexec/mail.local/mail.local.8 b/libexec/mail.local/mail.local.8 index 568edf5d25d..38063929248 100644 --- a/libexec/mail.local/mail.local.8 +++ b/libexec/mail.local/mail.local.8 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)mail.local.8 6.8 (Berkeley) 4/27/91 -.\" $Id: mail.local.8,v 1.16 1999/07/04 19:25:20 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: mail.local.8,v 1.17 1999/07/09 13:35:50 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd April 27, 1991 .Dt MAIL.LOCAL 8 @@ -60,12 +60,12 @@ The options are as follows: Specify the sender's name. .It Fl l For compatibility, request that -files named +files named .Nm username.lock be used for locking. (This is the default behavior.) .It Fl L Don't create a -.Nm username.lock +.Nm username.lock file while locking the spool. .El .Pp @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ The mailbox is always locked using .Xr flock 2 while mail is appended. Unless the .Fl L -flag is specified, a +flag is specified, a .Nm username.lock file is also used. .Pp diff --git a/libexec/rexecd/rexecd.8 b/libexec/rexecd/rexecd.8 index effd74fddb0..90665cfc4e0 100644 --- a/libexec/rexecd/rexecd.8 +++ b/libexec/rexecd/rexecd.8 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)rexecd.8 6.5 (Berkeley) 3/16/91 -.\" $Id: rexecd.8,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: rexecd.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 16, 1991 .Dt REXECD 8 @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ .Nm rexecd .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Rexecd -is the server for the +is the server for the .Xr rexec 3 routine. The server provides remote execution facilities with authentication based on user names and @@ -63,10 +63,10 @@ byte. The resultant string is interpreted as an .Tn ASCII number, base 10. -.It +.It If the number received in step 1 is non-zero, it is interpreted as the port number of a secondary -stream to be used for the +stream to be used for the .Em stderr . A second connection is then created to the specified port on the client's machine. @@ -75,12 +75,12 @@ A NUL terminated user name of at most 16 characters is retrieved on the initial socket. .It A NUL terminated, unencrypted password of at most -16 characters is retrieved on the initial socket. +16 characters is retrieved on the initial socket. .It A NUL terminated command to be passed to a shell is retrieved on the initial socket. The length of the command is limited by the upper bound on the size of -the system's argument list. +the system's argument list. .It .Nm Rexecd then validates the user as is done at login time @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ list (as configured into the system). No password file entry for the user name existed or the wrong password was supplied. .It Sy \&No remote directory. -The +The .Xr chdir command to the home directory failed. .It Sy Try again. diff --git a/libexec/rlogind/rlogind.8 b/libexec/rlogind/rlogind.8 index 93ba5062c88..085a6b89d28 100644 --- a/libexec/rlogind/rlogind.8 +++ b/libexec/rlogind/rlogind.8 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)rlogind.8 8.1 (Berkeley) 6/4/93 -.\" $Id: rlogind.8,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: rlogind.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:53 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 4, 1993 .Dt RLOGIND 8 @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ .Op Fl aln .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Rlogind -is the server for the +is the server for the .Xr rlogin 1 program. The server provides a remote login facility with authentication based on privileged port numbers from trusted hosts. @@ -92,14 +92,14 @@ verifying that the name and address correspond. Normal authentication is bypassed if the address verification fails. .El .Pp -Once the source port and address have been checked, +Once the source port and address have been checked, .Nm rlogind proceeds with the authentication process described in .Xr rshd 8 . -It then allocates a pseudo terminal (see +It then allocates a pseudo terminal (see .Xr pty 4 ) , and manipulates file descriptors so that the slave -half of the pseudo terminal becomes the +half of the pseudo terminal becomes the .Em stdin , .Em stdout , and diff --git a/libexec/rpc.rquotad/rpc.rquotad.8 b/libexec/rpc.rquotad/rpc.rquotad.8 index 32fdb43f052..e8956984c34 100644 --- a/libexec/rpc.rquotad/rpc.rquotad.8 +++ b/libexec/rpc.rquotad/rpc.rquotad.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.rquotad.8,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:12 aaron Exp $ -.\" +.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.rquotad.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ +.\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Theo de Raadt .\" All rights reserved. .\" @@ -28,15 +28,15 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: rpc.rquotad.8,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: rpc.rquotad.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 22, 1994 .Dt RPC.RQUOTAD 8 .Os .Sh NAME .Nm rquotad , -.Nm rpc.rquotad -.Nd remote quota server +.Nm rpc.rquotad +.Nd remote quota server .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm rpc.rquotad .Sh DESCRIPTION @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ is a .Xr rpc 3 server which returns quotas for a user of a local filesystem -which is NFS-mounted onto a remote machine. +which is NFS-mounted onto a remote machine. .Xr quota 1 uses the results to display user quotas for remote filesystems. .Nm rpc.rquotad diff --git a/libexec/rpc.rstatd/rpc.rstatd.8 b/libexec/rpc.rstatd/rpc.rstatd.8 index 55759100ada..1088cd5b8c6 100644 --- a/libexec/rpc.rstatd/rpc.rstatd.8 +++ b/libexec/rpc.rstatd/rpc.rstatd.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.rstatd.8,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.rstatd.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -31,21 +31,21 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: rpc.rstatd.8,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: rpc.rstatd.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 7, 1993 .Dt RPC.RSTATD 8 .Os .Sh NAME .Nm rstatd , -.Nm rpc.rstatd +.Nm rpc.rstatd .Nd kernel statistics server .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm rpc.rstatd .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm rpc.rstatd is a server which returns performance statistics obtained from the kernel. -These statistics are usually read using the +These statistics are usually read using the .Xr rup 1 command. They are also used by the .Xr rpc.lockd 8 @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ daemon is normally invoked by .Xr inetd 8 . .Pp .Nm rpc.rstatd -uses an RPC protocol defined in +uses an RPC protocol defined in .Pa /usr/include/rpcsvc/rstat.x . .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr rup 1 , diff --git a/libexec/rpc.rusersd/rpc.rusersd.8 b/libexec/rpc.rusersd/rpc.rusersd.8 index 95af7ba5de8..20231fcdb28 100644 --- a/libexec/rpc.rusersd/rpc.rusersd.8 +++ b/libexec/rpc.rusersd/rpc.rusersd.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.rusersd.8,v 1.3 1999/05/23 14:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.rusersd.8,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -31,14 +31,14 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: rpc.rusersd.8,v 1.3 1999/05/23 14:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: rpc.rusersd.8,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 7, 1993 .Dt RPC.RUSERSD 8 .Os .Sh NAME .Nm rusersd , -.Nm rpc.rusersd +.Nm rpc.rusersd .Nd logged in users server .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm rpc.rusersd @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ daemon is normally invoked by .Xr inetd 8 . .Pp .Nm rpc.rusersd -uses an RPC protocol defined in +uses an RPC protocol defined in .Pa /usr/include/rpcsvc/rnusers.x . .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr rusers 1 , diff --git a/libexec/rpc.rwalld/rpc.rwalld.8 b/libexec/rpc.rwalld/rpc.rwalld.8 index 4a81a82fe70..88742e1a0b9 100644 --- a/libexec/rpc.rwalld/rpc.rwalld.8 +++ b/libexec/rpc.rwalld/rpc.rwalld.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.rwalld.8,v 1.3 1999/05/23 14:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.rwalld.8,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -31,14 +31,14 @@ .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: rpc.rwalld.8,v 1.3 1999/05/23 14:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: rpc.rwalld.8,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 7, 1993 .Dt RPC.RWALLD 8 .Os .Sh NAME .Nm rwalld , -.Nm rpc.rwalld +.Nm rpc.rwalld .Nd write messages to users currently logged in server .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm rpc.rwalld @@ -46,21 +46,21 @@ .Nm rpc.rwalld is a server which will send a message to users currently logged in to the system. This server -invokes the +invokes the .Xr wall 1 command to actually write the messages to the system. .Pp -Messages are sent to this server by the +Messages are sent to this server by the .Xr rwall 1 command. The .Nm rpc.rwalld -daemon is normally invoked by +daemon is normally invoked by .Xr inetd 8 . .Pp .Nm rpc.rwalld -uses an RPC protocol defined in +uses an RPC protocol defined in .Pa /usr/include/rpcsvc/rwall.x . .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr rwall 1 , diff --git a/libexec/rpc.sprayd/rpc.sprayd.8 b/libexec/rpc.sprayd/rpc.sprayd.8 index d9c0c3cbb6a..9c63d4d0556 100644 --- a/libexec/rpc.sprayd/rpc.sprayd.8 +++ b/libexec/rpc.sprayd/rpc.sprayd.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.sprayd.8,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:12 aaron Exp $ -.\" +.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.sprayd.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:52 aaron Exp $ +.\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Christos Zoulas .\" All rights reserved. .\" @@ -28,14 +28,14 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: rpc.sprayd.8,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: rpc.sprayd.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:52 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 22, 1994 .Dt RPC.SPRAYD 8 .Os .Sh NAME .Nm sprayd , -.Nm rpc.sprayd +.Nm rpc.sprayd .Nd spray server .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm rpc.sprayd @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ daemon is normally invoked by .Xr inetd 8 . .Pp .Nm rpc.sprayd -uses an RPC protocol defined in +uses an RPC protocol defined in .Pa /usr/include/rpcsvc/spray.x . .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr spray 8 diff --git a/libexec/rpc.yppasswdd/rpc.yppasswdd.8 b/libexec/rpc.yppasswdd/rpc.yppasswdd.8 index 33fa8888d06..0aeda48b8ea 100644 --- a/libexec/rpc.yppasswdd/rpc.yppasswdd.8 +++ b/libexec/rpc.yppasswdd/rpc.yppasswdd.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.yppasswdd.8,v 1.9 1999/05/16 19:56:08 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.yppasswdd.8,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:52 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Mats O Jansson <moj@stacken.kth.se> .\" All rights reserved. @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ .Op Fl noshell .Op Fl nogecos .Op Fl nopw -.Op Fl m Ar arg1 arg2 ... +.Op Fl m Ar arg1 arg2 ... .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm rpc.yppasswdd must be running on the YP master server to allow users to change information @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Don't allow changes of the gecos field in the passwd file. .It Fl nopw Don't allow changes of the password in the passwd file. .It Fl m Ar arg1 arg2 ... -Don't use +Don't use .Ar /var/yp/securenet . Use another file with another file format. For futher information see man page for @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ man page for .It Pa /etc/master.passwd .El .Sh SEE ALSO -.Xr ypbind 1 , +.Xr ypbind 1 , .Xr securenet 5 , .Xr ypserv.acl 5 , .Xr yp 8 diff --git a/libexec/rshd/rshd.8 b/libexec/rshd/rshd.8 index 8978b90af28..08463df2c16 100644 --- a/libexec/rshd/rshd.8 +++ b/libexec/rshd/rshd.8 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)rshd.8 8.1 (Berkeley) 6/4/93 -.\" $Id: rshd.8,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: rshd.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:52 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 4, 1993 .Dt RSHD 8 @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ The .Nm rshd server -is the server for the +is the server for the .Xr rcmd 3 routine and, consequently, for the .Xr rsh 1 @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ number, base 10. .It If the number received in step 2 is non-zero, it is interpreted as the port number of a secondary -stream to be used for the +stream to be used for the .Em stderr . A second connection is then created to the specified port on the client's machine. The source port of this @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ machine. A null terminated command to be passed to a shell is retrieved on the initial socket. The length of the command is limited by the upper bound on the size of -the system's argument list. +the system's argument list. .It .Nm Rshd then validates the user using @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ option prevents from doing any validation based on the user's ``.rhosts'' file, unless the user is the superuser. .It -If the file +If the file .Pa /etc/nologin exists and the user is not the superuser, the connection is closed. @@ -189,17 +189,17 @@ longer than 16 characters. The command line passed exceeds the size of the argument list (as configured into the system). .It Sy Remote directory. -The +The .Xr chdir command to the home directory failed. .It Sy Permission denied. The authentication procedure described above failed or there is no password file entry for the specified user. .It Sy Can't make pipe. -The pipe needed for the +The pipe needed for the .Em stderr , wasn't created. -.It Sy Can't fork; try again. +.It Sy Can't fork; try again. A .Xr fork by the server failed. diff --git a/libexec/smtpd/smtpfwdd/smtpfwdd.8 b/libexec/smtpd/smtpfwdd/smtpfwdd.8 index d72b9c6d907..d31205e5f46 100644 --- a/libexec/smtpd/smtpfwdd/smtpfwdd.8 +++ b/libexec/smtpd/smtpfwdd/smtpfwdd.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $Id: smtpfwdd.8,v 1.10 1999/07/02 20:11:49 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: smtpfwdd.8,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:52 aaron Exp $ .Dd December 10, 1997 .Dt SMTPFWDD 8 .Os @@ -20,13 +20,13 @@ The .Nm smtpfwdd daemon forwards mail messages from a spool directory to their eventual destinations. It regularly scans the spool directory in -which its symboitic companion program +which its symboitic companion program .Xr smtpd 8 stores messages and invokes -a mail program (such as +a mail program (such as .Xr sendmail 8 ) to forward them. It is the forward -portion of an SMTP store and foward proxy. +portion of an SMTP store and foward proxy. .Nm smtpfwdd is a standalone daemon, usually invoked at system startup. .Sh OPTIONS @@ -39,11 +39,11 @@ This should be the same directory in which is spooling files (usually .Pa /var/spool/smtpd ) .It Fl g -Specify a +Specify a .Ar group to run as. Same as user above. .It Fl M -Specifies +Specifies .Ar maxchildren as the maximum number of children .Nm smtpfwdd @@ -62,16 +62,16 @@ to be quieter. By default smtpfwdd emits very verbose syslog messages. With this option it will emit one line of log for each normal message exchange. .It Fl s Specify a different mail program to use to forward -mail. The default is +mail. The default is .Pa /usr/sbin/sendmail Any replacement must be able to be invoked in the same manner as sendmail with a -f fromaddress, followed by one or more destination addresses on the command line. .It Fl u -Specify a +Specify a .Ar user to run as. This user must not be root but -should normally be a user that is able to run +should normally be a user that is able to run .Xr sendmail 8 and use the .Fl f @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ option to specify the sender of a mail message. .Xr sendmail 8 , .Xr smtpd 8 .Sh BUGS -Since +Since .Xr sendmail 8 is not normally running as a daemon when using .Xr smtpd 8 diff --git a/libexec/tcpd/safe_finger/safe_finger.8 b/libexec/tcpd/safe_finger/safe_finger.8 index 2af730431dd..e2d0cb2b443 100644 --- a/libexec/tcpd/safe_finger/safe_finger.8 +++ b/libexec/tcpd/safe_finger/safe_finger.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: safe_finger.8,v 1.4 1998/12/20 23:14:55 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: safe_finger.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:52 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -54,6 +54,6 @@ rulesets. It accepts exactly the same arguments as Wietse Venema (wietse@wzv.win.tue.nl), Department of Mathematics and Computing Science, Eindhoven University of Technology -Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, +Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, 5600 MB Eindhoven, The Netherlands .Ed diff --git a/libexec/tcpd/tcpd/tcpd.8 b/libexec/tcpd/tcpd/tcpd.8 index d26861bf7f6..016b8b719e1 100644 --- a/libexec/tcpd/tcpd/tcpd.8 +++ b/libexec/tcpd/tcpd/tcpd.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: tcpd.8,v 1.4 1999/04/02 16:21:36 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: tcpd.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:52 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -37,12 +37,12 @@ .Nm tcpd .Nd access control facility for internet services .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm tcpd program can be set up to monitor incoming requests for .Xr telnet 1 , .Xr finger 1 , -.Xr ftp 1 , +.Xr ftp 1 , .Xr rexecd 8 , .Xr rsh 1 , .Xr rlogin 1 , @@ -59,9 +59,9 @@ and other services that have a one-to-one mapping onto executable files. .\" .Pp Operation is as follows: whenever a request for service arrives, the .Xr inetd 8 -daemon is tricked into running the +daemon is tricked into running the .Nm tcpd -program instead of the desired server. +program instead of the desired server. .Nm tcpd logs the request and does some additional checks. When all is well, .Nm tcpd @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ that pretend to have someone elses network address. .Sh LOGGING Connections that are monitored by .Nm tcpd -are reported through the +are reported through the .Xr syslog 3 facility. Each record contains a time stamp, the client host name and the name of the requested service. The information can be useful to detect @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ of shell commands when a pattern fires. For details, see the .Xr hosts_access 5 manual page. .Sh HOST NAME VERIFICATION -The authentication scheme of some protocols +The authentication scheme of some protocols .Pf ( Xr rlogin 1 , .Xr rsh 1 ) relies @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ elses host name. .\" If the sources are compiled with -DPARANOID, .\" .Nm tcpd .\" will drop the connection in case of a host name/address mismatch. -.\" Otherwise, the hostname can be matched with the +.\" Otherwise, the hostname can be matched with the .\" .Ar PARANOID .\" wildcard, .\" after which suitable action can be taken. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ to have an address that belongs to someone elses network. UDP services do not benefit from this protection. This feature must be turned on at compile time. .Sh RFC 931 -When RFC 931 etc. lookups are enabled (compile-time option) +When RFC 931 etc. lookups are enabled (compile-time option) .Nm tcpd will attempt to establish the name of the client user. This will succeed only if the client host runs an RFC 931-compliant daemon. @@ -133,16 +133,16 @@ Client user name lookups will not work for datagram-oriented connections, and may cause noticeable delays in the case of connections from PCs. .\" .Sh EXAMPLES -.\" The details of using +.\" The details of using .\" .Nm tcpd .\" depend on pathname information that was compiled into the program. .\" .Sh EXAMPLE 1 -.\" This example applies when +.\" This example applies when .\" .Nm tcpd .\" expects that the original network .\" daemons will be moved to an "other" place. .\" .Pp -.\" In order to monitor access to the +.\" In order to monitor access to the .\" .Xr finger 1 .\" service, move the .\" original finger daemon to the "other" place and install tcpd in the @@ -159,15 +159,15 @@ from PCs. .\" no `in.\' prefix to their name. .\" .Sh EXAMPLE 2 .Sh EXAMPLE -This example applies when +This example applies when .Nm tcpd expects that the network daemons are left in their original place, as it is configured within .Nm OpenBSD . .Pp -In order to monitor access to the +In order to monitor access to the .Xr finger 1 -service, perform the following edits on the +service, perform the following edits on the .Xr inetd 8 configuration file, .Pa /etc/inetd.conf : .Pp @@ -187,16 +187,16 @@ finger stream tcp nowait nobody /usr/libexec/tcpd fingerd .\" field in the inetd configuration file. .Pp Similar changes will be needed for the other services that are to be -covered by +covered by .Nm tcpd . -Send a `kill -HUP\' to the +Send a `kill -HUP\' to the .Xr inetd 8 process to make the changes effective. .\" AIX users may also have to execute the `inetimp\' command. .\" .Sh EXAMPLE 3 .Pp In the case of daemons that do not live in a common directory ("secret" -or otherwise), edit the +or otherwise), edit the .Xr inetd 8 configuration file so that it specifies an absolute path name for the process name field. For example: @@ -205,40 +205,40 @@ name field. For example: ntalk dgram udp wait root /usr/libexec/tcpd /usr/local/lib/ntalkd .Ed .Pp -Only the last component +Only the last component .Pf ( Nm ntalkd ) of the pathname will be used for access control and logging. .Sh BUGS Some UDP (and RPC) daemons linger around for a while after they have finished their work, in case another request comes in. In the inetd -configuration file these services are registered with the +configuration file these services are registered with the .Ar wait option. Only the request that started such a daemon will be logged. .Pp .\" The program does not work with RPC services over TCP. These services -.\" are registered as +.\" are registered as .\" .Ar rpc/tcp .\" in the inetd configuration file. The .\" only non-trivial service that is affected by this limitation is .\" .Xr rexd 8 , -.\" which is used by the +.\" which is used by the .\" .Xr on 1 .\" command. This is no great -.\" loss. On most systems, +.\" loss. On most systems, .\" .Xr rexd 8 .\" is less secure than a wildcard in .\" .Pa /etc/hosts.equiv . .\" .Pp -RPC broadcast requests (for example: +RPC broadcast requests (for example: .Xr rwall 1 , .Xr rup 1 , .Xr rusers 1 ) always appear to come from the responding host. What happens is that the -client broadcasts the request to all +client broadcasts the request to all .Xr portmap 8 daemons on its -network; each +network; each .Xr portmap 8 daemon forwards the request to a local daemon. As far as the .Xr rwall 8 @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Access control table (deny list) Wietse Venema (wietse@wzv.win.tue.nl), Department of Mathematics and Computing Science, Eindhoven University of Technology -Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, +Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, 5600 MB Eindhoven, The Netherlands .Ed \" @(#) tcpd.8 1.5 96/02/21 16:39:16 diff --git a/libexec/tcpd/tcpdchk/tcpdchk.8 b/libexec/tcpd/tcpdchk/tcpdchk.8 index 61ea6caed3c..d0f5de18ad8 100644 --- a/libexec/tcpd/tcpdchk/tcpdchk.8 +++ b/libexec/tcpd/tcpdchk/tcpdchk.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: tcpdchk.8,v 1.5 1999/05/28 23:00:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: tcpdchk.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:52 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -52,13 +52,13 @@ access control files (by default, these are and .Pa /etc/hosts.deny ) , and compares the -entries in these files against entries in the +entries in these files against entries in the .Xr inetd 8 network configuration file. .Pp .Nm tcpdchk reports problems such as non-existent pathnames; services -that appear in +that appear in .Xr tcpd 8 access control rules, but are not controlled by .Xr tcpd 8 ; @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ inappropriate use of wildcard patterns; inappropriate use of NIS netgroups or references to non-existent NIS netgroups; references to non-existent options; invalid arguments to options; and so on. .Pp -Where possible, +Where possible, .Nm tcpdchk provides a helpful suggestion to fix the problem. .Sh OPTIONS @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ ALLOW keyword. .\" This applies only when the extended access control .\" language is enabled (build with -DPROCESS_OPTIONS). .It Fl d -Examine +Examine .Pa hosts.allow and .Pa hosts.deny @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ access control table (deny list) Wietse Venema (wietse@wzv.win.tue.nl), Department of Mathematics and Computing Science, Eindhoven University of Technology -Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, +Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, 5600 MB Eindhoven, The Netherlands .Ed \" @(#) tcpdchk.8 1.3 95/01/08 17:00:30 diff --git a/libexec/tcpd/tcpdmatch/tcpdmatch.8 b/libexec/tcpd/tcpdmatch/tcpdmatch.8 index b58e0e42bbd..e8acc971ee8 100644 --- a/libexec/tcpd/tcpdmatch/tcpdmatch.8 +++ b/libexec/tcpd/tcpdmatch/tcpdmatch.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: tcpdmatch.8,v 1.4 1999/04/02 16:21:36 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: tcpdmatch.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:52 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ tcpdmatch \- tcp wrapper oracle predicts how the tcp wrapper would handle a specific request for service. Examples are given below. .Pp -The program examines the +The program examines the .Xr tcpd 8 access control tables (default .Pa /etc/hosts.allow @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Access control table (deny list) Wietse Venema (wietse@wzv.win.tue.nl), Department of Mathematics and Computing Science, Eindhoven University of Technology -Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, +Den Dolech 2, P.O. Box 513, 5600 MB Eindhoven, The Netherlands .Ed \" @(#) tcpdmatch.8 1.5 96/02/11 17:01:35 diff --git a/libexec/telnetd/telnetd.8 b/libexec/telnetd/telnetd.8 index 7dbbd92abb2..077605172d7 100644 --- a/libexec/telnetd/telnetd.8 +++ b/libexec/telnetd/telnetd.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: telnetd.8,v 1.10 1999/05/28 23:00:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: telnetd.8,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: telnetd.8,v 1.8 1996/03/20 04:25:55 tls Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1993 @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ option may be used to start up .Nm manually, instead of through .Xr inetd 8 . -If started up this way, +If started up this way, .Ar port may be specified to run .Nm @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ to print out debugging information to the connection, allowing the user to see what .Nm is doing. -There are several possible values for +There are several possible values for .Ar debugmode: .Bl -tag -width exercise .It Cm options @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Prints information about the negotiation of .Tn TELNET options. .It Cm report -Prints the +Prints the .Cm options information, plus some additional information about what processing is going on. @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ a specific authentication type without having to recompile operates by allocating a pseudo-terminal device (see .Xr pty 4 ) for a client, then creating a login process which has -the slave side of the pseudo-terminal as +the slave side of the pseudo-terminal as .Dv stdin , .Dv stdout and @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ between the remote client and the login process. .Pp When a .Tn TELNET -session is started up, +session is started up, .Nm sends .Tn TELNET diff --git a/libexec/tftpd/tftpd.8 b/libexec/tftpd/tftpd.8 index c2f52f4a12c..bba64416513 100644 --- a/libexec/tftpd/tftpd.8 +++ b/libexec/tftpd/tftpd.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: tftpd.8,v 1.6 1999/05/15 00:56:07 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: tftpd.8,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)tftpd.8 6.7 (Berkeley) 5/13/91 -.\" $OpenBSD: tftpd.8,v 1.6 1999/05/15 00:56:07 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: tftpd.8,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:51 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 11, 1997 .Dt TFTPD 8 @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ The server is normally started by The use of .Xr tftp 1 does not require an account or password on the remote system. -Due to the lack of authentication information, +Due to the lack of authentication information, .Nm will allow only publicly readable files to be accessed. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ names are prefixed by the one of the given directories. .Pp If the .Fl c -flag is used, +flag is used, .Nm will allow new files to be created; otherwise uploaded files must already exist. Files are created with default permissions allowing anyone to read diff --git a/sbin/ipnat/ipnat.4 b/sbin/ipnat/ipnat.4 index ec07db03f0b..25e4f6b8ab6 100644 --- a/sbin/ipnat/ipnat.4 +++ b/sbin/ipnat/ipnat.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ipnat.4,v 1.14 1999/07/07 10:50:11 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ipnat.4,v 1.15 1999/07/09 13:35:49 aaron Exp $ .Dd June 5, 1999 .Dt IPNAT 4 .Os @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ typedef struct ipnat { .Ed .Pp Where recognised values for -.Fa in_redir +.Fa in_redir are: .Bd -literal -offset indent #define NAT_MAP 0x01 @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ are: #define NAT_BIMAP (NAT_MAP|NAT_REDIRECT) .Ed .Pp -The structure +The structure .Fa natstat is defined as: .Bd -literal -offset indent diff --git a/sbin/ipnat/ipnat.5 b/sbin/ipnat/ipnat.5 index 6422ee71916..ba7a209311c 100644 --- a/sbin/ipnat/ipnat.5 +++ b/sbin/ipnat/ipnat.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ipnat.5,v 1.9 1999/07/07 10:50:11 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ipnat.5,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:49 aaron Exp $ .Dd June 5, 1999 .Dt IPNAT 5 .Os @@ -39,16 +39,16 @@ ifname ::= <interface name> .Ed .Pp Elements in a rule are usually separated by whitespace (blanks or tabs). -In the case of the +In the case of the .Ql \&/ in .Fa host -rule or the +rule or the .Ql \&: in the .Fa portrange rule, there must be no whitespace before or after it. In the case -of the +of the .Ql \&/ in the .Fa proxy @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ rule there must be whitespace before but no whitespace after. .Pp In the .Fa host -and +and .Fa mask rules, the alternatives are evaluated in the order given. .Pp @@ -66,11 +66,11 @@ rule, if the element begins with a non-digit the mask is taken to be all zeros. A .Ql \&. in the element causes the element to be interpreted as a numeric IP -address of the form 1.2.3.4. An +address of the form 1.2.3.4. An .Ql x in the element causes the element to be interpreted as a 32 bit hex value. If all else fails the element is interpreted as the number of sequential 1's to place -as the most significant bits in the 32 bit network mask. +as the most significant bits in the 32 bit network mask. Whatever the interpretation method, a result network mask of all 1's, indicating a hostname, is valid. A network mask of 31 1's (255.255.255.254) is considered invalid as there is no space for allocating host diff --git a/sbin/ipnat/ipnat.8 b/sbin/ipnat/ipnat.8 index 4765b535af3..618f79eebc6 100644 --- a/sbin/ipnat/ipnat.8 +++ b/sbin/ipnat/ipnat.8 @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ map ppp0 10.0.0.0/8 -> 209.1.2.0/24 That will cut the number down from ~16,000,000 addresses short to only 527,566. .Pp .Em bimap -is used to create static, bidirectional NAT mappings. Standard +is used to create static, bidirectional NAT mappings. Standard .Em map rules only create NAT mappings when the connection is initiated from the internal IP address. For example, using the following rule: diff --git a/sbin/ipsecadm/ipsecadm.8 b/sbin/ipsecadm/ipsecadm.8 index ac606e87e81..2c4f869032c 100644 --- a/sbin/ipsecadm/ipsecadm.8 +++ b/sbin/ipsecadm/ipsecadm.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ipsecadm.8,v 1.10 1999/07/08 01:09:24 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ipsecadm.8,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:49 aaron Exp $ .\" Copyright 1997 Niels Provos <provos@physnet.uni-hamburg.de> .\" All rights reserved. .\" @@ -40,11 +40,11 @@ .Op command .Ar modifiers ... .Sh NOTE -Before +Before .Xr ipsecadm 8 can be used, IPSec must be enabled by setting one or more of the following .Xr sysctl 3 -variables: +variables: .Bl -tag -width xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx .It net.inet.esp.enable Enable the ESP IPSec protocol @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Enable the ESP IPSec protocol Enable the AH IPSec protocol .El .Pp -To enable these operations across reboots, see +To enable these operations across reboots, see .Pa /etc/sysctl.conf . .Pp .Sh DESCRIPTION diff --git a/sbin/isakmpd/isakmpd.conf.5 b/sbin/isakmpd/isakmpd.conf.5 index 84cb2e41a0f..8ce40029b2b 100644 --- a/sbin/isakmpd/isakmpd.conf.5 +++ b/sbin/isakmpd/isakmpd.conf.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isakmpd.conf.5,v 1.20 1999/07/07 22:07:00 niklas Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isakmpd.conf.5,v 1.21 1999/07/09 13:35:49 aaron Exp $ .\" $EOM: isakmpd.conf.5,v 1.26 1999/07/07 19:17:31 niklas Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Niklas Hallqvist. All rights reserved. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Authentication data for this specific peer. In the case of preshared key, this is the key value itself. .It Em Flags A comma-separated list of flags controlling the further -handling of the ISAKMP SA. Currently there are no specific +handling of the ISAKMP SA. Currently there are no specific ISAKMP SA flags defined. .It Em Next-hop A Linux FreeS/WAN specific value which should be the IP address of the diff --git a/sbin/mount_null/mount_null.8 b/sbin/mount_null/mount_null.8 index af3a5a4ac6f..59d0d17f6fd 100644 --- a/sbin/mount_null/mount_null.8 +++ b/sbin/mount_null/mount_null.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: mount_null.8,v 1.10 1999/07/04 18:59:40 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: mount_null.8,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:49 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: mount_null.8,v 1.4 1996/04/10 20:57:19 thorpej Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993, 1994 @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ are created as a result of vnode operations on this or other null vnode stacks. .Pp New vnode stacks come into existence as a result of -an operation which returns a vnode. +an operation which returns a vnode. The bypass routine stacks a null-node above the new vnode before returning it to the caller. .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man3/end.3 b/share/man/man3/end.3 index 9edfd92b3b2..2c56714e6b7 100644 --- a/share/man/man3/end.3 +++ b/share/man/man3/end.3 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: end.3,v 1.5 1998/11/29 15:47:22 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: end.3,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:37 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: end.3,v 1.5 1996/03/01 00:17:49 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1986 @@ -50,9 +50,9 @@ The global variables and .Va edata correspond to -the next address following +the next address following the end of the text segment, -the end of initialized data segment and +the end of initialized data segment and the end of the data segment .Pq Tn BSS . .Sh SEE ALSO diff --git a/share/man/man3/stdarg.3 b/share/man/man3/stdarg.3 index 6b971897e07..630627bfb88 100644 --- a/share/man/man3/stdarg.3 +++ b/share/man/man3/stdarg.3 @@ -100,11 +100,11 @@ macro expands to an expression that has the type and value of the next argument in the call. The parameter .Fa ap -is the +is the .Em va_list Fa ap initialized by .Fn va_start . -Each call to +Each call to .Fn va_arg modifies .Fa ap @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ so that the next call returns the next argument. The parameter .Fa type is a type name specified so that the type of a pointer to an -object that has the specified type can be obtained simply by +object that has the specified type can be obtained simply by adding a .Dq \&* to @@ -126,9 +126,9 @@ random errors will occur. .Pp The first use of the .Fn va_arg -macro after that of the +macro after that of the .Fn va_start -macro returns the argument after +macro returns the argument after .Fa last . Successive invocations return the values of the remaining arguments. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ arguments. The .Fn va_end macro handles a normal return from the function whose variable argument -list was initialized by +list was initialized by .Fn va_start . .Pp The @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ These macros are .Em not compatible with the historic macros they replace. A backward compatible version can be found in the include -file +file .Aq Pa varargs.h . .Sh BUGS Unlike the diff --git a/share/man/man4/acd.4 b/share/man/man4/acd.4 index 36b658fa057..a40bbad3869 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/acd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/acd.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: acd.4,v 1.4 1999/06/05 13:18:31 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: acd.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ .Cd "acd* at atapibus? drive?" .Sh DESCRIPTION The -.Nm acd +.Nm acd driver provides support for ATAPI CD-ROM drives, using standard IDE controllers. .Sh FILES diff --git a/share/man/man4/ahc.4 b/share/man/man4/ahc.4 index dd2972525bf..e47d014a20b 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/ahc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/ahc.4 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ahc.4,v 1.5 1998/09/05 17:41:48 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ahc.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: ahc.4,v 1.1.2.1 1996/08/25 17:22:14 thorpej Exp $ .\" -.\" Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 +.\" Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 .\" Justin T. Gibbs. All rights reserved. .\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ For one or more SCSI busses: .Sh DESCRIPTION This driver provides access to the .Tn SCSI -bus connected to an Adaptec +bus connected to an Adaptec 274x, 284x, 2940, 3940, or controllers based on the .Tn AIC7770, .Tn AIC7850, @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ ultra two active commands at a time per non-tagged queuing target, tagged queuing, and SCB paging which allows up to 255 active commands on all adapters -except those using +except those using .Tn AIC7770 chips prior to revision E. Tagged queuing is enabled with the @@ -95,19 +95,19 @@ SCB paging is enabled with the .Dq Dv AHC_SCBPAGING_ENABLE configuration option. .Pp -Per target configuration performed in the +Per target configuration performed in the .Tn SCSI-Select menu, accessible at boot -in +in .No non- Ns Tn EISA -models or through an +models or through an .Tn EISA -configuration utility for +configuration utility for .Tn EISA models, -is honored by this driver with the stipulation that the +is honored by this driver with the stipulation that the .Tn BIOS -must be enabled for +must be enabled for .Tn EISA adaptors. This includes synchronous/asynchronous transfers, maximum synchronous negotiation rate, @@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ Note that I/O addresses are determined automatically by the probe routines, but care should be taken when using a 284x .Pq Tn VESA No local bus controller in an -.Tn EISA -system. Ensure that the jumpers setting the I/O area for the 284x match the +.Tn EISA +system. Ensure that the jumpers setting the I/O area for the 284x match the .Tn EISA slot into which the card is inserted to prevent conflicts with other .Tn EISA @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Some Quantum drives (at least the Empire 2100 and 1080s) will not run on an Rev B in synchronous mode at 10MHz. Controllers with this problem have a 42 MHz clock crystal on them and run slightly above 10MHz, causing the drive much confusion. Setting a maximum synchronous negotiation rate of 8MHz -in the +in the .Tn SCSI-Select utility will allow normal function. @@ -143,18 +143,18 @@ Cannot handle SCSI ID greater than 7 with WIDE SCSI adapter. .Pp It is dangerous to simultaneously access SCSI devices more than half number of SCBs. It may cause fatal disk trouble. In this case, -diagnostics message +diagnostics message .Dq not queued, error ... is displayed to console. For example, AHA-274x and AHA-284x have only 4 SCBs, so that using 3 SCSI devices is dangerous, using 2 devices is OK. .Pp When you suddenly access SCSI devices on free physical memory shortage -conditions, and if there have been very few load on SCSI devices until +conditions, and if there have been very few load on SCSI devices until then, it may cause fatal disk trouble. In this case, diagnostics -message +message .Dq ahc0: Can't malloc SCB -and +and .Dq not queued, error ... is displayed to console. .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man4/atalk.4 b/share/man/man4/atalk.4 index 9dc9ffeed3c..4f8f0fb86f6 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/atalk.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/atalk.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: atalk.4,v 1.3 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: atalk.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" This file is derived from the atalk.4 man page in the Netatlk 1.4b2 .\" distribution. That distribution is covered by the following copyright: @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ .\" Ann Arbor, Michigan .\" +1-313-764-2278 .\" netatalk@umich.edu -.\" +.\" .Dd November 14, 1997 .Dt ATALK 4 .Os @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .Fd #include <sys/types.h> .Fd #include <netatalk/at.h> .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Tn AppleTalk Protocol Family provides presentation layer support for the AppleTalk Datagram Delivery Protocol (DDP), using the SOCK_DGRAM socket type. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ configured). .\"causes the address in outgoing packets to be determined when a packet .\"is sent, i.e. determined late. .\".Dv ATADDR_LATENET -.\"is equivalent to opening one socket for each network interface. +.\"is equivalent to opening one socket for each network interface. The port of a socket and .\"either the primary address @@ -130,11 +130,11 @@ and Zone Information Protocol .Pq Tn ZIP . .Pp .Tn DDP -is implemented in the kernel as +is implemented in the kernel as .Dv SOCK_DGRAM sockets in the .Dv AF_APPLETALK -address family. +address family. .Nx All other .Tn AppleTalk @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ client. .Tn NBP , and .Tn ZIP -services are provided by the +services are provided by the .Tn atalkd daemon. .Tn ASP diff --git a/share/man/man4/audio.4 b/share/man/man4/audio.4 index b3f931bbeb4..8af6b5a5bac 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/audio.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/audio.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: audio.4,v 1.8 1998/09/05 17:41:48 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: audio.4,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: audio.4,v 1.20 1998/05/28 17:27:15 augustss Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ is calculated to correspond to 50ms of sound and it is recalculated when the encoding parameter changes, but if the .Va blocksize is set explicitly this value becomes sticky, i.e., it is remains -even when the encoding is changed. +even when the encoding is changed. The stickyness can be cleared by reopening the device or setting the .Va blocksize to 0. diff --git a/share/man/man4/bridge.4 b/share/man/man4/bridge.4 index 6b2dbedd11f..bc272375a8e 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/bridge.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/bridge.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: bridge.4,v 1.10 1999/06/25 22:27:46 jason Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: bridge.4,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1999 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net) .\" All rights reserved. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ interface responds to all of the .Xr ioctl 2 calls specific to other interfaces listed in .Xr netintro 4 . -The following +The following .Xr ioctl 2 calls are specific to .Nm bridge diff --git a/share/man/man4/cd.4 b/share/man/man4/cd.4 index 65d40506897..1bf672851da 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/cd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/cd.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: cd.4,v 1.4 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: cd.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: cd.4,v 1.3 1996/10/20 23:15:21 explorer Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 @@ -38,30 +38,30 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm cd -driver provides support for a +driver provides support for a .Tn SCSI .Tn CD-ROM (Compact Disc-Read Only Memory) drive. -In an attempt to look like a regular disk, the +In an attempt to look like a regular disk, the .Nm driver synthesizes a partition table, with one partition covering the entire .Tn CD-ROM . It is possible to modify this partition table using .Xr disklabel 8 , -but it will only last until the +but it will only last until the .Tn CD-ROM is unmounted. -In general the interfaces are similar to those described by -.Xr wd 4 +In general the interfaces are similar to those described by +.Xr wd 4 and .Xr sd 4 . .Pp As the .Tn SCSI -adapter is probed during boot, the +adapter is probed during boot, the .Tn SCSI bus is scanned for devices. Any devices found which answer as `Read-only' -type devices will be `attached' to the +type devices will be `attached' to the .Nm driver. .Pp @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ The system utility .Xr disklabel 8 may be used to read the synthesized disk label -structure, which will contain correct figures for the size of the +structure, which will contain correct figures for the size of the .Tn CD-ROM should that information be required. .Sh KERNEL CONFIGURATION @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Any number of devices may be attached to the system regardless of system configuration as all resources are dynamically allocated. .Sh IOCTLS -The following +The following .Xr ioctl 2 calls which apply to .Tn SCSI @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ the information printed at boot. This structure is defined in .\" /* The tray has dynamic debugging */ .\"}; .\".Ed -.It Dv CDIOCPLAYTRACKS +.It Dv CDIOCPLAYTRACKS .Pq Li "struct ioc_play_track" Start audio playback given a track address and length. The structure is defined as follows: @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ struct ioc_play_blocks }; .Ed -.It Dv CDIOCPLAYMSF +.It Dv CDIOCPLAYMSF .Pq Li "struct ioc_play_msf" Start audio playback given a `minutes-seconds-frames' address and length. The structure is defined as follows: @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ struct ioc_play_msf }; .Ed -.It Dv CDIOCREADSUBCHANNEL +.It Dv CDIOCREADSUBCHANNEL .Pq Li "struct ioc_read_subchannel" Read information from the subchannel at the location specified by this structure: @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ struct ioc_read_subchannel { .It Dv CDIOREADTOCHEADER .Pq Li "struct ioc_toc_header" -Return summary information about the table of contents for the mounted +Return summary information about the table of contents for the mounted .Tn CD-ROM . The information is returned into the following structure: .Bd -literal -offset indent @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ struct ioc_toc_header { }; .Ed -.It Dv CDIOREADTOCENTRYS +.It Dv CDIOREADTOCENTRYS .Pq Li "struct ioc_read_toc_entry" Return information from the table of contents entries mentioned. (Yes, this command name is misspelled.) The argument structure is defined as follows: @@ -280,44 +280,44 @@ struct ioc_vol }; .Ed -.It Dv CDIOCSETMONO +.It Dv CDIOCSETMONO Patch all output channels to all source channels. .It Dv CDIOCSETSTEREO Patch left source channel to the left output channel and the right source channel to the right output channel. -.It Dv CDIOCSETMUTE +.It Dv CDIOCSETMUTE Mute output without changing the volume settings. .It Dv CDIOCSETLEFT .It Dv CDIOCSETRIGHT Attach both output channels to the left (right) source channel. -.It Dv CDIOCSETDEBUG -.It Dv CDIOCCLRDEBUG +.It Dv CDIOCSETDEBUG +.It Dv CDIOCCLRDEBUG Turn on (off) debugging for the appropriate device. -.It Dv CDIOCPAUSE -.It Dv CDIOCRESUME +.It Dv CDIOCPAUSE +.It Dv CDIOCRESUME Pause (resume) audio play, without resetting the location of the read-head. -.It Dv CDIOCRESET +.It Dv CDIOCRESET Reset the drive. -.It Dv CDIOCSTART -.It Dv CDIOCSTOP +.It Dv CDIOCSTART +.It Dv CDIOCSTOP Tell the drive to spin-up (-down) the .Tn CD-ROM . .It Dv CDIOCALLOW .It Dv CDIOCPREVENT -Tell the drive to allow (prevent) manual ejection of the +Tell the drive to allow (prevent) manual ejection of the .Tn CD-ROM disc. Not all drives support this feature. -.It Dv CDIOCEJECT -Eject the +.It Dv CDIOCEJECT +Eject the .Tn CD-ROM . .\".It Dv CDIOCCLOSE @@ -341,14 +341,14 @@ Eject the .\".Ed .El .Pp -In addition the general +In addition the general .Xr scsi 4 -ioctls may be used with the +ioctls may be used with the .Nm -driver, if used against the `whole disk' partition (i.e. +driver, if used against the `whole disk' partition (i.e. .Pa /dev/rcd0c ) . .Sh NOTES -When a +When a .Tn CD-ROM is changed in a drive controlled by the .Nm @@ -364,12 +364,12 @@ The audio code in the .Nm driver only supports .Tn SCSI-2 -standard audio commands. Because many +standard audio commands. Because many .Tn CD-ROM manufacturers have not followed the standard, there are many .Tn CD-ROM drives for which audio will not work. Some work is planned to support -some of the more common `broken' +some of the more common `broken' .Tn CD-ROM drives; however, this is not yet under way. .Sh FILES @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ None. .Xr scsi 4 , .Xr sd 4 , .Xr disklabel 5 , -.Xr disklabel 8 +.Xr disklabel 8 .Sh BUGS The names of the structures used for the third argument to .Fn ioctl diff --git a/share/man/man4/ch.4 b/share/man/man4/ch.4 index 8508f13cf28..9e8cbbbbb09 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/ch.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/ch.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ch.4,v 1.4 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ch.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" $FreeBSD$ .\" Copyright (c) 1996 .\" Julian Elischer <julian@freebsd.org>. All rights reserved. @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Xr ch -driver provides support for a +driver provides support for a .Em scsi juke box. It allows many slots of media to be multiplexed between a number of drives. @@ -44,15 +44,15 @@ of drives. A scsi adapter and a logical scsibuss must also be separately configured into the system before a scsi changer can be configured. .Pp -As the scsi adapter is probed during boot, the +As the scsi adapter is probed during boot, the .Em SCSI bus is scanned for devices. Any devices found which answer as 'Changer' -type devices will be 'attached' to the +type devices will be 'attached' to the .Nm driver. The first device found will be attached as .Em ch0 -and the next, +and the next, .Em ch1 etc. It is also possible to specify what ch unit a device should @@ -67,17 +67,17 @@ are configured; Most storage for them is allocated only when found so a large number of configured devices is cheap. (once the first has included the driver). .Sh IOCTLS -The following +The following .Xr ioctl 2 call applies to the changer. It is defined in the header file .Em sys/chio.h. .Bl -tag -width DIOCSDINFO -CHIOOP +CHIOOP This appears to be a 'do-everything' call. .El .Sh NOTES -The +The .Nm driver was added to the system by .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man4/clnp.4 b/share/man/man4/clnp.4 index 15595975a05..abfe711eb84 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/clnp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/clnp.4 @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ .Fn socket AF_ISO SOCK_RAW 0 .Sh DESCRIPTION .Tn CLNP -is the connectionless-mode network protocol used by the +is the connectionless-mode network protocol used by the connectionless-mode network service. This protocol is specified in .Tn ISO 8473. @@ -64,11 +64,11 @@ and calls, though the .Xr connect 2 call may also be used to fix the destination for future -packets (in which case the +packets (in which case the .Xr read 2 or .Xr recv 2 -and +and .Xr write 2 or .Xr send 2 @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ service option is added to the packet. The sequencing preferred bit and the low transit delay bit are set in this option. .Pp If a packet is forwarded containing the globally unique quality of -service option, and the interface through which the packet will be +service option, and the interface through which the packet will be transmitted has a queue length greater than .Em congest_threshold , then the congestion experienced bit is set in the quality of service option. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ The threshold value stored in .Em congest_threshold may be tuned. .Pp -When a packet is received with the +When a packet is received with the globally unique quality of service option present, and the congestion experienced bit is set, then the transport congestion control function is called. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ connected; When the system runs out of memory for an internal data structure; .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL -When an attempt is made to create a +When an attempt is made to create a socket with a network address for which no network interface exists; .It Bq Er EHOSTUNREACH diff --git a/share/man/man4/cltp.4 b/share/man/man4/cltp.4 index 7b48c59c35d..547d05daeac 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/cltp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/cltp.4 @@ -63,11 +63,11 @@ and calls, though the .Xr connect 2 call may also be used to fix the destination for future -packets (in which case the +packets (in which case the .Xr recv 2 or .Xr read 2 -and +and .Xr send 2 or .Xr write 2 @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ when an attempt is made to create a socket with a selector which has already been allocated; .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL -when an attempt is made to create a +when an attempt is made to create a socket with a network address for which no network interface exists. .El diff --git a/share/man/man4/ddb.4 b/share/man/man4/ddb.4 index 0471743a685..23bc3a06a83 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/ddb.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/ddb.4 @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ddb.4,v 1.14 1999/05/16 19:56:21 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ddb.4,v 1.15 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: ddb.4,v 1.5 1994/11/30 16:22:09 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Mach Operating System .\" Copyright (c) 1991,1990 Carnegie Mellon University .\" All Rights Reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its .\" documentation is hereby granted, provided that both the copyright .\" notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of the .\" software, derivative works or modified versions, and any portions .\" thereof, and that both notices appear in supporting documentation. -.\" +.\" .\" CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS "AS IS" .\" CONDITION. CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF ANY KIND FOR .\" ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE. -.\" +.\" .\" Carnegie Mellon requests users of this software to return to -.\" +.\" .\" Software Distribution Coordinator or Software.Distribution@CS.CMU.EDU .\" School of Computer Science .\" Carnegie Mellon University .\" Pittsburgh PA 15213-3890 -.\" +.\" .\" any improvements or extensions that they make and grant Carnegie Mellon .\" the rights to redistribute these changes. -.\" +.\" .Dd November 30, 1993 .Dt DDB 4 .Os @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The kernel debugger has most of the features of the old kdb, but with a more rational -.No ( Xr gdb 1 +.No ( Xr gdb 1 \&- like) syntax. .Pp .Nm ddb @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ to be the same. .\" .Ar address .\" in a command sets .\" .Va dot . -An expression can be used in place of +An expression can be used in place of .Ar address (see .Sx EXPRESSIONS . ) @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ a of 1, and no modifiers. .Pp .Nm ddb -has a feature like +has a feature like .Xr more 1 for the output. If the number of lines output in response to one command exceeds the number set in the @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ ecx = yyyyyy .Ed .\" -------------------- .\" .It Xo Ic w Ns Op Cm /bhl -.\" .Op Ar addr +.\" .Op Ar addr .\" .Ar expr Op expr ... .\" .Xc .It Xo @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ command is a synonym for .\" -------------------- .It Xo .Ic trace -.Op Cm /u +.Op Cm /u .Op Ar frameaddr Ns .Op Ic \&, Ns Ar count .Xc @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ modifier shows the stack trace of user space; If omitted, the kernel stack is traced instead. The .Ar count -argument is the limit on the number of frames to be followed. +argument is the limit on the number of frames to be followed. If .Ar count is omitted, all frames are printed. @@ -632,9 +632,9 @@ command. Display information on all processes. .Bl -tag -width foo -compact .It Cm /n -(Default) Show process information in a +(Default) Show process information in a .Xr ps 1 Ns -\&-like format. Information printed includes process ID, parent +\&-like format. Information printed includes process ID, parent process ID, process group, UID, process status, process flags, process command name, and process wait channel message. .It Cm /a @@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ are: .It Ar identifier The name of a symbol. It is translated to the address (or value) of the symbol. -.Ql \&. +.Ql \&. and .Ql \&: can be used in the identifier. @@ -729,10 +729,10 @@ if supported by an object format dependent routine: .Oo Ar filename Li \&: Oc Ar func .Oo \&: Ar linenumber Oc .It -.Op Ar filename \&: +.Op Ar filename \&: .Ar variable .It -.Ar filename +.Ar filename .Op \&: Ar linenumber .Sm on .El @@ -780,7 +780,7 @@ and modifiers as described above with A binary operator which rounds up the left hand side to the next multiple of right hand side. .It Li \&* Ns Ar expr -Indirection. +Indirection. It may be followed by a ':' and modifiers as described above. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr gdb 1 , diff --git a/share/man/man4/de.4 b/share/man/man4/de.4 index b7c719533e2..dc636f4b2b0 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/de.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/de.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: de.4,v 1.7 1999/06/05 13:18:31 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: de.4,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 David E. O'Brien .\" @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ driver provides support for the Ethernet adapters based on the Digital Equipment DC21x4x based self-contained Ethernet chips. .Pp It supports the DEC PCI DE435 card, DEC EISA DE425, DEC DE450, DEC DE500, -SMC 8432, 9332 and 9334, Cogent EM100FX and EM440TX, Asante, +SMC 8432, 9332 and 9334, Cogent EM100FX and EM440TX, Asante, ZNYX ZX3xx, and others based on the 21040 and 21041 Ethernet controllers or the 21140[A], 21141, 21142 and 21143 Fast 100Mbps Ethernet controllers. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ method of configuration is not supported. .It "de%d: waking device from sleep/snooze mode" The 21041 and 21140A chips support suspending the operation of the card. .It "de%d: error: desired IRQ of %d does not match device's actual IRQ of %d" -The device probe detected that the board is configured for a different +The device probe detected that the board is configured for a different interrupt than the one specified in the kernel configuration file. .It "de%d: not configured; limit of %d reached or exceeded" There is a limit of 32 diff --git a/share/man/man4/eap.4 b/share/man/man4/eap.4 index e2208c1ca92..7bd5002647b 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/eap.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/eap.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: eap.4,v 1.1 1998/06/02 23:25:14 provos Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: eap.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: eap.4,v 1.2 1998/05/06 19:14:06 augustss Exp $ .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS diff --git a/share/man/man4/esis.4 b/share/man/man4/esis.4 index 6d6c62bbdaa..0872bdd7976 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/esis.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/esis.4 @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ addresses and .Tn ISO SNPA addresses; to permit End and Intermediate Systems to learn of each other's existence; and to allow Intermediate Systems -to inform End Systems of (potentially) better routes to use when +to inform End Systems of (potentially) better routes to use when forwarding .Tn NPDU Ns s to a particular destination. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ it is necessary to manually configure the location of an using the route command in a similar way. There, the destination address should be .Dq default -(spelled +(spelled out literally as 7 .Tn ASCII characters), and the gateway should be diff --git a/share/man/man4/fd.4 b/share/man/man4/fd.4 index 7ab5ab196ad..95b7970f489 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/fd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/fd.4 @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ fd = fcntl(STDERR_FILENO, F_DUPFD, 0); Flags to the .Xr open 2 call other than -.Dv O_RDONLY , +.Dv O_RDONLY , .Dv O_WRONLY and .Dv O_RDWR diff --git a/share/man/man4/fpa.4 b/share/man/man4/fpa.4 index cad55411356..5a7158150a3 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/fpa.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/fpa.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: fpa.4,v 1.6 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: fpa.4,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: fpa.4,v 1.2 1997/02/18 01:07:46 jonathan Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1995, Matt Thomas @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ .Dt FEA 4 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm fpa , +.Nm fpa , .Nm fea .Nd Device Drivers for DEC FDDI Controllers @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ controller are supported including the DAS and SAS configurations. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS .Bl -diag .It "fea%d: error: desired IRQ of %d does not match device's actual IRQ (%d)" -The device probe detected that the DEFEA board is configured for a different +The device probe detected that the DEFEA board is configured for a different interrupt than the one specified in the kernel configuration file. .It "fea%d: error: memory not enabled! ECU reconfiguration required" The device probe found that no device memory had been configured on the @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Utility) will need to be run to change the settings. .Sh CAVEATS Normally, the device driver will not enable the reception of SMT frames. However if the IFF_LINK1 flag is set, the device driver will enable the -reception of SMT frames and pass them up to the Berkeley Packet Filter for +reception of SMT frames and pass them up to the Berkeley Packet Filter for processing. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr arp 4 , diff --git a/share/man/man4/icmp.4 b/share/man/man4/icmp.4 index ee666e42448..25efd2b7e28 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/icmp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/icmp.4 @@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ and calls, though the .Xr connect 2 call may also be used to fix the destination for future -packets (in which case the +packets (in which case the .Xr read 2 or .Xr recv 2 -and +and .Xr write 2 or .Xr send 2 @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ connected; when the system runs out of memory for an internal data structure; .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL -when an attempt is made to create a +when an attempt is made to create a socket with a network address for which no network interface exists. .El diff --git a/share/man/man4/idp.4 b/share/man/man4/idp.4 index 2c94f116605..ee89ef71141 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/idp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/idp.4 @@ -61,11 +61,11 @@ and calls, though the .Xr connect 2 call may also be used to fix the destination for future -packets (in which case the +packets (in which case the .Xr recv 2 or .Xr read 2 -and +and .Xr send 2 or .Xr write 2 @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ when an attempt is made to create a socket with a port which has already been allocated; .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL -when an attempt is made to create a +when an attempt is made to create a socket with a network address for which no network interface exists. .El diff --git a/share/man/man4/imp.4 b/share/man/man4/imp.4 index 356842efcfb..a8fef2e492f 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/imp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/imp.4 @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ raw socket interface The raw imp socket provides direct access to the .Nm imp network interface. Users send packets through -the interface using the +the interface using the .Xr send 2 calls, and receive packets with the .Xr recv 2 , @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ an internal data structure; eight messages to the destination host are outstanding, and another eight are already queued for output; .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL -when an attempt is made to create a +when an attempt is made to create a socket with a network address for which no network interface exists. .El diff --git a/share/man/man4/inet.4 b/share/man/man4/inet.4 index 28b4680b260..7264a852cfe 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/inet.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/inet.4 @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Sockets may be created with the local address .Dv INADDR_ANY to effect .Dq wildcard -matching on incoming messages. +matching on incoming messages. The address in a .Xr connect 2 or diff --git a/share/man/man4/ip.4 b/share/man/man4/ip.4 index eef89fcb448..05bac174a3d 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/ip.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/ip.4 @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ .Ft int .Fn socket AF_INET SOCK_RAW proto .Sh DESCRIPTION -.Tn IP +.Tn IP is the network layer protocol used by the Internet protocol family. Options may be set at the @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ There are several .Xr setsockopt 2 / Ns .Xr getsockopt 2 options. -.Dv IP_OPTIONS +.Dv IP_OPTIONS may be used to provide .Tn IP options to be transmitted in the @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ options may be used with any socket type in the Internet family. The format of .Tn IP options to be sent is that specified by the -.Tn IP +.Tn IP protocol specification (RFC-791), with one exception: the list of addresses for Source Route options must include the first-hop gateway at the beginning of the list of gateways. @@ -92,16 +92,16 @@ use a zero-length buffer: setsockopt(s, IPPROTO_IP, IP_OPTIONS, NULL, 0); .Ed .Pp -.Dv IP_TOS -and -.Dv IP_TTL +.Dv IP_TOS +and +.Dv IP_TTL may be used to set the type-of-service and time-to-live -fields in the -.Tn IP -header for -.Dv SOCK_STREAM -and -.Dv SOCK_DGRAM +fields in the +.Tn IP +header for +.Dv SOCK_STREAM +and +.Dv SOCK_DGRAM sockets. For example, .Bd -literal int tos = IPTOS_LOWDELAY; /* see <netinet/in.h> */ @@ -111,22 +111,22 @@ int ttl = 60; /* max = 255 */ setsockopt(s, IPPROTO_IP, IP_TTL, &ttl, sizeof(ttl)); .Ed .Pp -If the -.Dv IP_RECVDSTADDR -option is enabled on a -.Dv SOCK_DGRAM +If the +.Dv IP_RECVDSTADDR +option is enabled on a +.Dv SOCK_DGRAM socket, the .Xr recvmsg -call will return the destination -.Tn IP -address for a -.Tn UDP -datagram. -The msg_control field in the msghdr structure points to a buffer -that contains a cmsghdr structure followed by the -.Tn IP -address. +call will return the destination +.Tn IP +address for a +.Tn UDP +datagram. +The msg_control field in the msghdr structure points to a buffer +that contains a cmsghdr structure followed by the +.Tn IP +address. The cmsghdr fields have the following values: .Bd -literal cmsg_len = sizeof(struct in_addr) @@ -147,18 +147,18 @@ Reserved ports; between 600 and 1023. .El .Ss "Multicast Options" .Pp -.Tn IP -multicasting is supported only on -.Dv AF_INET +.Tn IP +multicasting is supported only on +.Dv AF_INET sockets of type -.Dv SOCK_DGRAM -and +.Dv SOCK_DGRAM +and .Dv SOCK_RAW, and only on networks where the interface driver supports multicasting. .Pp -The -.Dv IP_MULTICAST_TTL +The +.Dv IP_MULTICAST_TTL option changes the time-to-live (TTL) for outgoing multicast datagrams in order to control the scope of the multicasts: @@ -174,36 +174,36 @@ group and if multicast loopback has not been disabled on the sending socket (see below). Multicast datagrams with TTL greater than 1 may be forwarded to other networks if a multicast router is attached to the local network. .Pp -For hosts with multiple interfaces, each multicast transmission is +For hosts with multiple interfaces, each multicast transmission is sent from the primary network interface. -The -.Dv IP_MULTICAST_IF -option overrides the default for +The +.Dv IP_MULTICAST_IF +option overrides the default for subsequent transmissions from a given socket: .Bd -literal struct in_addr addr; setsockopt(s, IPPROTO_IP, IP_MULTICAST_IF, &addr, sizeof(addr)); .Ed .sp -where "addr" is the local -.Tn IP +where "addr" is the local +.Tn IP address of the desired interface or -.Dv INADDR_ANY +.Dv INADDR_ANY to specify the default interface. -An interface's local IP address and multicast capability can -be obtained via the -.Dv SIOCGIFCONF -and -.Dv SIOCGIFFLAGS -ioctls. +An interface's local IP address and multicast capability can +be obtained via the +.Dv SIOCGIFCONF +and +.Dv SIOCGIFFLAGS +ioctls. Normal applications should not need to use this option. .Pp If a multicast datagram is sent to a group to which the sending host itself belongs (on the outgoing interface), a copy of the datagram is, by default, -looped back by the IP layer for local delivery. -The -.Dv IP_MULTICAST_LOOP -option gives the sender explicit control +looped back by the IP layer for local delivery. +The +.Dv IP_MULTICAST_LOOP +option gives the sender explicit control over whether or not subsequent datagrams are looped back: .Bd -literal u_char loop; /* 0 = disable, 1 = enable (default) */ @@ -223,16 +223,16 @@ to the sending host on a different interface from that on which it was sent, if the host belongs to the destination group on that other interface. The loopback control option has no effect on such delivery. .Pp -A host must become a member of a multicast group before it can receive -datagrams sent to the group. To join a multicast group, use the -.Dv IP_ADD_MEMBERSHIP +A host must become a member of a multicast group before it can receive +datagrams sent to the group. To join a multicast group, use the +.Dv IP_ADD_MEMBERSHIP option: .Bd -literal struct ip_mreq mreq; setsockopt(s, IPPROTO_IP, IP_ADD_MEMBERSHIP, &mreq, sizeof(mreq)); .Ed .sp -where +where .Fa mreq is the following structure: .Bd -literal @@ -242,20 +242,20 @@ struct ip_mreq { } .Ed .sp -.Dv imr_interface +.Dv imr_interface should -be -.Dv INADDR_ANY -to choose the default multicast interface, -or the -.Tn IP +be +.Dv INADDR_ANY +to choose the default multicast interface, +or the +.Tn IP address of a particular multicast-capable interface if the host is multihomed. -Membership is associated with a single interface; -programs running on multihomed hosts may need to -join the same group on more than one interface. -Up to -.Dv IP_MAX_MEMBERSHIPS +Membership is associated with a single interface; +programs running on multihomed hosts may need to +join the same group on more than one interface. +Up to +.Dv IP_MAX_MEMBERSHIPS (currently 20) memberships may be added on a single socket. .Pp @@ -265,10 +265,10 @@ struct ip_mreq mreq; setsockopt(s, IPPROTO_IP, IP_DROP_MEMBERSHIP, &mreq, sizeof(mreq)); .Ed .sp -where +where .Fa mreq -contains the same values as used to add the membership. -Memberships are dropped when the socket is closed or the process exits. +contains the same values as used to add the membership. +Memberships are dropped when the socket is closed or the process exits. .\"----------------------- .Ss "Raw IP Sockets" .Pp @@ -282,11 +282,11 @@ and calls, though the .Xr connect 2 call may also be used to fix the destination for future -packets (in which case the +packets (in which case the .Xr read 2 or .Xr recv 2 -and +and .Xr write 2 or .Xr send 2 @@ -309,17 +309,17 @@ Outgoing packets automatically have an header prepended to them (based on the destination address and the protocol number the socket is created with), -unless the -.Dv IP_HDRINCL +unless the +.Dv IP_HDRINCL option has been set. Incoming packets are received with .Tn IP header and options intact. .Pp -.Dv IP_HDRINCL +.Dv IP_HDRINCL indicates the complete IP header is included with the data -and may be used only with the -.Dv SOCK_RAW +and may be used only with the +.Dv SOCK_RAW type. .Bd -literal #include <netinet/ip.h> @@ -328,8 +328,8 @@ int hincl = 1; /* 1 = on, 0 = off */ setsockopt(s, IPPROTO_IP, IP_HDRINCL, &hincl, sizeof(hincl)); .Ed .sp -Unlike previous -.Tn BSD +Unlike previous +.Tn BSD releases, the program must set all the fields of the IP header, including the following: .Bd -literal @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ ip->ip_len = htons(len); Additionally note that starting with .Ox 2.1 , the ip_off and ip_len fields are in network byte order. -If the header source address is set to +If the header source address is set to .Dv INADDR_ANY, the kernel will choose an appropriate address. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS @@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ connected; when the system runs out of memory for an internal data structure; .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL -when an attempt is made to create a +when an attempt is made to create a socket with a network address for which no network interface exists. .It Bq Er EACCES diff --git a/share/man/man4/ipsec.4 b/share/man/man4/ipsec.4 index 36538de40a5..e453adffbee 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/ipsec.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/ipsec.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ipsec.4,v 1.21 1999/07/03 20:41:20 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ipsec.4,v 1.22 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $ .\" Copyright 1997 Niels Provos <provos@physnet.uni-hamburg.de> .\" All rights reserved. .\" @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ packets that have been successfully processed by .Pp Security Associations can be set up manually with the .Xr ipsecadm 1 -utility or automatically with the +utility or automatically with the .Xr photurisd 8 or .Xr isakmpd 8 diff --git a/share/man/man4/isapnp.4 b/share/man/man4/isapnp.4 index 177eb4a0b9b..ff932c48a42 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/isapnp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/isapnp.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: isapnp.4,v 1.9 1999/07/07 20:28:08 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: isapnp.4,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: isapnp.4,v 1.8 1998/06/07 09:08:46 enami Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Jonathan Stone @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ .Cd "isapnp0 at isa?" .Pp An -.Nm +.Nm isapnp bus can be configured for each supported ISA bus. .Sh DESCRIPTION .Ox diff --git a/share/man/man4/iso.4 b/share/man/man4/iso.4 index 4fcf1e4f48b..dfd0efaf4d2 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/iso.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/iso.4 @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ abstraction through the .Tn TP protocol .Pf ( Tn ISO -8073), +8073), for the .Dv SOCK_DGRAM abstraction through the connectionless transport @@ -70,14 +70,14 @@ and for the .Dv SOCK_RAW abstraction by providing direct access (for debugging) to the -.Tn CLNP +.Tn CLNP .Pf ( Tn ISO 8473) network layer protocol. .Sh ADDRESSING .Tn ISO addresses are based upon .Tn ISO -8348/AD2, +8348/AD2, .%T "Addendum to the Network Service Definition Covering Network Layer Addressing." .Pp Sockets bound to the OSI protocol family use @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ domain, this is called a .Em transport selector (also known at one time as a .Em transport suffix ) . -While ports are always 16 bits, +While ports are always 16 bits, transport selectors may be of (almost) arbitrary size. .Pp @@ -156,11 +156,11 @@ network addresses can take any format. .Sh PROTOCOLS The .Tn ARGO -1.0 implementation of the +1.0 implementation of the .Tn ISO protocol family comprises the Connectionless-Mode Network Protocol -.Pq Tn CLNP , +.Pq Tn CLNP , and the Transport Protocol .Pq Tn TP , classes 4 and 0, diff --git a/share/man/man4/lmc.4 b/share/man/man4/lmc.4 index 5e45cf69dfc..775eb2594c1 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/lmc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/lmc.4 @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Only available if compiled with LMC_DEBUG .El .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr intro 4 , -.Xr netintro 4 , +.Xr netintro 4 , .Xr sppp 4 , .Xr ifconfig 8 Lan Media Corporation has a web site with data, descriptions, and pictures @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ of their cards at www.lanmedia.com. The .Nm device driver was first released from LMC to support their cards, -and was later included in NetBSD 1.4. +and was later included in NetBSD 1.4. .Sh AUTHORS The .Nm diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/esp.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/esp.4 index e1c1fa782f0..c289d3bd099 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/esp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/esp.4 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: esp.4,v 1.2 1998/03/08 00:54:41 johns Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: esp.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" -.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project +.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project .\" All rights reserved. .\" .\" @@ -8,16 +8,16 @@ .Dt ESP 4 alpha .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm esp +.Nm esp .Nd ESP NCR 53c[f]94 on-board SCSI controller .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "esp0 at tcds? slot ? " Pq "TurboChannel Alpha systems" .Cd "esp1 at tcds? slot ? " Pq "TurboChannel Alpha systems" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm -is an on-board SCSI controller based on the NCR 53c[f]94 chips, found -on DEC 3000/[3456789]00 series Alpha workstations. +is an on-board SCSI controller based on the NCR 53c[f]94 chips, found +on DEC 3000/[3456789]00 series Alpha workstations. .Sh BUGS Both on-board SCSI chips may or may not work at the same time. .Sh SEE ALSO diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/intro.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/intro.4 index 71ac0e54c47..930ff48d1e2 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/intro.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/intro.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:56:43 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project .\" All Rights Reserved. @@ -77,13 +77,13 @@ The following Alpha system architectures and models are supported: .It AlphaStation 200/250/255/400/500 and AXPpci systems. .El .Pp -The DECpc AXP 150 systems (EISA-bus PC-like systems), +The DECpc AXP 150 systems (EISA-bus PC-like systems), Alpha "server" systems (other than perhaps the AlphaServer 400, which might actually be an AlphaStation 400 in disguise), and multiprocessor Alpha systems are not supported. .Sh HISTORY The Alpha -.Nm +.Nm first appeared with .Ox 2.3 . diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/le.4 index a38dc718e98..1e5c1972f37 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/le.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/le.4 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.3 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" -.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project +.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project .\" All rights reserved. .\" .Dd March 7, 1998 @@ -8,12 +8,12 @@ .Os .Sh NAME .Nm le -.Nd Alpha on-board or PCI LANCE ethernet interface +.Nd Alpha on-board or PCI LANCE ethernet interface .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "le* at tc? slot ? offset ? " Pq "TurboChannel Alphas" .Cd "le* at pci? dev ? function ?" Pq "PCI LANCE Ethernet (untested)" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the Ethernet network via the .Tn AMD diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/wd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/wd.4 index eb56cbca34a..d9f1990581a 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/wd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.alpha/wd.4 @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ .Dt WD 4 alpha .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm wd +.Nm wd .Nd WD100x compatible hard disk driver .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "wdc0 at isa? port 0x1f0 irq 14" @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ .Cd "wd* at wdc? drive ?" .Sh DESCRIPTION The -.Nm wd +.Nm wd driver supports hard disk controllers which emulate the Western Digital WD100x. This includes standard MFM, RLL, ESDI and IDE controllers. Most PCI bus alpha machines have a WD100x compatible diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ae.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ae.4 index 95362fb0b1a..81bf5a55322 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ae.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ae.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ae.4,v 1.6 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ae.4,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: ae.4,v 1.3 1995/10/07 18:09:11 chopps Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Bernd Ernesti and Klaus Burkert. All rights reserved. @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "ae* at zbus0" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the .Tn AMD diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/afsc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/afsc.4 index 26be597b8be..84e85001c05 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/afsc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/afsc.4 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: afsc.4,v 1.3 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: afsc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd July 23, 1995 .Dt AFSC 4 amiga @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ The .Tn Amiga architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system -provided in the kernel source. The machine independent +provided in the kernel source. The machine independent drivers that use this code access the hardware through a common interface. (see .Xr scsibus 4 ) @@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ such as which then handles the hardware specific issues. .Pp The -.Nm +.Nm interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets. -The hardware that +The hardware that .Nm uses is based on the NCR53c710 SCSI chip. .Sh HARDWARE @@ -84,6 +84,6 @@ parity error on the SCSI bus. .Xr scsibus 4 .Sh HISTORY The -.Nm +.Nm interface first appeared in .Nx 1.0 diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ahsc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ahsc.4 index c7d5308702c..1c065558cbe 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ahsc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ahsc.4 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: ahsc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: ahsc.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 31, 1994 .Dt AHSC 4 amiga @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ The .Tn Amiga architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system -provided in the kernel source. The machine independent +provided in the kernel source. The machine independent drivers that use this code access the hardware through a common interface. (see .Xr scsibus 4 ) @@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ such as which then handles the hardware specific issues. .Pp The -.Nm +.Nm interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets. -The hardware that +The hardware that .Nm uses is based on the WD33c93 SCSI chip. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS @@ -89,6 +89,6 @@ expected durring DMA IO setup. .Xr scsibus 4 .Sh HISTORY The -.Nm +.Nm interface first appeared in .Nx 0.9a diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/atzsc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/atzsc.4 index 2f6e56a572e..03554b74f94 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/atzsc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/atzsc.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: atzsc.4,v 1.5 1999/07/08 01:26:48 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: atzsc.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Christian E. Hopps .\" All rights reserved. @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: atzsc.4,v 1.5 1999/07/08 01:26:48 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: atzsc.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 31, 1994 .Dt ATZSC 4 amiga @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ The .Tn Amiga architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system -provided in the kernel source. The machine independent +provided in the kernel source. The machine independent drivers that use this code access the hardware through a common interface. (see .Xr scsibus 4 ) @@ -52,11 +52,11 @@ such as which then handles the hardware specific issues. .Pp The -.Nm +.Nm interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets. -The hardware that +The hardware that .Nm uses is based on the WD33c93 SCSI chip. .Sh HARDWARE @@ -94,6 +94,6 @@ expected durring DMA IO setup. .Xr scsibus 4 .Sh HISTORY The -.Nm +.Nm interface first appeared in .Nx 0.9a diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/bah.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/bah.4 index 99c79e37691..0354ee2e53a 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/bah.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/bah.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: bah.4,v 1.5 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: bah.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: bah.4,v 1.2 1995/06/06 23:41:37 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Ignatios Souvatzis @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "bah* at zbus0" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the 2.5 Mb/s ARCnet network via the .Tn SMC @@ -67,12 +67,12 @@ as one option. With the IFF_LINK0 flag cleared, IP encoding is done according to the deprecated, but popular among Amiga users, RFC 1051 encoding (that is, with simple header, packet type 240), and the MTU is 507. -.Pp -With the IFF_LINK0 flag set, IP encoding is done according to RFC 1201 (that +.Pp +With the IFF_LINK0 flag set, IP encoding is done according to RFC 1201 (that is, with Packet Header Definition Standard header and packet type 212). The MTU is normally 1500. .Pp -When switching between the two modes, do a +When switching between the two modes, do a .Cd ifconfig interfacename down up to switch the mtu. .Sh HARDWARE @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Ameristar's arcnet card, manufacturer\ 1053, product\ 9 .Xr inet 4 , .Xr intro 4 , .Xr ifconfig 8 -.Xr RFC1051 +.Xr RFC1051 , .Xr RFC1201 .br diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/gtsc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/gtsc.4 index d200b710af8..2a0b0986727 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/gtsc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/gtsc.4 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: gtsc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: gtsc.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 31, 1994 .Dt GTSC 4 amiga @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ The .Tn Amiga architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system -provided in the kernel source. The machine independent +provided in the kernel source. The machine independent drivers that use this code access the hardware through a common interface. (see .Xr scsibus 4 ) @@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ such as which then handles the hardware specific issues. .Pp The -.Nm +.Nm interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets. -The hardware that +The hardware that .Nm uses is based on the WD33c93 SCSI chip. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS @@ -89,6 +89,6 @@ expected durring DMA IO setup. .Xr scsibus 4 .Sh HISTORY The -.Nm +.Nm interface first appeared in .Nx 0.9a diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ite.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ite.4 index ff86a030445..53950a60c16 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ite.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ite.4 @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)ite.4 5.2 (Berkeley) 3/27/91 -.\" $Id: ite.4,v 1.2 1996/10/08 01:20:37 michaels Exp $ +.\" $Id: ite.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 30, 1994 .Dt ITE 4 amiga @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ If more than one of the supported displays exists on a system, any or all can be used as .Nm .Ns s -with the limitation that only +with the limitation that only one will have a keyboard (since only one keyboard is supported) and only one of each type can be used. .Pp @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ The keyboard will use the left and right keys as meta keys, in that it will set the eighth bit of the character code. .Nm Ite devices also do a good job at emulating the -.Sq Li vt100 +.Sq Li vt100 .Xr termcap 5 entry. .Pp @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ When the graphics application is finished and .Pa /dev/grf0 closed, the -.Nm +.Nm will be reinitialized with the frame buffer cleared and the old colormap installed. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/le.4 index 43e93c783e6..1d3eb597170 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/le.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/le.4 @@ -35,18 +35,18 @@ .\" .\" from: Header: le.4,v 1.2 92/10/13 05:31:33 leres Exp .\" from: @(#)le.4 8.1 (Berkeley) 6/9/93 -.\" $Id: le.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:56:48 alex Exp $ +.\" $Id: le.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 30, 1994 .Dt LE 4 amiga .Os .Sh NAME .Nm le -.Nd Ethernet driver for AMD7990(LANCE)-based boards +.Nd Ethernet driver for AMD7990(LANCE)-based boards .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "le* at zbus0" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the .Tn AMD diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/mgnsc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/mgnsc.4 index 714711837ce..fc6d604a61b 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/mgnsc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/mgnsc.4 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: mgnsc.4,v 1.3 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: mgnsc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 31, 1994 .Dt MGNSC 4 amiga @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ The .Tn Amiga architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system -provided in the kernel source. The machine independent +provided in the kernel source. The machine independent drivers that use this code access the hardware through a common interface. (see .Xr scsibus 4 ) @@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ such as which then handles the hardware specific issues. .Pp The -.Nm +.Nm interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets. -The hardware that +The hardware that .Nm uses is based on the NCR53c710 SCSI chip. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS @@ -76,6 +76,6 @@ parity error on the SCSI bus. .Xr scsibus 4 .Sh HISTORY The -.Nm +.Nm interface first appeared in .Nx 0.9a diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/qn.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/qn.4 index 8698d42346b..83ab13367ef 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/qn.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/qn.4 @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "qn* at zbus0" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the .Tn Fujitsu diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ser.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ser.4 index 5d333bcb625..5b8fa40054c 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ser.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/ser.4 @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)dca.4 5.2 (Berkeley) 3/27/91 -.\" $Id: ser.4,v 1.2 1996/10/08 01:20:41 michaels Exp $ +.\" $Id: ser.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 30, 1994 .Dt SER 4 amiga @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ communications interface with a single character buffer. Such an interface is built-in to all Amiga machines. .Pp Input and output for each line may set to one of following baud rates; -50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600, +50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 76800. .Sh FILES .Bl -tag -width Pa diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/wesc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/wesc.4 index e1006896e82..2a376b443ae 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/wesc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/wesc.4 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: wesc.4,v 1.3 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: wesc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 31, 1994 .Dt WESC 4 amiga @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ The .Tn Amiga architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system -provided in the kernel source. The machine independent +provided in the kernel source. The machine independent drivers that use this code access the hardware through a common interface. (see .Xr scsibus 4 ) @@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ such as which then handles the hardware specific issues. .Pp The -.Nm +.Nm interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets. -The hardware that +The hardware that .Nm uses is based on the NCR53c710 SCSI chip. .Sh HARDWARE @@ -84,6 +84,6 @@ parity error on the SCSI bus. .Xr scsibus 4 .Sh HISTORY The -.Nm +.Nm interface first appeared in .Nx 0.9a diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/zssc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/zssc.4 index c8f0c210661..45017656515 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/zssc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.amiga/zssc.4 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: zssc.4,v 1.3 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: zssc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 31, 1994 .Dt ZSSC 4 amiga @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ The .Tn Amiga architecture uses a common machine independent scsi sub-system -provided in the kernel source. The machine independent +provided in the kernel source. The machine independent drivers that use this code access the hardware through a common interface. (see .Xr scsibus 4 ) @@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ such as which then handles the hardware specific issues. .Pp The -.Nm +.Nm interface handles things such as DMA and interrupts as well as actually sending commands, negotiating synchronous or asynchronous transfers and handling disconnect/reconnect of SCSI targets. -The hardware that +The hardware that .Nm uses is based on the NCR53c710 SCSI chip. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS @@ -76,6 +76,6 @@ parity error on the SCSI bus. .Xr scsibus 4 .Sh HISTORY The -.Nm +.Nm interface first appeared in .Nx 0.9a diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/intro.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/intro.4 index d085a3912e7..068af0fbb40 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/intro.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/intro.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:56:49 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project .\" All Rights Reserved. @@ -92,6 +92,6 @@ that were made are also not supported. .Sh HISTORY The Arc -.Nm +.Nm first appeared with .Ox 2.0 . diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/joy.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/joy.4 index 4383cd2760a..653ac37947e 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/joy.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/joy.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: joy.4,v 1.2 1999/04/02 16:21:37 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: joy.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Matthieu Herrb .\" All rights reserved. @@ -77,8 +77,8 @@ Returns the current Y offset. .Pp All this commands take an integer parameter. .Pp -Read() on the file descriptor returns a -.Fa joystick +Read() on the file descriptor returns a +.Fa joystick structure: .Bd -literal -offset indent struct joystick { diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/le.4 index e7607c6f898..367766bccb3 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/le.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/le.4 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.3 1999/07/03 02:11:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" -.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project +.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project .\" All rights reserved. .\" .Dd March 7, 1998 @@ -8,12 +8,12 @@ .Os .Sh NAME .Nm le -.Nd Alpha on-board or PCI LANCE ethernet interface +.Nd Alpha on-board or PCI LANCE ethernet interface .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "le* at tc? slot ? offset ? " Pq "TurboChannel Alphas" .Cd "le* at pci? dev ? function ?" Pq "PCI LANCE Ethernet (untested)" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the Ethernet network via the .Tn AMD diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/wd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/wd.4 index eb56cbca34a..d9f1990581a 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.arc/wd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.arc/wd.4 @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ .Dt WD 4 alpha .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm wd +.Nm wd .Nd WD100x compatible hard disk driver .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "wdc0 at isa? port 0x1f0 irq 14" @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ .Cd "wd* at wdc? drive ?" .Sh DESCRIPTION The -.Nm wd +.Nm wd driver supports hard disk controllers which emulate the Western Digital WD100x. This includes standard MFM, RLL, ESDI and IDE controllers. Most PCI bus alpha machines have a WD100x compatible diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.arm32/wd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.arm32/wd.4 index df2ae30c3c2..739e662c5a1 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.arm32/wd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.arm32/wd.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: wd.4,v 1.2 1996/10/08 01:20:44 michaels Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: wd.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:45 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Mark Brinicombe .\" Based on man4.i386/wd.4 by James A. Jegers @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. @@ -23,18 +23,18 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.Dd July 29th, 1995 +.Dd July 29th, 1995 .Dt WD 4 arm32 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm wd +.Nm wd .Nd WD100x compatible hard disk driver .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "wdc0 at mainbus? base 0x002107c0" .Cd "wd* at wdc? drive ?" .Sh DESCRIPTION The -.Nm wd +.Nm wd driver supports hard disk controllers which emulate the Western Digital WD100x. This includes standard MFM, RLL, ESDI and IDE controllers. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcl.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcl.4 index 42da0b6c298..a2a205f3556 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcl.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcl.4 @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)dcl.4 5.2 (Berkeley) 3/27/91 -.\" $Id: dcl.4,v 1.2 1998/09/07 16:44:36 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: dcl.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 27, 1991 .Dt DCL 4 hp300 @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ The driver .Ud .Sh BUGS -Breaks received at a faster rate then 1 break every second will be +Breaks received at a faster rate then 1 break every second will be recognized as a single break. .Pp Console use is not supported. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcm.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcm.4 index 177dd43e095..cfc1bf2348c 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcm.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/dcm.4 @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)dcm.4 5.2 (Berkeley) 3/27/91 -.\" $Id: dcm.4,v 1.1.1.1 1995/10/18 08:44:27 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: dcm.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 27, 1991 .Dt DCM 4 hp300 @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Each port on the has a 128 byte input silo and a 16 byte output silo. Interrupts happen on a per character basis unless the interrupt rate for the card reaches 70 interrupts per second at which time the -driver changes to a 16.7ms (60 interrupts per second) polling scheme until +driver changes to a 16.7ms (60 interrupts per second) polling scheme until the interrupt rate drops. .Sh FILES .Bl -tag -width /dev/tty0[0-9a-f] -compact diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/hil.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/hil.4 index 83f5d638fc9..d951b24ed6b 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/hil.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/hil.4 @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)hil.4 5.2 (Berkeley) 3/27/91 -.\" $Id: hil.4,v 1.1.1.1 1995/10/18 08:44:28 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: hil.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 27, 1991 .Dt HIL 4 hp300 @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ is the interface used by the Series 300 computers to connect devices such as keyboards, mice, control knobs, and .Tn ID -modules to the machine. +modules to the machine. .Pp Special files .Pa /dev/hil[1-7] diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/st.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/st.4 index a0b634ec2cf..8efa564204f 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/st.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/st.4 @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)st.4 5.3 (Berkeley) 7/31/91 -.\" $Id: st.4,v 1.3 1999/07/03 02:11:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: st.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd July 31, 1991 .Dt ST 4 hp300 @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ The .Nm driver was written especially to support the Exabyte .Tn EXB-8200 8MM -Cartridge +Cartridge Tape Subsystem. It has several extensions specific to the Exabyte, but should support other tape drives as long has they follow the @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Archive tape drive. The .Nm -tape interface provides a standard tape drive interface +tape interface provides a standard tape drive interface as described in .Xr mtio 4 with the following exceptions: diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/tc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/tc.4 index ebcf90a5789..baaa0ad3e3b 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/tc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.hp300/tc.4 @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)tc.4 5.2 (Berkeley) 3/27/91 -.\" $Id: tc.4,v 1.1.1.1 1995/10/18 08:44:28 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: tc.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 27, 1991 .Dt TC 4 hp300 @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ series 300 Terminal Emulator) defaults. The device can also be used as a graphics output device. .Pp -The +The .Xr ioctl 2 calls supported by the .Bx @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ For more examples of the details on the behavior of the device, see the device dependent source files for the X Window System, in the .Pa /usr/src/new/X/libhp directory. -.Bd -literal +.Bd -literal struct tcboxfb *tc; u_char *Addr, frame_buffer; struct grfinfo gi; diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ahb.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ahb.4 index e144e1b53c9..82810e12320 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ahb.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ahb.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ahb.4,v 1.6 1999/06/05 13:18:35 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ahb.4,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers .\" All rights reserved. @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/apm.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/apm.4 index 5b99465eac4..76d57edd4d9 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/apm.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/apm.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: apm.4,v 1.4 1999/05/16 19:57:02 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: apm.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Marco S. Hyman .\" @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ External power state unknown. .El .Pp The -.Va battery_life +.Va battery_life value contains the estimated percentage of battery life available. 100% indicates a full charge. .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/aria.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/aria.4 index 1bacd0ed6df..769b842d68b 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/aria.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/aria.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: aria.4,v 1.4 1999/06/05 13:18:35 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: aria.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $ .\" aria.4 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Roland C. Dowdeswell .\" All rights reserved. @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN .\" ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE .\" POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. -.\" +.\" .\" .Dd January 21, 1996 .Dt ARIA 4 i386 diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ast.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ast.4 index 0cf87371826..81f06e309c2 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ast.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ast.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ast.4,v 1.4 1996/08/29 12:15:13 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ast.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: ast.4,v 1.7 1996/03/16 00:07:07 thorpej Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 The Regents of the University of California. @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ using this multiplexing protocol was AST. .Pp Each .Nm -device is the master device for up to four +device is the master device for up to four .Nm com devices. The kernel configuration specifies these .Nm com diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/bktr.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/bktr.4 index 18c1cfc1893..b9ba836ffd9 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/bktr.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/bktr.4 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" -.\" $OpenBSD: bktr.4,v 1.2 1999/07/03 02:11:13 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: bktr.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $ .\" $FreeBSD: bktr.4,v 1.1 1998/03/09 10:56:22 jkh Exp $ .\" .Dd January 28, 1998 @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ the Matrox Meteor driver. The bktr driver should support most video cards based on the .Em Brooktree Bt848 Video Capture Chip. .Pp -Specifically, the following cards are known to work: +Specifically, the following cards are known to work: .br .Em Hauppage Wincast TV .br diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/boca.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/boca.4 index 60d38b9eda4..94f65fd4d7e 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/boca.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/boca.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: boca.4,v 1.5 1999/04/02 16:21:37 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: boca.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ communications interfaces. .Pp Each .Nm -device is the master device for up to eight +device is the master device for up to eight .Nm com devices. The kernel configuration specifies these .Nm com diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/fdc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/fdc.4 index ae98c0bf8f4..f0bc8dde49c 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/fdc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/fdc.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: fdc.4,v 1.9 1998/09/01 16:38:22 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: fdc.4,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: fdc.4,v 1.6 1996/03/22 01:55:14 andrew Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Andrew C. Wheadon @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm fdc -driver supports the standard AT floppy +driver supports the standard AT floppy disk controllers. These include standard IDE, MFM, RLL, EIDE, ESDI and SCSI controllers with floppy attachment. .Pp @@ -97,11 +97,11 @@ If the 0x20 bit is on, the drive will be attached even if it was not found by the probe routine. .Sh BUGS The -.Nm fdc +.Nm fdc driver can interfere with other controllers, namely some WD/SMC network controllers fail to work when the probing mechanism -in the -.Nm fdc +in the +.Nm fdc driver probes for a missing second floppy drive. In this case you should try recompiling the kernel replacing the relevant line with diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ie.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ie.4 index 6475884f051..a70a89777db 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ie.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/ie.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ie.4,v 1.5 1999/05/27 18:42:30 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ie.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers .\" All rights reserved. @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ .Dt IE 4 i386 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm ie +.Nm ie .Nd Intel 82586 chip Ethernet device driver .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "ie0 at isa? port 0x360 irq 7 iomem 0xd0000" diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/intro.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/intro.4 index a755b0d8275..80b1a89fb96 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/intro.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/intro.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.9 1999/07/02 20:11:51 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Christopher G. Demetriou .\" All rights reserved. @@ -113,9 +113,9 @@ Adaptec AIC-6260, Adaptec AIC-6360, Adaptec 152x, and SoundBlaster SCSI boards. .It apm advanced power management device interface. .It aria -Sierra Semiconductor Aria 16 sound cards +Sierra Semiconductor Aria 16 sound cards .It ast -multiplexing serial communications card first made by AST. +multiplexing serial communications card first made by AST. .It bktr Brooktree video capture driver .It boca diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/iy.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/iy.4 index f7aea5e561e..88d0d5f815c 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/iy.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/iy.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: iy.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:05 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: iy.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: iy.4,v 1.2 1996/05/23 16:52:39 thorpej Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Herb Peyerl @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ BNC, also known as thin-net UTP, also known as twisted pair .El .Pp -The default port to use is the port the card autodetects at +The default port to use is the port the card autodetects at .Xr ifconfig up time. To choose an alternate port, use the following flag combinations with diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/joy.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/joy.4 index e6c8206805f..58220a143ac 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/joy.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/joy.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: joy.4,v 1.6 1999/04/02 16:21:37 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: joy.4,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Matthieu Herrb .\" All rights reserved. @@ -78,8 +78,8 @@ Returns the current Y offset. .Pp All of these commands take an integer parameter. .Pp -Read() on the file descriptor returns a -.Fa joystick +Read() on the file descriptor returns a +.Fa joystick structure: .Bd -literal -offset indent struct joystick { diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/le.4 index dd1cbace283..1811bdc8160 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/le.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/le.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:57:05 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers .\" All rights reserved. @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ .Dt LE 4 i386 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm le +.Nm le .Nd Ethernet driver for Lance based Ethernet boards .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "le0 at isa? port 0x320 irq 10 drq 7" @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Lance Ethernet chips. The Ethernet cards supported by the interface are: .Pp .Bl -tag -width -offset indet -compact -.It BICC Isolan +.It BICC Isolan .It Novell NE2100 .It Digital DEPCA .El diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/mcd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/mcd.4 index 48409adf42c..4c7e6047614 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/mcd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/mcd.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: mcd.4,v 1.4 1999/06/05 13:18:35 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: mcd.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers .\" All rights reserved. @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/rtfps.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/rtfps.4 index 26683346e79..868076fd462 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/rtfps.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/rtfps.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rtfps.4,v 1.4 1998/07/12 09:55:32 downsj Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: rtfps.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ communications interfaces. .Pp Each .Nm -device is the master device for up to four +device is the master device for up to four .Nm com devices. The kernel configuration specifies these .Nm com diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/scd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/scd.4 index 34079247064..ba0913f2510 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/scd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/scd.4 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" -.\" $OpenBSD: scd.4,v 1.2 1996/08/08 17:11:30 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: scd.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ .Cd "scd0 at isa? port 0x340" .Sh DESCRIPTION The -.Nm scd +.Nm scd driver provides support for Sony CD-ROM drives and controllers. Supported drives are CDU-31A and CDU-33A. .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/sea.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/sea.4 index 694fc8911e4..c5573b15456 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/sea.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/sea.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: sea.4,v 1.5 1999/06/05 13:18:35 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sea.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers .\" All rights reserved. @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/speaker.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/speaker.4 index cd268b45b37..449e6b2c808 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/speaker.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/speaker.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: speaker.4,v 1.6 1999/01/07 22:32:58 niklas Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: speaker.4,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: speaker.4,v 1.9 1998/08/18 08:16:56 augustss Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1993 Christopher G. Demetriou @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ continuous sequence; this array must be terminated by a final member with a zero duration. .Pp The play-string language is modelled on the PLAY statement conventions of -IBM BASIC 2.0. The MB, MF and X primitives of PLAY are not useful in a UNIX +IBM BASIC 2.0. The MB, MF and X primitives of PLAY are not useful in a UNIX environment and are omitted. The `octave-tracking' feature is also new. .Pp There are 84 accessible notes numbered 1-83 in 7 octaves, each running from @@ -109,22 +109,22 @@ T <n> -- Sets the number of quarter notes per minute; default is 120. Musical names for common tempi are: .Bl -column Description Tempo BPM -offset indent .Em Tempo Beats per Minute -very slow Larghissimo +very slow Larghissimo Largo 40-60 Larghetto 60-66 - Grave - Lento + Grave + Lento Adagio 66-76 -slow Adagietto +slow Adagietto Andante 76-108 -medium Andantino +medium Andantino Moderato 108-120 -fast Allegretto +fast Allegretto Allegro 120-168 - Vivace - Veloce + Vivace + Veloce Presto 168-208 -very fast Prestissimo +very fast Prestissimo .El .Pp M[LNS] -- set articulation. MN (N for normal) is the default; the last 1/8th of @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ MS (staccato) 1/4 rest space. Notes (that is, CDEFGAB or N command character groups) may be followed by sustain dots. Each dot causes the note's value to be lengthened by one-half for each one. Thus, a note dotted once is held for 3/2 of its undotted value; -dotted twice, it is held 9/4, and three times would give 27/8. +dotted twice, it is held 9/4, and three times would give 27/8. .Pp Whitespace in play strings is simply skipped and may be used to separate melody sections. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/uha.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/uha.4 index 140eafc9ff8..c839e6a0ec0 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/uha.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/uha.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: uha.4,v 1.5 1999/06/05 13:18:35 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: uha.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers .\" All rights reserved. @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wdc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wdc.4 index 93615e76b99..f1f403a53e9 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wdc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wdc.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: wdc.4,v 1.5 1999/06/05 13:18:35 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: wdc.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers .\" All rights reserved. @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wss.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wss.4 index a31613e66dd..2feed1e43eb 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wss.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wss.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: wss.4,v 1.5 1999/07/06 19:27:37 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: wss.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: wss.4,v 1.8 1998/01/19 20:22:30 augustss Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Michael Long. @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ The configuration file must have bit 1 set in to enable the MAD16 support. This is to avoid potential conflicts with other devices when probing the MAD16 because it requires use of extra I/O ports not in the base port range. -Bit 2 in +Bit 2 in .Cm flags disables the joystick port on MAD16 hardware. .Sh BUGS diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wt.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wt.4 index e9de452e4e2..1477f50ecb7 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wt.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/wt.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: wt.4,v 1.4 1999/06/05 13:18:36 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: wt.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers .\" All rights reserved. @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. @@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ The driver provides support for the following Archive and Wangtek boards: .Pp .Bl -tag -width -offset indent -compact -.It QIC-02 -.It QIC-36 +.It QIC-02 +.It QIC-36 .El .Pp .Sh SEE ALSO diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/xf86.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/xf86.4 index b3bbfbe2d25..9752f537b2f 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.i386/xf86.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.i386/xf86.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: xf86.4,v 1.8 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: xf86.4,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:44 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Matthieu Herrb .\" All rights reserved. @@ -35,21 +35,21 @@ XFree86 aperture driver .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "option APERTURE" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Pa /dev/xf86 driver provides access to the memory and I/O ports of a VGA board for -use by the XFree86 X servers +use by the XFree86 X servers when running with a kernel security level > 0. .Pp The X servers require the use of this driver. .Sh ACCESS CONTROL -Access to the -.Pa /dev/xf86 +Access to the +.Pa /dev/xf86 device is allowed when the sysctl variable -.Va machdep.allowaperture -= 1. This variable (which default value is 0) +.Va machdep.allowaperture += 1. This variable (which default value is 0) can only be manipulated when the security level is <= 0, so it should be -set in +set in .Pa /etc/sysctl.conf . .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr XF86_Accel 1 , @@ -59,17 +59,17 @@ set in .Xr config 8 , .Xr sysctl 8 .Sh HISTORY -.Pa /dev/xf86 +.Pa /dev/xf86 was introduced as a loadable kernel module for NetBSD 0.9C with XFree86 3.1. It was integrated as an in-kernel device on .Ox 2.3 . It is required in order to allow access to I/O ports for all X servers -since +since .Ox 2.4 . .Sh AUTHOR The aperture driver was written by Matthieu Herrb. .Sh BUGS This driver allows access to all addresses above -.Va physmem . +.Va physmem . It should be restricted to the actual address range of the video -memory. +memory. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.mac68k/intro.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.mac68k/intro.4 index c03305f8846..3e7255b977f 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.mac68k/intro.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.mac68k/intro.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:57:08 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: intro.4,v 1.4 1997/03/28 00:29:35 veego Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 Regents of the University of California. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ The .Tn Mac68k .Nm intro man page first appeared in -.Nx +.Nx 1.2 . .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr autoconf 4 , @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ man page first appeared in .Xr config 8 .Sh LIST OF DEVICES The devices listed below are supported in this incarnation of -the system. +the system. Devices are indicated by their functional interface. Not all supported devices are listed. .Bl -tag -width "xxxxxx" -compact -offset indent @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Apple Desktop Bus event interface .It Em ae DP8390-based ethernet interface .It Em asc -Apple Sound Chip +Apple Sound Chip .It Em esp .Tn NCR 53C9x built-in SCSI interface diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.mvme68k/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.mvme68k/le.4 index 132ea088c34..b51f54112d1 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.mvme68k/le.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.mvme68k/le.4 @@ -35,18 +35,18 @@ .\" .\" from: Header: le.4,v 1.2 92/10/13 05:31:33 leres Exp .\" from: @(#)le.4 8.1 (Berkeley) 6/9/93 -.\" $Id: le.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:57:12 alex Exp $ +.\" $Id: le.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 30, 1994 .Dt LE 4 amiga .Os .Sh NAME .Nm le -.Nd Ethernet driver for AMD7990(LANCE)-based boards +.Nd Ethernet driver for AMD7990(LANCE)-based boards .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "le* at zbus0" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the .Tn AMD diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pc532/lpt.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pc532/lpt.4 index b94dc331bdd..d981ceecf8a 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.pc532/lpt.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pc532/lpt.4 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: lpt.4,v 1.4 1998/09/05 17:41:49 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: lpt.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd December 1, 1994 .Dt LPT 4 pc532 @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ This driver provides access to centronics ports. Bit 6 in the minor number selects wether to omit pulling /PRIME low on opens or not. If the minor has bit 5 set, AUTOLINEFEED will be asserted when transferring data to the printer. -Addr and Irq default to 0xffc80030,7 for lpt0 and to 0xffc80034,6 for lpt1. +Addr and Irq default to 0xffc80030,7 for lpt0 and to 0xffc80034,6 for lpt1. .Sh FILES .Bl -tag -width Pa -compact .It Pa /dev/lpt0 diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/asc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/asc.4 index 613d6db6f99..1127fca4a31 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/asc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/asc.4 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" $NetBSD: asc.4,v 1.2 1997/10/13 11:23:41 lukem Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: asc.4,v 1.4 1999/05/16 19:57:12 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: asc.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 6, 1996 .Dt ASC 4 pmax @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ higher-level layer, and the .Nm rz and .Nm tz -devices, which first appeared in +devices, which first appeared in .Bx 4.4 /pmax. It should be re-written to support the .Nm scsibus diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/dc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/dc.4 index 83727b130e0..acac9fb1f21 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/dc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/dc.4 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" $NetBSD: dc.4,v 1.3 1998/02/23 19:46:24 jonathan Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: dc.4,v 1.3 1999/04/02 16:21:37 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: dc.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd February 20, 1998 .Dt DC 4 pmax @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ .Sh NAME .Nm dc .Nd -dc659, dc7085 DZ11-on-a-chip serial communications interface +dc659, dc7085 DZ11-on-a-chip serial communications interface .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "dc0 at ioasic?" .Cd "dc0 at mainbus" @@ -67,11 +67,11 @@ The device is in essence a single-chip clone of the DZ-11. The DZ-11 hardware design severely constrains performance. One small input silo is shared across all input ports. -The +The .Nm dc hardware does not interrupt on modem transitions; instead, they are detected via polling. -Only two lines on a baseboard +Only two lines on a baseboard .Nm dc device have any modem control signals; the other two lines are wired for a keyboard and mouse. @@ -83,9 +83,9 @@ and dialout detection, but without hardware flow control, the .Nm device is prone to overruns when used for serial-line protocols. -The DECstation 5000/200 +The DECstation 5000/200 .Nm -hardware provides full modem control on +hardware provides full modem control on both bulkhead RS-232 ports and is less prone to overrun. .Sh BUGS The 19200 speed on all @@ -99,11 +99,11 @@ at its 19800 speed setting. .Pp The DECstation 5000/200 can set a bit in the system register to allow the -.Nm +.Nm to run at 38400, but this applies to all four lines and disables the 19200 speed on all four lines. This feature is not currently supported. .Pp -The +The .Nm driver should be merged into a single driver supporting the original DZ-11, DZ-32, and Qbus DZV-11 and DZQ-11 clones. @@ -112,5 +112,5 @@ The .Nm driver first appeared in -.Bx 4.4 /pmax. This manual page first appeared in +.Bx 4.4 /pmax. This manual page first appeared in .Nx 1.2 . diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/intro.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/intro.4 index ee240c4035c..3823d1738b0 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/intro.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/intro.4 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" $NetBSD: intro.4,v 1.2 1997/10/13 11:23:47 lukem Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.4 1999/07/02 20:11:51 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd October 13, 1997 .Dt INTRO 4 pmax @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ serial driver for DEC custom four-port serial device (dc7085 DZ-11 clone) on the baseboard of DECstation 2100/31000, 5100, and 5000/200 systems. .It scc serial driver for Zilog SCC asynchronous/synchronous devices on the -baseboard of DECstation 5000-series systems (excluding 5000/200). +baseboard of DECstation 5000-series systems (excluding 5000/200). .It le Ethernet driver for baseboard or TurboChannel option cards. .It ioasic diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/ioasic.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/ioasic.4 index 6d1f896f271..63edcc847fe 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/ioasic.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/ioasic.4 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" $NetBSD: ioasic.4,v 1.4 1997/10/31 02:26:09 jonathan Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: ioasic.4,v 1.5 1999/07/05 03:35:58 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ioasic.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 6, 1996 .Dt IOASIC 4 pmax @@ -63,9 +63,9 @@ Ethernet interface. .Pp The .Nm -is also used for those +is also used for those floppy-disc drive and audio/ISDN hardware -on the Personal DECstation and audio-equipted TC Alphas, where the +on the Personal DECstation and audio-equipted TC Alphas, where the .Nm hardware provides a scatter-gather DMA channel between he 16-bit device and the 32-bit @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Support for scatter-gather DMA eliminates the need for additional copying. A baseboard .Nm asc SCSI adaptor attached to an -.Nm ioasic +.Nm ioasic will give slightly better performance than its .Nm tc counterpart. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/le.4 index 006003874d9..8c746fe0a0a 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/le.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/le.4 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" $NetBSD: le.4,v 1.2 1997/10/31 02:53:46 jonathan Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.4 1999/05/16 19:57:15 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: le.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 6, 1996 .Dt LE 4 pmax @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ driver provides access to a 10Mb/s Ethernet via the Ethernet chip. All .Tn LANCE interfaces on -.Tn DECstations +.Tn DECstations are supported, as are interfaces on .Tn "Alpha AXP" machines with a @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ machines with a bus. .Pp The -.Nm +.Nm driver employs the Address Resolution Protocol described in .Xr arp 4 to map between Internet and Ethernet addresses on the local @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ model 5000/200 baseboard device provides only a BNC connector. The .Nm ioasic -baseboard devices and the +baseboard devices and the .Tn PMAD-AA .Tn TurboChannel option card provide only an AUI port. @@ -93,11 +93,11 @@ option card provide only an AUI port. On all front-ends, performance is impaired by hardware which forces a software copy of packets to and from DMA buffers. The .Nm ioasic -machines and the DECstation 3100 must +machines and the DECstation 3100 must copying packet to and from non-contiguous DMA buffers. -The +The DECstation 5000/200 and the -.Tn PMAD-AA +.Tn PMAD-AA must copy to and from an onboard SRAM DMA buffer. The CPU overhead is noticeable, but all machines can sustain 10Mbit media speed. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/lk201.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/lk201.4 index e6cbff0aa6d..dbe4b23b261 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/lk201.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/lk201.4 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" $NetBSD: lk201.4,v 1.2 1997/10/13 11:23:53 lukem Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: lk201.4,v 1.2 1998/03/09 15:37:23 millert Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: lk201.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 6, 1996 .Dt LK201 4 pmax @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ structure for keypress events and pointer (mouse) events. The .Nm fb driver redirects mouse and keyboard input into this in-kernel structure, and updates the position of a framebuffer cursor sprite to -track the mouse. This is for compatibility with the +track the mouse. This is for compatibility with the .Nm qv QVSS-style software interface used by X11 on DECstation and Vaxstation framebuffers. This design offers significantly better performance diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/px.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/px.4 index 5c06b3d3edd..dacecf87f22 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/px.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/px.4 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" $NetBSD: px.4,v 1.1 1997/11/08 07:27:56 jonathan Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: px.4,v 1.3 1999/04/02 16:21:37 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: px.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd November 11, 1997 .Dt PX 4 pmax @@ -49,12 +49,12 @@ video display option card. The .Nm driver does nothing except remove the requirement to remove -.Tn PMAG-C +.Tn PMAG-C cards in order to boot -.Nx . +.Nx . It offers no support for either raster consoles or X11 servers. -To do either requires using the undocumented packet +To do either requires using the undocumented packet protocol used to talk to the on-board blitter chip. .Pp .Sh SEE ALSO @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ glass-tty raster framebuffer console driver assumes direct bit read/write access to a framebuffer. The .Nm hardware does not provide this. -.Nm rcons +.Nm rcons should be replaced with a driver that allows a character-painting interface as well as direct blitting. .Pp @@ -81,6 +81,6 @@ ABI. Work on this is in progress. .Sh HISTORY The .Nm -driver +driver first appeared in .Nx 1.3 . diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/scc.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/scc.4 index cee8a8b88a1..15c819e4bbb 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/scc.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/scc.4 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" $NetBSD: scc.4,v 1.3 1997/11/03 11:19:21 jonathan Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: scc.4,v 1.2 1998/03/09 15:37:26 millert Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: scc.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 6, 1996 .Dt SCC 4 pmax @@ -71,13 +71,13 @@ On machines with one port like .Tn "Personal DECstations" , the single device is .Pa ttya . -On the -.Tn "5000/1xx" +On the +.Tn "5000/1xx" and .Tn "5000/2xx" , the first serial port (default serial console) is .Pa ttyc -and the second port is +and the second port is .Pa ttya . .Sh HISTORY The @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ tries to hide the hardware mapping, but .Nx does not. Users wanting to use .Tn "Ultrix" -compatible tty names +compatible tty names .Pa /dev/tty0 and .Pa /dev/tty1 diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/sii.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/sii.4 index 21fdfc0fcaa..fb478f0d16c 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/sii.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.pmax/sii.4 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" $NetBSD: sii.4,v 1.2 1997/10/13 11:23:58 lukem Exp $ -.\" $OpenBSD: sii.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:57:15 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sii.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 6, 1996 .Dt SII 4 pmax @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ higher-level layer, and the .Nm rz and .Nm tz -devices, which first appeared in +devices, which first appeared in .Bx 4.4 /pmax. It should be re-written to support the .Nm scsibus diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audioamd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audioamd.4 index ae81f4e58f4..5cd86841e2d 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audioamd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audioamd.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: audioamd.4,v 1.1 1998/07/15 04:42:29 jason Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: audioamd.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net) .\" All rights reserved. @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE -.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ .Cd "audioamd0 at sbus0 slot ? offset ? " Pq "sun4m" .Cd "audio* at audioamd?" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm device uses the .Tn AMD diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audiocs.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audiocs.4 index f866cb17ec9..615993f550d 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audiocs.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/audiocs.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: audiocs.4,v 1.1 1999/06/06 04:48:25 jason Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: audiocs.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1999 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net) .\" All rights reserved. @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE -.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ .Cd "audiocs0 at sbus0 slot ? offset ? " Pq "sun4m" .Cd "audio* at audiocs?" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm device uses the .Tn Crystal Semiconductor diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/be.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/be.4 index 158e5f85d21..9f58bd83909 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/be.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/be.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: be.4,v 1.7 1999/05/16 19:57:16 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: be.4,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net) .\" All rights reserved. @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE -.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) @@ -39,12 +39,12 @@ .Cd "qec* at sbus? slot ? offset ? " Pq "sun4c/sun4m" .Cd "be* at qec? " Pq "sun4c/sun4m" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the 10Mb/s and 100Mb/s (half duplex only) Ethernet networks. -The -.Nm +The +.Nm is found on the Sun 10/100 Mbit Ethernet boards (Sun part number SUNW,501-2655). .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/bwtwo.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/bwtwo.4 index 8a73b7f59f9..62728969188 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/bwtwo.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/bwtwo.4 @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ .\" .\" from: Header: bwtwo.4,v 1.3 94/02/03 20:42:13 leres Exp .\" from: @(#)bwtwo.4 8.2 (Berkeley) 2/16/94 -.\" $Id: bwtwo.4,v 1.4 1999/05/16 19:57:17 alex Exp $ +.\" $Id: bwtwo.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd February 16, 1994 .Dt BWTWO 4 sparc @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ .Cd "bwtwo0 at obio0 addr 0xfb300000 level 4" Pq "sun4/300 in P4 slot" .Cd "bwtwo0 at obio0 addr 0x0b300000 level 4" Pq "sun4/100 in P4 slot" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm is a memory based black and white frame buffer. It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run @@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr cgeight 4 , .Xr cgfour 4 , -.Xr cgfourteen 4 , +.Xr cgfourteen 4 , .Xr cgsix 4 , .Xr cgthree 4 , .Xr cgtwo 4 , -.Xr tcx 4 +.Xr tcx 4 diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgeight.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgeight.4 index 1608572cf32..b9d635c2851 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgeight.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgeight.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: cgeight.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:17 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: cgeight.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: cgeight.4,v 1.2 1997/10/08 22:00:03 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ .Cd "cgeight0 at obio0 addr 0xfb300000 level 4" Pq sun4/300 .Cd "cgeight0 at obio0 addr 0x0b300000 level 4" Pq sun4/100 .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm is a memory based color frame buffer. Its pixel memory can be mapped into a user process address space @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ driver supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr bwtwo 4 , .Xr cgfour 4 , -.Xr cgfourteen 4 , +.Xr cgfourteen 4 , .Xr cgsix 4 , .Xr cgthree 4 , .Xr cgtwo 4 , -.Xr tcx 4 +.Xr tcx 4 diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfour.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfour.4 index 5d00c70cfad..3ed2759b9b6 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfour.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfour.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: cgfour.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:18 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: cgfour.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: cgfour.4,v 1.2 1997/10/08 22:00:05 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ .Cd "cgfour0 at obio0 addr 0xfb300000 level 4" Pq sun4/300 .Cd "cgfour0 at obio0 addr 0x0b300000 level 4" Pq sun4/100 .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm is a memory based color frame buffer with overlay plane. Its pixel memory and control planes can be mapped into a user @@ -64,4 +64,4 @@ driver supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run .Xr cgsix 4 , .Xr cgthree 4 , .Xr cgtwo 4 , -.Xr tcx 4 +.Xr tcx 4 diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfourteen.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfourteen.4 index 07c7f9b37e3..d78a95672ed 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfourteen.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgfourteen.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: cgfourteen.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:18 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: cgfourteen.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: cgfourteen.4,v 1.3 1998/06/11 08:32:20 fair Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The President and Fellows of Harvard College. @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ .\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. .\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software .\" must display the following acknowledgement: -.\" This product includes software developed by the Harvard +.\" This product includes software developed by the Harvard .\" University and its contributors. .\" This product includes software developed by the NetBSD .\" Foundation, Inc. and its contributors. @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .\" CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) .\" ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE .\" POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. -.\" +.\" .\" Based on tcx.4, .\" NetBSD: tcx.4,v 1.2 1996/06/21 22:35:06 pk Exp .\" @@ -50,10 +50,10 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "cgfourteen0 at obio0" Pq "SS10-M and SS20" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm cgfourteen is a memory based color frame buffer, with graphics acceleration and -overlay capabilities. Its pixel memory can be mapped into a user process +overlay capabilities. Its pixel memory can be mapped into a user process address space by using the .Xr mmap 2 @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ The driver operates by default in emulation mode, i.e. in 8-bit unaccelerated mode. This emulation does include support for the hardware cursor present on the -.Nm cgfourteen , +.Nm cgfourteen , however. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr bwtwo 4 , @@ -77,4 +77,4 @@ however. .Xr cgsix 4 , .Xr cgthree 4 , .Xr cgtwo 4 , -.Xr tcx 4 +.Xr tcx 4 diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgsix.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgsix.4 index 63d746d2da4..d3fae38f439 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgsix.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgsix.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: cgsix.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:19 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: cgsix.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: cgsix.4,v 1.4 1998/06/11 08:32:20 fair Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright 1994 @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)cgsix.4 8.1 (Berkeley) 2/16/94 -.\" $Id: cgsix.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:19 alex Exp $ +.\" $Id: cgsix.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd February 16, 1994 .Dt CGSIX 4 sparc @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ .Cd "cgsix0 at obio0 addr 0xfb000000 level 4" Pq sun4/300 P4 .Cd "cgsix0 at obio0 addr 0x0b000000 level 4" Pq sun4/100 P4 .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm cgsix is a memory based color frame buffer. It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run .Xr bwtwo 4 , .Xr cgeight 4 , .Xr cgfour 4 , -.Xr cgfourteen 4 , +.Xr cgfourteen 4 , .Xr cgthree 4 , .Xr cgtwo 4 , .Xr tcx 4 , diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgthree.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgthree.4 index b4336a2b46a..3160e2b2f61 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgthree.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgthree.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: cgthree.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:19 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: cgthree.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: cgthree.4,v 1.4 1998/06/11 08:32:20 fair Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ .\" .\" from: Header: cgthree.4,v 1.3 94/02/03 20:49:52 leres Exp .\" from: @(#)cgthree.4 8.2 (Berkeley) 2/16/94 -.\" $Id: cgthree.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:19 alex Exp $ +.\" $Id: cgthree.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd February 16, 1994 .Dt CGTHREE 4 sparc @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ .Cd "cgthree* at sbus? slot ? offset ?" .Cd "cgthree* at obio0 slot ? offset ?" Pq some sun4m models .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm is a memory based color frame buffer. It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run .Xr bwtwo 4 , .Xr cgeight 4 , .Xr cgfour 4 , -.Xr cgfourteen 4 , +.Xr cgfourteen 4 , .Xr cgsix 4 , .Xr cgtwo 4 , -.Xr tcx 4 +.Xr tcx 4 diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgtwo.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgtwo.4 index 7f370d8f1d9..a9429f56e34 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgtwo.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/cgtwo.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: cgtwo.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:19 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: cgtwo.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:41 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: cgtwo.4,v 1.3 1997/10/08 22:00:08 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "cgtwo* at vmes0 addr 0xff400000 level 4 vect 0xa8" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm cgtwo is a memory based color frame buffer. Its control pixel memory can be mapped into a user process address @@ -62,4 +62,4 @@ driver supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run .Xr cgfourteen 4 , .Xr cgsix 4 , .Xr cgthree 4 , -.Xr tcx 4 +.Xr tcx 4 diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/esp.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/esp.4 index b7d636d1eec..2da7a334fcd 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/esp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/esp.4 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: esp.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:57:19 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: esp.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" -.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project +.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project .\" All rights reserved. .\" .\" @@ -8,11 +8,11 @@ .Dt ESP 4 sparc .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm esp +.Nm esp .Nd ESP NCR 53c94 on-board or SBus SCSI controller .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "dma0 at obio0 addr 0xfa001000 level 4 " Pq sun4/300 -.Cd "esp0 at obio0 addr 0xfa000000 level 4 flags 0xff0f" +.Cd "esp0 at obio0 addr 0xfa000000 level 4 flags 0xff0f" .Cd "" .Cd "dma0 at sbus0 slot ? offset ? " Pq on-board .Cd "esp0 at sbus0 slot ? offset ? flags 0xff0f " Pq sun4c @@ -22,10 +22,10 @@ .Cd "esp* at sbus? slot ? offset ? flags 0xff0f " Pq "two flavours" .Cd "esp* at dma? flags 0xff0f " Pq "depending on model" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm -is an on-board or SBus SCSI controller based on the NCR 53c94 chip, found -on Sun 4/300, sun4c and sun4m workstations. +is an on-board or SBus SCSI controller based on the NCR 53c94 chip, found +on Sun 4/300, sun4c and sun4m workstations. .Sh DEVICE FLAGS .Bl -tag -width speaker -compact .It Bits 0-7 disable disconnect/reselect for the corresponding target @@ -33,10 +33,10 @@ on Sun 4/300, sun4c and sun4m workstations. .It Bits 8-15 disable synchronous negotiation for target "[bit - 8]" .El .Pp -The -.Nm +The +.Nm device flags may be OR'd together to enable any combination of -the features listed above. Targets 4 through 7 typically have +the features listed above. Targets 4 through 7 typically have disconnect/reselect enabled on the premise that tape devices normally have one of these targets. Tape devices should be allowed to disconnect for the SCSI bus to operate acceptably. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/fd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/fd.4 index 7aeb7c573eb..b72048b7a62 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/fd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/fd.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: fd.4,v 1.2 1998/07/13 02:42:17 jason Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: fd.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: fd.4,v 1.4 1997/11/12 00:49:42 mrg Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/hme.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/hme.4 index a2a69ad7969..33f5c1c0767 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/hme.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/hme.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: hme.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:20 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: hme.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net) .\" All rights reserved. @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE -.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ .Cd "nsphy* at mii? phy ? " Pq "sun4c/sun4m" .Cd "qsphy* at mii? phy ? " Pq "sun4c/sun4m" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the 10Mb/s and 100Mb/s Ethernet networks via the .Tn National @@ -51,9 +51,9 @@ or the QS6612 Ethernet MII Transceiver for Category 5 Twisted Pair Cable chip sets. -The -.Nm -is found on the SunSwift and Sun QuadFastEthernet boards. +The +.Nm +is found on the SunSwift and Sun QuadFastEthernet boards. .Pp Each of the host's network addresses is specified at boot time with an diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ie.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ie.4 index 7fa58693632..cded0d5694f 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ie.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ie.4 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ie.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:57:20 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ie.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" -.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project +.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project .\" All rights reserved. .\" .Dd March 9, 1998 @@ -17,15 +17,15 @@ .Cd "ie3 at vmes0 addr 0xff35ff02 level 5 vect 0x77" Pq "VME" .Cd "ie4 at vmes0 addr 0xff2dff02 level 5 vect 0x7c" Pq "VME" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the .Tn Intel 82586 -Ethernet chip set. The -.Nm -is found as an on-board interface on Sun 4/100, and 4/200 workstations. -The +Ethernet chip set. The +.Nm +is found as an on-board interface on Sun 4/100, and 4/200 workstations. +The .Nm also exists as a VME card. .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/intro.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/intro.4 index 76f4c0d9dd0..5f1a57b075d 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/intro.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/intro.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.10 1999/04/18 12:38:12 jason Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: intro.4,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: intro.4,v 1.5 1998/02/06 06:07:00 perry Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Jonathan Stone. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ black and white obio frame buffer .It eeprom Sun non-volatile configuration RAM driver .It esp -NCR53C90 ESP100 (Sun 4/300), +NCR53C90 ESP100 (Sun 4/300), .br ESP100A (sun4c), .br @@ -278,6 +278,6 @@ ROSS Mbus HyperSPARC modules .Sh HISTORY The sparc -.Nm +.Nm first appeared with .Ox 2.3 . diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/kbd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/kbd.4 index f1f93b8f23f..c3850bfb5e9 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/kbd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/kbd.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: kbd.4,v 1.4 1999/05/16 19:57:20 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: kbd.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: kbd.4,v 1.3 1997/11/25 22:15:56 pk Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ mode, while a value of zero will make it return to mode. .It KIOCSKEY Set key station translation. The argument is of type -.Fa "struct kiockey *" +.Fa "struct kiockey *" .Pq see Pa /usr/include/machine/kbio.h No for more details . .It KIOCGKEY Get key station translation. The argument is of type diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/le.4 index f640a6b7c06..41b23dceb97 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/le.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/le.4 @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ .\" .\" from: Header: le.4,v 1.2 92/10/13 05:31:33 leres Exp .\" from: @(#)le.4 8.1 (Berkeley) 6/9/93 -.\" $Id: le.4,v 1.9 1999/05/16 19:57:21 alex Exp $ +.\" $Id: le.4,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 9, 1993 .Dt LE 4 sparc @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ .Cd "le0 at ledma0 " Pq "sun4m onboard" .Cd "le0 at obio0 addr 0xf9000000 level 6 " Pq sun4/300 .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s .Tn Ethernet diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ms.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ms.4 index ba87e48a24e..68ea1a32573 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ms.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/ms.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ms.4,v 1.3 1999/05/16 19:57:21 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ms.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: ms.4,v 1.2 1997/10/08 22:00:12 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qe.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qe.4 index 2b2e6080511..626c05d180c 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qe.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qe.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: qe.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:57:21 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: qe.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net) .\" All rights reserved. @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE -.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) @@ -39,13 +39,13 @@ .Cd "qec* at sbus? slot ? offset ? " Pq "sun4c/sun4m" .Cd "qe* at qec? " Pq "sun4c/sun4m" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to 10Mb/s Ethernet networks via the .Tn AMD Am79C940 (MACE) Ethernet controller. -The -.Nm +The +.Nm is found on the Sun QuadEthernet boards (Sun part number SUNW,595-3198). .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qec.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qec.4 index a42bb33015e..e52c38fb063 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qec.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/qec.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: qec.4,v 1.8 1999/05/16 19:57:22 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: qec.4,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net) .\" All rights reserved. @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE -.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "qec* at sbus? slot ? offset ? " Pq "sun4c/sun4m" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm driver is an sbus controller that can contain either one .Xr be 4 diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/si.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/si.4 index d7d15b9c7bc..1627ac8e3bb 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/si.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/si.4 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: si.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:57:22 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: si.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" -.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project +.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project .\" All rights reserved. .\" .\" @@ -8,15 +8,15 @@ .Dt SI 4 sparc .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm si +.Nm si .Nd NCR 5380 "Sun SCSI 3" VME SCSI controller .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "si0 at vmes0 addr 0xff200000 level 3 vect 0x40 " Pq sun4 .Cd "si0 at vmes0 addr 0xff200000 level 3 vect 0x40 flags 0x07" Pq sun4 .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm -is a VME SCSI controller based on the NCR 5380 chip, found in sun3 and sun4 +is a VME SCSI controller based on the NCR 5380 chip, found in sun3 and sun4 systems with the VME bus. .Sh DEVICE FLAGS .Bl -tag -width speaker -compact @@ -28,8 +28,8 @@ Use DMA completion interrupts Allow disconnect/reconnect .El .Pp -The -.Nm +The +.Nm device flags may be OR'd together to enable any combination of the features listed above. If no flags are specified, the device will use DMA by default. @@ -38,6 +38,6 @@ use DMA by default. .Xr esp 4 , .Xr sw 4 .Sh HISTORY -The +The .Nm -driver first appeared in NetBSD. +driver first appeared in NetBSD. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/spif.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/spif.4 index cb4c12d8025..6fd861c1cac 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/spif.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/spif.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: spif.4,v 1.2 1999/02/04 04:08:55 jason Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: spif.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1999 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net) .\" All rights reserved. @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE -.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ .Cd "stty* at spif? " Pq "sun4c/sun4m" .Cd "sbpp* at spif? " Pq "sun4c/sun4m" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm spif driver provides support for the Sun Serial/Parallel Interface card (Sun part number 501-1931) @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Serial ports Parallel ports .El .Sh SEE ALSO -.Xr read 2 , +.Xr read 2 , .Xr termios 4 , .Xr tty 4 .Sh AUTHORS diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/sw.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/sw.4 index 1bf748024ff..1f0f7b65b5a 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/sw.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/sw.4 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: sw.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:57:22 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sw.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" -.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project +.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project .\" All rights reserved. .\" .\" @@ -8,17 +8,17 @@ .Dt SW 4 sparc .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm sw +.Nm sw .Nd NCR 5380 "SCSI Weird" Sun 4/100 on-board SCSI controller .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "sw0 at obio0 addr 0x0a000000 level 3" Pq sun4/100 .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm -is the Sun 4/100 on-board SCSI controller based on the NCR 5380 chip, found -only on Sun 4/100 workstations. The -.Nm -driver is actually implemented as part of the +is the Sun 4/100 on-board SCSI controller based on the NCR 5380 chip, found +only on Sun 4/100 workstations. The +.Nm +driver is actually implemented as part of the .Xr si 4 driver. .Sh DEVICE FLAGS @@ -31,19 +31,19 @@ Use DMA completion interrupts Allow disconnect/reconnect .El .Pp -The -.Nm +The +.Nm device flags may be OR'd together to enable any combination of the features listed above. If no flags are specified, the device will use polled DMA by default. .Sh BUGS -The -.Nm +The +.Nm driver only supports polled DMA at this time. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr esp 4 , .Xr si 4 .Sh HISTORY -The +The .Nm -driver first appeared in NetBSD. +driver first appeared in NetBSD. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/tcx.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/tcx.4 index 0c07346a87a..ad6d16e85bd 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/tcx.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/tcx.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: tcx.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:23 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: tcx.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: tcx.4,v 1.3 1997/10/08 22:00:14 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "tcx* at sbus? slot ? offset ?" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm tcx is a memory based color frame buffer, with graphics acceleration and overlay capabilities. Its control registers, colour lookup table and diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xbox.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xbox.4 index f97f15cdbad..f34916bdb2d 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xbox.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xbox.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: xbox.4,v 1.1 1999/04/18 12:36:58 jason Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: xbox.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:43 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1999 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net) .\" All rights reserved. @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE -.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ .Cd "xbox* at sbus? slot ? offset ? " Pq "sun4c/sun4m" .Cd "sbus* at xbox?" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm driver provides support for the Sun SBus Expansion Subsystem. This device consists of an SBus card and a chassis which has diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xd.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xd.4 index 4a35b48e683..162c3e92bb7 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xd.4 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: xd.4,v 1.2 1998/03/08 01:16:09 johns Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: xd.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" -.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project +.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project .\" All rights reserved. .\" .\" @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ .Dt XD 4 sparc .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm xd +.Nm xd .Nd Xylogics 753 or 7053 VME SMD disk controller driver .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "xdc0 at vmel0 addr 0xffffee80 level 3 vect 0x44" Pq sun4 @@ -17,17 +17,17 @@ .Cd "xdc3 at vmel0 addr 0xffffeeb0 level 3 vect 0x47" Pq sun4 .Cd "xd* at xdc? drive ? " Pq sun4 .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm is a Xylogics 753 or 7053 SMD disk controller found on sun4 systems with the VME bus. The Xylogics 753 and 7053 are programmed the same way, but are different sizes. The 753 is a 6U VME card, while the 7053 is a 9U -VME card. +VME card. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr xy 4 .Sh HISTORY -The +The .Nm -driver first appeared in NetBSD and was written by +driver first appeared in NetBSD and was written by .br Charles D. Cranor. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xy.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xy.4 index 9984412ebf0..2086817d231 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xy.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/xy.4 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: xy.4,v 1.2 1998/03/08 01:16:11 johns Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: xy.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" -.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project +.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project .\" All rights reserved. .\" .\" @@ -8,22 +8,22 @@ .Dt XY 4 sparc .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm xy +.Nm xy .Nd Xylogics 450 or 451 VME SMD disk controller driver .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "xyc0 at vmes0 addr 0xffffee40 level 3 vect 0x48" Pq sun4 .Cd "xyc1 at vmes0 addr 0xffffee48 level 3 vect 0x49" Pq sun4 .Cd "xy* at xyc? drive ? " Pq sun4 .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm is a Xylogics 450/451 SMD disk controller found on sun4 systems with -the VME bus. +the VME bus. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr xd 4 .Sh HISTORY -The +The .Nm -driver first appeared in NetBSD and was written by +driver first appeared in NetBSD and was written by .br Charles D. Cranor. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/zs.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/zs.4 index a5c0b447bbc..f4733a6aa8a 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/zs.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sparc/zs.4 @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: zs.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:23 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: zs.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:42 aaron Exp $ .\" -.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project +.\" Copyright (c) 1998 The OpenBSD Project .\" All rights reserved. .\" .\" @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ .Dt ZS 4 sparc .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm zs +.Nm zs .Nd Zilog 8530 (ZSCC) serial communications driver .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "zs0 at mainbus0 " Pq sun4c @@ -21,15 +21,15 @@ .Cd "zs1 at obio0 addr 0x00000000 level 12 flags 0x103" Pq sun4/100 .Cd "zs2 at obio0 addr 0xe0000000 level 12 flags 0x103" Pq sun4/300 .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm is a Zilog 8530 serial interface chip used in Sun workstations. -The Zilog 8530 provides two input/output channels per instance. +The Zilog 8530 provides two input/output channels per instance. Most Sun workstations include two of these interfaces. One of the interfaces is hardwired for use by the keyboard and mouse attached to -the workstation console. +the workstation console. The remaining additional -.Nm +.Nm interfaces provide RS-423 and RS-232 serial ports for general purpose use. .Pp @@ -39,13 +39,13 @@ driver supports all of the standard .Xr tty 4 ioctl calls. The status of the DTR, RTS, CTS, and DCD signals can be queried with -TIOCMGET command, but, due to limitations in the hardware, +TIOCMGET command, but, due to limitations in the hardware, only the DTR and RTS signals can be modified with TIOCMSET, TIOCMBIC, and TIOCMBIS .Xr ioctl 2 commands. .Sh BUGS -The +The .Nm driver now supports cua minor devices, but with this known deficiency in the simultaneous outgoing/incoming aspect of the driver: @@ -58,9 +58,9 @@ prevents the cua device from being re-opened. .Xr ms 4 , .Xr tty 4 .Sh HISTORY -The +The .Nm -driver first appeared in +driver first appeared in .Bx 4.4 . Support for the TIOCM* ioctl's appeared in .Ox 2.3 . diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/bwtwo.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/bwtwo.4 index be67b7fd38e..21d33550086 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/bwtwo.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/bwtwo.4 @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "bwtwo0 at obmem0 addr ?" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm is a memory based black and white frame buffer. It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run X11. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgfour.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgfour.4 index 4644f024194..a2a33429ac3 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgfour.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgfour.4 @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "cgfour0 at obmem0 addr ?" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm is a memory based color frame buffer. It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run X11. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgtwo.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgtwo.4 index f6cdb09db45..d809db93f0d 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgtwo.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/cgtwo.4 @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "cgtwo0 at vmes0 addr 0xff400000 level 4 vect 0xA8" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm is a memory based color frame buffer. It supports the minimal ioctl's needed to run X11. diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/ie.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/ie.4 index 04fdad6fc5b..e2f9b632bd4 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/ie.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/ie.4 @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ .Cd "ie0 at obio0 addr ? level ?" .Cd "ie1 at vmes0 addr 0xffe88000 level 3 vect 0x75" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the .Tn Intel diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/le.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/le.4 index 956674aef5d..573d931725c 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/le.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.sun3/le.4 @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Cd "le* at obio0 addr ? level ?" .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm interface provides access to the 10 Mb/s Ethernet network via the .Tn AMD diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.vax/mtio.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.vax/mtio.4 index 659aaca8847..18b60e9aba8 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.vax/mtio.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.vax/mtio.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: mtio.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:32 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: mtio.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: mtio.4,v 1.4 1996/03/03 17:13:54 thorpej Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991 The Regents of the University of California. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ When the device last number is between .Em 0-7 the device will operate at 800 .Tn BPI -(or its lowest density), between +(or its lowest density), between .Em 8-15 it will operate at 1600 .Tn BPI diff --git a/share/man/man4/man4.vax/tmscp.4 b/share/man/man4/man4.vax/tmscp.4 index 7e8a1b8f997..8284d1ff4fe 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/man4.vax/tmscp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/man4.vax/tmscp.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: tmscp.4,v 1.5 1999/05/16 19:57:35 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: tmscp.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:40 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: tmscp.4,v 1.4 1996/03/03 17:14:06 thorpej Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1991 Regents of the University of California. @@ -55,14 +55,14 @@ such as the .Tn TU81 and the .Tn TK50 -provide a standard tape drive interface +provide a standard tape drive interface as described in .Xr mtio 4 . The controller communicates with the host through a packet oriented protocol. Consult the file .Aq Pa vax/tmscp.h -for a detailed +for a detailed description of this protocol. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS .Bl -diag diff --git a/share/man/man4/midi.4 b/share/man/man4/midi.4 index 2f52897b8a3..e8e18126f88 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/midi.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/midi.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: midi.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:56:30 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: midi.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: midi.4,v 1.4 1998/08/22 14:45:35 augustss Exp $ .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS @@ -73,13 +73,13 @@ a simple patchboard for MIDI devices. For example, a MIDI keyboard could be connected to a synthesizer by the command .Cd "cat -u /dev/rmidi1 >/dev/rmidi2" .Pp -The +The .Pa /dev/music device is a MIDI sequencer device. Data sent to and from this device not only contains the information sent to the MIDI device, but also timing information. The kernel will make sure that data is sent to the physical device at the indicated time. The sequencer device -uses the +uses the .Pa /dev/midiN devices internally and they are unavailable when used by the sequencer. .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man4/mtdphy.4 b/share/man/man4/mtdphy.4 index e3473451170..82efc304a96 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/mtdphy.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/mtdphy.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: mtdphy.4,v 1.2 1999/06/05 13:18:34 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: mtdphy.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net) .\" All rights reserved. @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE -.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, +.\" DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, .\" INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES .\" (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR .\" SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) diff --git a/share/man/man4/mtio.4 b/share/man/man4/mtio.4 index a4786f5eaf0..94e980fb742 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/mtio.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/mtio.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: mtio.4,v 1.4 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: mtio.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: mtio.4,v 1.4 1996/03/03 17:13:54 thorpej Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991 The Regents of the University of California. @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ When the device last number is between .Em 0-7 the device will operate at 800 .Tn BPI -(or its lowest density), between +(or its lowest density), between .Em 8-15 it will operate at 1600 .Tn BPI diff --git a/share/man/man4/ncr.4 b/share/man/man4/ncr.4 index c3f5dbeac99..3ab132e30e1 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/ncr.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/ncr.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ncr.4,v 1.2 1999/05/16 19:56:31 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ncr.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 James A. Jegers .\" All rights reserved. @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. .\" 2. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. diff --git a/share/man/man4/ne.4 b/share/man/man4/ne.4 index cdb238ff238..43afd9aae22 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/ne.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/ne.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ne.4,v 1.2 1999/06/05 13:18:34 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ne.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:46 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: ne.4,v 1.4 1998/02/22 05:21:20 enami Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. diff --git a/share/man/man4/netintro.4 b/share/man/man4/netintro.4 index d622cde32f1..aac58f3d305 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/netintro.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/netintro.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: netintro.4,v 1.14 1999/07/02 20:11:49 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: netintro.4,v 1.15 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: netintro.4,v 1.4 1995/10/19 08:03:40 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1991, 1993 @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ All network protocols are associated with a specific .Em protocol family . A protocol family provides basic services to the protocol implementation to allow it to function within a specific -network environment. These services may include -packet fragmentation and reassembly, routing, addressing, and +network environment. These services may include +packet fragmentation and reassembly, routing, addressing, and basic transport. A protocol family may support multiple methods of addressing, though the current protocol implementations do not. A protocol family is normally comprised of a number @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ of protocols, one per .Xr socket 2 type. It is not required that a protocol family support all socket types. A protocol family may contain multiple -protocols supporting the same socket abstraction. +protocols supporting the same socket abstraction. .Pp A protocol supports one of the socket abstractions detailed in .Xr socket 2 . @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ certain interfaces such as the loopback interface, .Xr lo 4 , do not. .Pp -The following +The following .Xr ioctl calls may be used to manipulate network interfaces. The @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ The is made on a socket (typically of type .Dv SOCK_DGRAM ) in the desired domain. -Most of the requests supported in earlier releases +Most of the requests supported in earlier releases take an .Ar ifreq structure as its parameter. This structure has the form @@ -294,10 +294,10 @@ the address family in which the original socket was opened. .It Dv SIOCGIFCONF Get interface configuration list. This request takes an .Ar ifconf -structure (see below) as a value-result parameter. The +structure (see below) as a value-result parameter. The .Ar ifc_len field should be initially set to the size of the buffer -pointed to by +pointed to by .Ar ifc_buf . On return it will contain the length, in bytes, of the configuration list. Alternately, if the diff --git a/share/man/man4/ns.4 b/share/man/man4/ns.4 index 632a04abf1a..ca3c59a2420 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/ns.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/ns.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ns.4,v 1.5 1999/06/05 13:18:32 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ns.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: ns.4,v 1.3 1994/11/30 16:22:26 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993 @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ protocol family is a collection of protocols layered atop the .Em Internet Datagram Protocol .Pq Tn IDP -transport layer, and using the Xerox +transport layer, and using the Xerox .Tn NS address formats. The @@ -67,13 +67,13 @@ entering, (or with toggling kernel variable, additionally leaving) the local host. .Sh ADDRESSING .Tn NS -addresses are 12 byte quantities, consisting of a +addresses are 12 byte quantities, consisting of a 4 byte Network number, a 6 byte Host number and a 2 byte port number, all stored in network standard format. (on the .Tn VAX these are word and byte reversed; on the -.Tn SUN +.Tn SUN they are not reversed). The include file .Aq Pa netns/ns.h diff --git a/share/man/man4/nsip.4 b/share/man/man4/nsip.4 index 456f277a4db..ca886d0ade5 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/nsip.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/nsip.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: nsip.4,v 1.4 1999/06/05 13:18:32 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: nsip.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: nsip.4,v 1.3 1994/11/30 16:22:27 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993 @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ should be a clue to remove that partner. This was intended to postpone the necessity of rewriting reverse .Tn ARP -for the +for the .Xr en 4 device, and to allow passing .Tn XNS diff --git a/share/man/man4/opl.4 b/share/man/man4/opl.4 index 6437aee5dd7..e869f43a573 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/opl.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/opl.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: opl.4,v 1.1 1999/01/07 22:32:57 niklas Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: opl.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: opl.4,v 1.3 1998/09/08 11:59:48 augustss Exp $ .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS .\" ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED .\" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR -.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS +.\" PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS .\" BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR .\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF .\" SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS diff --git a/share/man/man4/options.4 b/share/man/man4/options.4 index 61fcfd83788..26bec57094b 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/options.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/options.4 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: options.4,v 1.36 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: options.4,v 1.37 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: options.4,v 1.21 1997/06/25 03:13:00 thorpej Exp $ .\" -.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Theo de Raadt +.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Theo de Raadt .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Todd Miller .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Gene Skonicki .\" Copyright (c) 1996 @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ It also enables support for some older pre BSD 4.4 socket calls. .It Cd option DDB Compiles in a kernel debugger for diagnosing kernel problems. See .Xr ddb 4 -for details. +for details. .Em NOTE: not available on all architectures. .It Cd option KGDB @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ using the .Dq remote target feature of gdb. See .Xr gdb 1 -for details. +for details. .Em NOTE: not available on all architectures. .It Cd makeoptions DEBUG="-g" @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ is useful for debugging kernel crash dumps with gdb. Note that .Xr gdb Ns 's .Fl k -flag +flag is obsolete and should not be used. Instead, the kernel can be debugged by starting .Xr gdb @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ This also turns on Turns on miscellaneous kernel debugging. Since options are turned into preprocessor defines (see above), .Em option DEBUG -is equivalent to doing a +is equivalent to doing a .Em #define DEBUG throughout the kernel. Much of the kernel has .Em #ifdef DEBUG @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ code will cause the kernel to panic if corruption of internal data structures is detected. .It Cd option GPROF Adds code to the kernel for kernel profiling with -.Xr kgmon 8 . +.Xr kgmon 8 . .It Cd makeoptions PROF="-pg" The -pg flag causes the kernel to be compiled with support for profiling. The @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Includes code implementing the Second Extended File System .Em ( EXT2FS ) . This is the most commonly used file system on the Linux operating system, and is provided here for compatibility. Some specific features of -.Em EXT2FS +.Em EXT2FS like the "behavior on errors" are not implemented. This file system can't be used with uid_t or gid_t values greater than 65535. Also, the filesystem will not function correctly on architectures with differing @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ Include the client side of the Although the bulk of the code implementing .Em NFS is kernel based, several user level daemons are needed for it to -work. See +work. See .Xr mount_nfs 8 and .Xr nfsiod 8 @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ for details. Includes support for the .Tn MS-DOS FAT file system. -The kernel also implements the +The kernel also implements the .Tn Windows 95 extensions which permit the use of longer, mixed-case file names. See @@ -367,10 +367,10 @@ Include the server side of the Although the bulk of the code implementing .Em NFS is kernel based, several user level daemons are needed for it to -work. See +work. See .Xr mountd 8 and -.Xr nfsd 8 +.Xr nfsd 8 for details. .It Cd option QUOTA Enables kernel support for file system quotas. See @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ for details. Note that quotas only work on .Dq ffs file systems, although .Xr rpc.rquotad 8 -permits them to be accessed over +permits them to be accessed over .Em NFS . .It Cd option FIFO Adds support for @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ the namei cache. .It Cd option EXT2FS_SYSTEM_FLAGS This option changes the behavior of the APPEND and IMMUTABLE flags for a file on an -.Em EXT2FS +.Em EXT2FS filesystem. Without this option, the superuser or owner of the file can set and clear them. With this option, only the superuser can set them, and they can't be cleared if the securelevel is greater than 0. @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ each component buffer. It defaults to 8. The kernel memory allocator, .Xr malloc 9 , will keep statistics on its performance if this option is enabled. -Unfortunately, this option therefore essentially disables +Unfortunately, this option therefore essentially disables .Fn MALLOC and .Fn FREE @@ -496,9 +496,9 @@ option. .Ss Networking Options .Bl -ohang .It Cd option GATEWAY -Enables +Enables .Em IPFORWARDING -and (on most ports) increases the size of +and (on most ports) increases the size of .Em NMBCLUSTERS. In general, .Em GATEWAY @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ BSD networking stack keeps network packets in a linked list, or chain, of kernel buffer objects called mbufs. The system provides larger mbuf clusters as an optimization for large packets, instead of using long chains for large packets. The mbuf cluster size, or -.Em MCLBYTES, +.Em MCLBYTES, must be a power of two, and is computed as two raised to the power .Em MCLSHIFT. On systems with Ethernet network adaptors, @@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ use by .It Cd option NETATALK Include kernel support for the AppleTalk family of protocols. This suite of supporting code is sometimes called -.Em netatalk +.Em netatalk support. .It Cd option TCP_COMPAT_42 Use of this option is @@ -617,14 +617,14 @@ together with .Em TCP_NEWRENO . .It Cd option TCP_FACK Turns on forward acknowledgements allowing a more precise estimate of -outstanding data during the fast recovery phase by using -.Em SACK +outstanding data during the fast recovery phase by using +.Em SACK information. This option can be used together with .Em TCP_SACK . .It Cd option TCP_SIGNATURE Turns on support for the TCP MD5 Signature option (RFC 2385). This is used by Internet backdone routers to provide per-packet authentication for the TCP -packets used to communicate BGP routing information. You will also need a +packets used to communicate BGP routing information. You will also need a routing daemon that supports this option in order to actually use it. .It Cd option IPFILTER This option enables the IP filtering on the packet level using @@ -642,7 +642,7 @@ This option turns on .Xr pcap 3 based filtering for ppp connections. This option is used by .Xr pppd 8 -which needs to be compiled with +which needs to be compiled with .Em PPP_FILTER defined (the current default). .It Cd option IPSEC @@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ for the default. .It Cd option SWAPPAGER Turns on paging. (To be specific, this enables the virtual memory module responsible for handling page faults for -.Dq anonymous +.Dq anonymous objects (i.e. BSS pages)). .Em MANDATORY -- the system cannot actually run without this @@ -741,7 +741,7 @@ for exact default information. Increase this value if messages appear. .It Cd option NKMEMCLUSTERS=value Size of kernel malloc area in CLBYTES-sized logical pages. This area -is covered by the kernel submap +is covered by the kernel submap .Em kmem_map . See .Pa /usr/include/machine/param.h diff --git a/share/man/man4/pcmcia.4 b/share/man/man4/pcmcia.4 index 1556b308e1e..4415275aa5c 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/pcmcia.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/pcmcia.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pcmcia.4,v 1.3 1999/06/05 13:18:34 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pcmcia.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: pcmcia.4,v 1.4 1998/06/07 09:10:30 enami Exp $ .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. .\" All rights reserved. diff --git a/share/man/man4/pty.4 b/share/man/man4/pty.4 index d4f62cf977f..f7fad90b11b 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/pty.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/pty.4 @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ device. The slave device provides to a process an interface identical to that described in .Xr tty 4 . -However, whereas all other devices which provide the +However, whereas all other devices which provide the interface described in .Xr tty 4 have a hardware device of some sort behind them, the slave @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ is given in the specification, that number of pseudo terminal pairs are configured; the default count is 32. .Pp -The following +The following .Xr ioctl 2 calls apply only to pseudo terminals: .Bl -tag -width TIOCREMOTE @@ -88,12 +88,12 @@ or by typing .Ql ^S ) . Takes no parameter. .It Dv TIOCPKT -Enable/disable +Enable/disable .Em packet mode. Packet mode is enabled by specifying (by reference) a nonzero parameter and disabled by specifying (by reference) a zero parameter. When applied to the master side of a pseudo -terminal, each subsequent +terminal, each subsequent .Xr read from the terminal will return data written on the slave part of the pseudo terminal preceded by a zero byte (symbolically @@ -113,11 +113,11 @@ whenever output to the terminal is stopped a la .It Dv TIOCPKT_START whenever output to the terminal is restarted. .It Dv TIOCPKT_DOSTOP -whenever +whenever .Em t_stopc is .Ql ^S -and +and .Em t_startc is .Ql ^Q . @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ structure. .Pp This is used by .Xr telnetd 8 -to implement TELNET "line mode" - it allows the +to implement TELNET "line mode" - it allows the .Xr telnetd 8 to detect .Xr tty 4 @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ This mode is enabled from the master side of a pseudo terminal by specifying (by reference) a nonzero parameter and disabled by specifying (by reference) a zero parameter. -Each subsequent +Each subsequent .Xr read from the master side will return data written on the slave part of the pseudo terminal preceded by a zero byte, diff --git a/share/man/man4/raid.4 b/share/man/man4/raid.4 index 54882d1fcc1..98a977f5757 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/raid.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/raid.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: raid.4,v 1.5 1999/07/08 09:41:43 hugh Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: raid.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. @@ -38,29 +38,29 @@ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Carnegie-Mellon University. .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Author: Mark Holland -.\" +.\" .\" Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and .\" its documentation is hereby granted, provided that both the copyright .\" notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of the .\" software, derivative works or modified versions, and any portions .\" thereof, and that both notices appear in supporting documentation. -.\" +.\" .\" CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS "AS IS" .\" CONDITION. CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF ANY KIND .\" FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE. -.\" +.\" .\" Carnegie Mellon requests users of this software to return to -.\" +.\" .\" Software Distribution Coordinator or Software.Distribution@CS.CMU.EDU .\" School of Computer Science .\" Carnegie Mellon University .\" Pittsburgh PA 15213-3890 -.\" +.\" .\" any improvements or extensions that they make and grant Carnegie the .\" rights to redistribute these changes. -.\" +.\" .Dd November 9, 1998 .Dt RAID 4 .Os @@ -75,20 +75,20 @@ The driver provides RAID 0, 1, 4, and 5 (and more!) capabilities. This document assumes that the reader has at least some familiarity with RAID and RAID concepts. The reader is also assumed to know how to configure -disks and pseudo-devices into kernels, how to generate kernels, and how +disks and pseudo-devices into kernels, how to generate kernels, and how to partition disks. .Pp RAIDframe provides a number of different RAID levels including: .Bl -tag -width indent -.It RAID 0 +.It RAID 0 provides simple data striping across the components. -.It RAID 1 +.It RAID 1 provides mirroring. -.It RAID 4 +.It RAID 4 provides data striping across the components, with parity stored on a dedicated drive (in this case, the last component). -.It RAID 5 -provides data striping across the components, with parity +.It RAID 5 +provides data striping across the components, with parity distributed across all the components. .El .Pp @@ -108,8 +108,8 @@ reconstructed from the data and parity present on the other components. This results in much slower data accesses, but does mean that a failure need not bring the system to a complete halt. .Pp -The driver supports -.Sq hot spares , +The driver supports +.Sq hot spares , disks which are on-line, but are not actively used in an existing filesystem. Should a disk fail, the driver is capable of reconstructing the failed disk onto a hot spare. @@ -122,39 +122,39 @@ the reconstructed data from the hot spare to the previously failed If a component cannot be detected when the RAID device is configured, that component will be simply marked as 'failed'. .Pp -The user-land utility for doing all +The user-land utility for doing all .Nm configuration and other operations -is +is .Xr raidctl 8 . -For any of the RAID flavours which have parity data, +For any of the RAID flavours which have parity data, .Xr raidctl 8 -must be used with the +must be used with the .Fl r option to re-write the data when either a) a new RAID device is brought up for the first time or b) after an un-clean shutdown of a -RAID device. By performing this on-demand recomputation of all parity -before doing a +RAID device. By performing this on-demand recomputation of all parity +before doing a .Xr fsck 8 or a .Xr newfs 8 filesystem integrity and parity integrity can be ensured. It bears -repeating again that parity recomputation is +repeating again that parity recomputation is .Em required before any filesystems are created or used on the RAID device. If the parity is not correct, then missing data cannot be correctly recovered. .Pp -RAID levels may be combined in a hierarchical fashion. For example, a RAID 0 -device can be constructed out of a number of RAID 5 devices (which, in turn, +RAID levels may be combined in a hierarchical fashion. For example, a RAID 0 +device can be constructed out of a number of RAID 5 devices (which, in turn, may be constructed out of the physical disks, or of other RAID devices). .Pp -At the time of this writing, it is +At the time of this writing, it is .Em imperative -that drives be +that drives be .Sq nailed down at their respective addresses (i.e. not left free-floating, where a -drive with SCSI ID of 4 can end up as /dev/sd0c). Consider a system -with three SCSI drives at SCSI IDs 4, 5, and 6, and which map to +drive with SCSI ID of 4 can end up as /dev/sd0c). Consider a system +with three SCSI drives at SCSI IDs 4, 5, and 6, and which map to components /dev/sd0e, /dev/sd1e, and /dev/sd2e. If the drive with SCSI ID 5 fails, and the system reboots, the old /dev/sd2e will show up as /dev/sd1e. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ actually become /dev/sd1e. Hopefully this will change within a few days of this writing with the addition of MD5 checksums to each of the components. .Pp -The first step to using the +The first step to using the .Nm driver is to ensure that it is suitably configured in the kernel. This is done by adding a line similar to: @@ -172,12 +172,12 @@ done by adding a line similar to: pseudo-device raid 4 # RAIDframe disk device .Ed .Pp -to the kernel configuration file. The +to the kernel configuration file. The .Sq count argument ( .Sq 4 , in this case), specifies the number of RAIDframe drivers to configure. -At the time of this writing, 4 is the MAXIMUM of +At the time of this writing, 4 is the MAXIMUM of .Nm devices which are supported. This will change as soon as kernel threads are available. @@ -187,17 +187,17 @@ In all cases the partitions of the disks .Pa must not be combined. Rather, each component parition should be offset by at least one -cylinder from the beginning of that component disk. This ensures that +cylinder from the beginning of that component disk. This ensures that the disklabels for the component disks do not conflict with the -disklabel for the +disklabel for the .Nm device. As well, all component paritions must be of the type .Dv FS_BSDFFS . .Pp -A more detailed treatment of actually using a +A more detailed treatment of actually using a .Nm -device is found in +device is found in .Xr raidctl 8 . It is highly recommended that the steps to reconstruct, copyback, and re-compute parity are well understood by the system administrator(s) @@ -211,11 +211,11 @@ data loss due to component failure. However the loss of two components of a RAID 4 or 5 system, or the loss of a single component of a RAID 0 system, will result in the entire filesystems on that RAID device being lost. -RAID is +RAID is .Em not a substitute for good backup practices. .Pp -Recomputation of parity +Recomputation of parity .Em must be performed whenever there is a chance that it may have been compromised. This includes after system crashes, or before a RAID @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ device has been used for the first time. Failure to keep parity correct will be catastrophic should a component ever fail -- it is better to use RAID 0 and get the additional space and speed, than it is to use parity, but not keep the parity correct. At least with RAID -0 there is no perception of increased data security. +0 there is no perception of increased data security. .Pp .Sh FILES .Bl -tag -width /dev/XXrXraidX -compact @@ -240,16 +240,16 @@ device special files. .Xr newfs 8 , .Xr raidctl 8 .Sh HISTORY -The +The .Nm -driver in +driver in .Ox is a port of RAIDframe, a framework for rapid prototyping of RAID structures developed by the folks at the Parallel Data Laboratory at Carnegie Mellon University (CMU). RAIDframe, as originally distributed by CMU, provides a RAID simulator for a number of different architectures, and a user-level device driver and a kernel device -driver for Digital Unix. The +driver for Digital Unix. The .Nm driver is a kernelized version of RAIDframe v1.1. .Pp @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ RAIDframe is found in the paper "RAIDframe: A Rapid Prototyping Tool for RAID Systems", by William V. Courtright II, Garth Gibson, Mark Holland, LeAnn Neal Reilly, and Jim Zelenka, and published by the Parallel Data Laboratory of Carnegie Mellon University. -The +The .Nm driver first appeared in .Nx 1.4 diff --git a/share/man/man4/rln.4 b/share/man/man4/rln.4 index 3c835a0f2db..76c1263ee9f 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/rln.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/rln.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rln.4,v 1.2 1999/07/07 10:50:10 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: rln.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:49 aaron Exp $ .Dd 2 April, 1999 .Dt RLN 4 .Os @@ -28,17 +28,17 @@ device driver supports at least the following cards: Digital RoamAbout FH 2400 PC-Card .El .Pp -The Proxim RangeLAN2 air protocol is incompatible with the older +The Proxim RangeLAN2 air protocol is incompatible with the older RangeLAN(1) cards, Lucent Technologies' WaveLan cards, and with the newer 802.11 cards in general. .Pp -The RangeLAN2 cards communicate using radio signals near the 2.4GHz +The RangeLAN2 cards communicate using radio signals near the 2.4GHz part of the spectrum. -This frequency happens to co-incide with that of strong harmonics emitted +This frequency happens to co-incide with that of strong harmonics emitted by common consumer microwave ovens. You can guess the rest. .\" .Sh CONFIGURATION -.\" Because there is no reliable way to determine between -.\" the different types of cards listed above, +.\" Because there is no reliable way to determine between +.\" the different types of cards listed above, .\" the following flags can be specified in the kernel config file: .\" .Pp .\" .Bl -tag -offset indent -width 10n -compact @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ another. .It "rln0: lost sync" Synchronisation was lost. Check for microwave ovens being used. .It "rln0: nothing to sync to; now master" -The card was unsuccessful in (re-)synchronising with any other unit, +The card was unsuccessful in (re-)synchronising with any other unit, and was configured as an alternate master. .It "rln0: packet too big (? > ?)" The card generate a message bigger than the maximum size allowable for Ethernet. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ run. Check the cpu load. .It "rln0: lost message ?? seq ?" An expected response to the command did not appear within a reasonable time. .It "rln0: unknown RangeLAN2 wireless network card" -The card model was not matched in the known-card tables. +The card model was not matched in the known-card tables. Please send output of .Xr dmesg 8 and a description of your card in using @@ -102,11 +102,11 @@ so that this can be rectified. .Xr ifconfig 8 , .Pa "http://www.proxim.com/" .Sh AUTHOR -David Leonard, +David Leonard, Dept Computer Science and Electrical Engineering, University of Queensland .Pa "<david.leonard@csee.uq.edu.au>" .Pp -Information and ideas gleaned from disassembly of Dave Koberstein's +Information and ideas gleaned from disassembly of Dave Koberstein's .Pa "<davek@komacke.com>" Linux driver (which apparently uses Proxim code), from Yoichi Shinoda's @@ -117,14 +117,14 @@ Geoff Voelker's Linux port of the same. .Sh BUGS This driver has not been tested with lots of cards, so there are bound -to be subtle timing problems with different hardware. +to be subtle timing problems with different hardware. It should also work with the Symphony PC cards. .Pp I couldn't figure out how to make roaming work, nor how to interpret the RSSI link quality values. .Pp There is no way to change the channel or security ID on the card, or -to make it a master, except through source code. +to make it a master, except through source code. This is because it is currently impossible under OpenBSD to trigger such changes through calls to .Xr ioctl 2 diff --git a/share/man/man4/route.4 b/share/man/man4/route.4 index 382dc323615..6a3d37c95c7 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/route.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/route.4 @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .Dt ROUTE 4 .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm route +.Nm route .Nd kernel packet forwarding database .Sh SYNOPSIS .Fd #include <sys/socket.h> @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ is requested to address the packet to the gateway listed in the routing entry (i.e. the packet is forwarded). .Pp When routing a packet, -the kernel will attempt to find +the kernel will attempt to find the most specific route matching the destination. (If there are two different mask and value-under-the-mask pairs that match, the more specific is the one with more bits in the mask. @@ -167,14 +167,14 @@ at the .Dv SOL_SOCKET level is to be turned off. A process may ignore all messages from the routing socket -by doing a +by doing a .Xr shutdown 2 system call for further input. .Pp If a route is in use when it is deleted, the routing entry will be marked down and removed from the routing table, but the resources associated with it will not -be reclaimed until all references to it are released. +be reclaimed until all references to it are released. User processes can obtain information about the routing entry to a specific destination by using a .Dv RTM_GET diff --git a/share/man/man4/scsi.4 b/share/man/man4/scsi.4 index fd8c220f893..5d488b90672 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/scsi.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/scsi.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: scsi.4,v 1.6 1999/06/05 13:18:32 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: scsi.4,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 4, 1996 .Dt SCSI 4 @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ The .Em scsi system provides a uniform and modular system for the implementation of drivers to control various scsi devices, and to utilize different -scsi host adapters through host adapter drivers. When the system probes the +scsi host adapters through host adapter drivers. When the system probes the .Em SCSI busses, it attaches any devices it finds to the appropriate drivers. If no driver seems appropriate, then it attaches the device to the @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ type. That is, if you have a disk wired down as then the first non-wired disk shall come on line as .Em sd2 . .Sh IOCTLS -There are a number of ioctls that work on any +There are a number of ioctls that work on any .Em SCSI device. They are defined in .Em sys/scsiio.h @@ -81,13 +81,13 @@ reset a device. Turn on debugging.. All scsi operations originating from this device's driver will be traced to the console, along with other information. Debugging is controlled by four bits, described in the header file. If no debugging is -configured into the kernel, debugging will have no effect. +configured into the kernel, debugging will have no effect. .Em SCSI debugging is controlled by the configuration option .Em SCSIDEBUG. .It Dv SCIOCCOMMAND Take a scsi command and data from a user process and apply them to the scsi -device. Return all status information and return data to the process. The +device. Return all status information and return data to the process. The ioctl will return a successful status even if the device rejected the command. As all status is returned to the user, it is up to the user process to examine this information to decide the success of the command. @@ -112,23 +112,23 @@ already controlled by an explicit driver. .Sh ADAPTERS The system allows common device drivers to work through many different types of adapters. The adapters take requests from the upper layers and do -all IO between the +all IO between the .Em SCSI bus and the system. The maximum size of a transfer is governed by the adapter. Most adapters can transfer 64KB in a single operation, and many can transfer larger amounts. .Sh TARGET MODE -Some adapters support +Some adapters support .Em target mode in which the system is capable of operating as a device, responding to operations initiated by another system. Target mode will be supported for some adapters, but is not yet complete for this version of the scsi system. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS -When the kernel is compiled with option SCSIDEBUG, the SCIOCDEBUG ioctl -can be used to enable various amounts of tracing information on any +When the kernel is compiled with option SCSIDEBUG, the SCIOCDEBUG ioctl +can be used to enable various amounts of tracing information on any specific device. Devices not being traced will not produce trace information. The four bits that make up the debug level each control certain types -of debugging information. +of debugging information. .Bl -tag -width "Bit 0" .It Dv Bit 0 shows all scsi bus operations including scsi commands, diff --git a/share/man/man4/sd.4 b/share/man/man4/sd.4 index dc13b080037..bc2186ce7fc 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/sd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/sd.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: sd.4,v 1.1 1997/03/28 22:53:41 millert Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sd.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: sd.4,v 1.3 1996/10/20 23:15:23 explorer Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 @@ -38,20 +38,20 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm sd -driver provides support for a +driver provides support for a .Tn SCSI disk. It allows the disk to be divided up into a set of pseudo devices called .Em partitions . -In general the interfaces are similar to those described by +In general the interfaces are similar to those described by .Xr wd 4 . .Pp -Where the +Where the .Xr wd 4 -device has a fairly low level interface to the system, +device has a fairly low level interface to the system, .Tn SCSI devices have a much higher level interface and talk to the system via -a +a .Tn SCSI host adapter (e.g., @@ -65,14 +65,14 @@ disk can be configured. .Pp When the .Tn SCSI -adapter is probed during boot, the +adapter is probed during boot, the .Tn SCSI -bus is scanned for devices. Any devices found which answer as +bus is scanned for devices. Any devices found which answer as .Sq Em Direct -type devices will be attached to the +type devices will be attached to the .Nm driver. -.\"In +.\"In .\".Tn FreeBSD .\"releases prior to 2.1, the first found was attached as .\".Li sd0 , @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ driver. .\".Xr scsi 4 .\"for details on kernel configuration. .Sh PARTITIONING -.\"The +.\"The .\".Nm .\"driver allows the disk to have two levels of partitioning. .\"One layer, called the @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ driver. .\"and .\".Xr disklabel 8 , .\"respectively.) -On many systems +On many systems .Xr disklabel 8 is used to partition the drive into filesystems. On some systems the NetBSD portion of the disk resides within a native partition, and another @@ -137,16 +137,16 @@ the disk with other operating systems. .\".Tn SCSI .\"bus. .Sh IOCTLS -The following +The following .Xr ioctl 2 -calls apply to +calls apply to .Tn SCSI disks as well as to other disks. They are defined in the header file .Aq Pa disklabel.h . .Pp .Bl -tag -width DIOCSDINFO .\".It Dv DIOCSBAD -.\"Usually used to set up a bad-block mapping system on the disk. +.\"Usually used to set up a bad-block mapping system on the disk. .\".Tn SCSI .\"drive incorporate their own bad-block mapping so this command is not .\"implemented. @@ -177,17 +177,17 @@ use. Eject the media cartridge from a removable device. .El .Pp -In addition, the +In addition, the .Xr scsi 4 general .Fn ioctl -commands may be used with the +commands may be used with the .Nm -driver, but only against the +driver, but only against the .Sq Li c (whole disk) partition. .Sh NOTES -If a removable device is attached to the +If a removable device is attached to the .Nm driver, then the act of changing the media will invalidate the disklabel and information held within the kernel. To avoid diff --git a/share/man/man4/sm.4 b/share/man/man4/sm.4 index 53e7d5b76fc..a24a4192646 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/sm.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/sm.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: sm.4,v 1.4 1999/06/05 13:18:34 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sm.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: sm.4,v 1.3 1998/08/09 00:39:02 thorpej Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. diff --git a/share/man/man4/spp.4 b/share/man/man4/spp.4 index cdcae17f3f0..4245b9b583a 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/spp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/spp.4 @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ system call must be used after binding the socket with the .Xr bind 2 system call. Only -passive sockets may use the +passive sockets may use the .Xr accept 2 call to accept incoming connections. Only active sockets may use the @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ when an attempt is made to create a socket with a port which has already been allocated; .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL -when an attempt is made to create a +when an attempt is made to create a socket with a network address for which no network interface exists. .El diff --git a/share/man/man4/sppp.4 b/share/man/man4/sppp.4 index 22b7348544a..d4ae06b4d3f 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/sppp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/sppp.4 @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: sppp.4,v 1.1 1999/07/02 18:09:47 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: sppp.4,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:49 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd May 19, 1997 .Dt SPPP 4 @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ mode. This means, the administrative event to the LCP layer will be delayed until after the lower layers signals an .Em Up -event (rise of +event (rise of .Dq carrier ) . This can be used by lower layers to support a dialin connection where the physical layer isn't available diff --git a/share/man/man4/ss.4 b/share/man/man4/ss.4 index e6dd0e8fe77..ec00a284d83 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/ss.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/ss.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ss.4,v 1.4 1999/07/08 09:41:43 hugh Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ss.4,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Kenneth Stailey and Ian Darwin .\" @@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ during operation. You can use a second controller.) Obviously a SCSI host adapter must be present in the config file before this device can be configured. .Pp -If a count is given, that many -.Nm ss +If a count is given, that many +.Nm ss devices will be configured into the kernel. .Sh IOCTLS This device provides the @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ The third argument is the address of a scan_io structure; details of this structure can be found in the header file .Nm scanio.h. .Pp -The +The .Nm SCIOCRESTART ioctl ignores the third parameter, and restarts the scan. The diff --git a/share/man/man4/st.4 b/share/man/man4/st.4 index 340da33eaa5..bf175865444 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/st.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/st.4 @@ -67,17 +67,17 @@ tape can be configured. .Pp As the .Tn SCSI -adapter is probed during boot, the +adapter is probed during boot, the .Tn SCSI bus is scanned for devices. Any devices found which answer as .Sq Em Sequential -type devices will be attached to the +type devices will be attached to the .Nm driver. .Sh MOUNT SESSIONS -The +The .Nm -driver is based around the concept of a +driver is based around the concept of a .Dq Em mount session , which is defined as the period between the time that a tape is mounted, and the time when it is unmounted. Any parameters set @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ will be loaded freshly from the new mode. (See below for more on modes.) .El .Sh MODES AND SUB-MODES -There are several different +There are several different .Sq operation modes. These are controlled by bits 2 and 3 of the minor number and are designed to allow users to easily read and write different @@ -143,11 +143,11 @@ Reserved. Currently unused. .El .Sh BLOCKING MODES .Tn SCSI -tapes may run in either +tapes may run in either .Sq Em variable or .Sq Em fixed -block-size modes. Most +block-size modes. Most .Tn QIC Ns -type devices run in fixed block-size mode, where most nine-track tapes and many new cartridge formats allow variable block-size. The @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ difference between the two is as follows: .Bl -inset .It Variable block-size: Each write made to the device results in a single logical record -written to the tape. One can never read or write +written to the tape. One can never read or write .Em part of a record from tape (though you may request a larger block and read a smaller record); nor can one read multiple blocks. Data @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ of densities and blocksizes for each of the modes, along with a set of `QUIRK' flags that can be used to enable or disable sections of code within the driver if a particular drive is recognized. .Sh IOCTLS -The following +The following .Xr ioctl 2 calls apply to .Tn SCSI @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ over file marks. Leave the head on the BOM (beginning of media) side of the last skipped file mark. .It Dv MTFSR -Skip forwards over +Skip forwards over .Va mt_count records. .It Dv MTBSR @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ variable blocksize operation, and the blocksize is set to 0, then the drive will be driven in variable mode. This parameter is in effect for the present mount session only. .It Dv MTSETDNSTY -Set the density value (see +Set the density value (see .Xr mt 1 ) to use when running in the mode opened (minor bits 2 and 3). This parameter is in effect for the present @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ This .Nm driver was originally written for .Tn Mach -2.5 by Julian Elischer, and was ported to +2.5 by Julian Elischer, and was ported to .Tn NetBSD by Charles Hannum. This man page was edited for .Tn NetBSD diff --git a/share/man/man4/strip.4 b/share/man/man4/strip.4 index 4b647650957..7154013e40f 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/strip.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/strip.4 @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ be sent independently to different MAC addresses. However, the "Star-mode" framing and MAC addressing are not in any way compatible with Ethernet. Broadcast or multicast to more than one radio is not possible, due to the independent frequency-hopping operation of the radios. -The interface flags +The interface flags .Dv IFF_POINTOPOINT and .Dv IFF_BROADCAST @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ interface. In other words, .Nm implements a multiple-access, non-broadcast device, accessed via -an RS-232 serial line, using a proprietary packet framing scheme. +an RS-232 serial line, using a proprietary packet framing scheme. .Pp This version .Nm @@ -110,13 +110,13 @@ map IP addresses of peer radios to the MAC-level addresses. The exact syntax of this mapping and an example are discussed below. The Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has allocated an ARP type code for use with STRIP. A future version of this driver will -support +support .Xr arp 4 to obtain the IP address of reachable peer radios dynamically. .Sh ADDRESS CONFIGURATION This version of the STRIP driver requires static pre-configuration of the mapping from IP addresses to radio MAC addresses. -The +The .Xr route 8 command should be used to bind a peer STRIP host's radio IP address to the peer's link-level radio address. Radio addresses are encoded @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ has not been widely tested on a variety of lower-level tty drivers. .P The detection and resetting of radios that crash out of Starmode does not always work in this version of the driver. One workaround -is to kill the +is to kill the .Xr slattach process, ifconfig the .Nm @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ interface down, and then start a new slattach and rerun ifconfig. .Nm was originally developed for the Linux kernel by Stuart Cheshire of Stanford's Operating Systems and Networking group, -as part of Mary Baker's MosquitoNet +as part of Mary Baker's MosquitoNet .Sy http://mosquitonet.stanford.edu/mosquitonet.html project. This diff --git a/share/man/man4/sv.4 b/share/man/man4/sv.4 index 518ffec255f..dbb10f84ddc 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/sv.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/sv.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: sv.4,v 1.3 1998/09/06 22:23:19 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: sv.4,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:47 aaron Exp $ .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Constantine Paul Sapuntzakis .\" All rights reserved .\" @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the .\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. .\" 3. The author's name or those of the contributors may not be used to -.\" endorse or promote products derived from this software without +.\" endorse or promote products derived from this software without .\" specific prior written permission. .\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR(S) AND CONTRIBUTORS @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ The driver provides support for S3 SonicVibes (S3-617) chipset-based cards. Disabling the SRS 3-D spatial feature of the chip is recommended for higher quality audio. This can be done in software -by issuing the +by issuing the .Bd -literal -offset indent mixerctl -w outputs.spatial=off .Ed diff --git a/share/man/man4/tcp.4 b/share/man/man4/tcp.4 index 61dd78aff02..d97a26d435e 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/tcp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/tcp.4 @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ system call must be used after binding the socket with the .Xr bind 2 system call. Only -passive sockets may use the +passive sockets may use the .Xr accept 2 call to accept incoming connections. Only active sockets may use the @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ when an attempt is made to create a socket with a port which has already been allocated; .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL -when an attempt is made to create a +when an attempt is made to create a socket with a network address for which no network interface exists. .El diff --git a/share/man/man4/termios.4 b/share/man/man4/termios.4 index 7197411168a..6910f8e757a 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/termios.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/termios.4 @@ -1105,7 +1105,7 @@ is set, two stop bits are used, otherwise one stop bit. For example, at If .Dv CREAD is set, the receiver is enabled. Otherwise, no character is -received. +received. Not all hardware supports this bit. In fact, this flag is pretty silly and if it were not part of the .Nm termios diff --git a/share/man/man4/tp.4 b/share/man/man4/tp.4 index 4564a262131..d2cff0e7930 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/tp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/tp.4 @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Transport Protocol The .Tn TP protocol provides reliable, flow-controlled, two-way -transmission of data and record boundaries. +transmission of data and record boundaries. It is a byte-stream protocol and is accessed according to the .Dv SOCK_SEQPACKET @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ system call must be used after binding the socket with the .Xr bind 2 system call. Only -passive sockets may use the +passive sockets may use the .Xr accept 2 call to accept incoming connections. Only active sockets may use the @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Transport Protocol implemented for .Tn AOS R2 at the University of Wisconsin - Madison, and modified for inclusion in the Berkeley Software Distribution, -includes classes 0 and 4 +includes classes 0 and 4 of the .Tn ISO transport protocols @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Class 0 is essentially a null transport protocol, which is used when the underlying network service provides reliable, sequenced, flow-controlled, two-way data transmission. Class 0 does not provide the expedited data service. -The protocols are implemented as a single transport layer entity +The protocols are implemented as a single transport layer entity that coexists with the Internet protocol suite. Class 0 may be used only in the .Tn ISO @@ -158,13 +158,13 @@ and .Xr write 2 system calls may be used. .Pp -Through the +Through the .Xr getsockopt and .Xr setsockopt system calls, .Tn TP -supports several options +supports several options to control such things as negotiable options in the protocol and protocol strategies. The options are defined in @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ and are described below. In the tables below, the options marked with a pound sign .Ql \&# -may be used +may be used with .Xr setsockopt after a connection is established. @@ -182,9 +182,9 @@ Others must be used before the connection is established, in other words, before calling .Xr connect -or +or .Xr accept . -All options may be used +All options may be used with .Xr getsockopt before or @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ the connection. (char *) [none] .br Data to send when confirming a connection. -This may also be sent by a +This may also be sent by a .Xr setsockopt system call, or by issuing a .Xr sendmsg @@ -260,13 +260,13 @@ Boolean. When .Xr true , performance measurements will be kept -for this connection. +for this connection. When set before a connection is established, the active side will use a locally defined parameter on the connect request packet; if the peer is another .Tn ARGO implementation, this will cause performance measurement to be -turned +turned on the passive side as well. See .Xr tpperf 8 . @@ -299,8 +299,8 @@ is the argument used with the .Xr getsockopt or .Xr setsockopt -system call. -It is described in +system call. +It is described in .Aq Pa netiso/tp_user.h . .Pp The fields of the @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ nonzero short integer [various] Number of clock ticks for which a reference will be considered frozen after the connection to which it applied is closed. -This parameter applies to classes 4 and 0 in the +This parameter applies to classes 4 and 0 in the .Tn ARGO implementation, despite the fact that the frozen reference function is required only for @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ class 4. .It Ar p_inact_ticks nonzero short integer [various] .br -Number of clock ticks without an incoming packet from the peer after which +Number of clock ticks without an incoming packet from the peer after which .Tn TP close the connection. This parameter applies only to class 4. @@ -388,11 +388,11 @@ The actual window size at any time during the lifetime of a connection is a function of the buffer size limit, the negotiated maximum TPDU -size, and the +size, and the rate at which the user program receives data. This parameter applies only to class 4. .It Ar p_tpdusize -unsigned char between 0x7 and 0xd. +unsigned char between 0x7 and 0xd. [0xc for class 4] [0xb for class 0] .br Log 2 of the maximum TPDU size to be negotiated. @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ The .Tn TP standard .Pf ( Tn ISO -8473) gives an upper bound of +8473) gives an upper bound of 0xd for class 4 and 0xb for class 0. The .Tn ARGO @@ -448,11 +448,11 @@ a retransmission occurs. .Dv TPRX_FASTSTART : Begin sending the maximum amount of data permitted by the peer (subject to availability). -The alternative is to start sending slowly by +The alternative is to start sending slowly by pretending the peer's window is smaller than it is, and letting it slowly grow up to the peer window's real size. This is to smooth the effect of new connections on a congested network -by preventing a transport connection from suddenly +by preventing a transport connection from suddenly overloading the network with a burst of packets. This strategy is also due to Van Jacobson. .It Ar p_class @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ This parameter applies only to class 4. Boolean. [true] .br -Boolean indicating that +Boolean indicating that the expedited data transport service will be negotiated. This parameter applies only to class 4. .It Ar p_use_checksum @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Indicates which network service is to be used. .Pp .Dv ISO_CLNS indicates the connectionless network service provided -by CLNP +by CLNP .Pf ( Tn ISO 8473). .Pp @@ -539,16 +539,16 @@ by X.25 8878. .Pp .Dv ISO_COSNS -indicates the +indicates the connectionless network service running over a -connection-oriented subnetwork service: CLNP +connection-oriented subnetwork service: CLNP .Pf ( Tn ISO 8473) over X.25 .Pf ( Tn ISO 8208). .Pp .Dv IN_CLNS -indicates the +indicates the DARPA Internet connectionless network service provided by IP (RFC 791). .It Ar p_dummy Reserved for future use. @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ The bit numbering used is that of the RT PC, which means that bit .Sy Description [Default] .It \&0 .Dv TPFLAG_NLQOS_PDN : -set when the quality of the +set when the quality of the network service is similar to that of a public data network. .It \&1 @@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ entity issues a .Dv SIGURG signal, indicating that disconnection has occurred. -If the signal is issued during a +If the signal is issued during a a system call, the system call may be interrupted, in which case the .Va errno @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ A user program should take one of the following approaches: If the program is servicing only one connection, it can block or ignore .Dv SIGURG -during connection +during connection establishment. The advantage of this is that the .Va errno @@ -665,10 +665,10 @@ service .Dv SIGURG . It can use the .Fn getsockopt ...TPOPT_FLAGS... -system +system call to see if the signal was due to the arrival of expedited data or due to a disconnection. -In the latter case, +In the latter case, .Xr getsockopt will return .Er ENOTCONN . diff --git a/share/man/man4/udp.4 b/share/man/man4/udp.4 index 96ee4a9853f..432f4fbea1e 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/udp.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/udp.4 @@ -60,11 +60,11 @@ and calls, though the .Xr connect 2 call may also be used to fix the destination for future -packets (in which case the +packets (in which case the .Xr recv 2 or .Xr read 2 -and +and .Xr send 2 or .Xr write 2 @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ when an attempt is made to create a socket with a port which has already been allocated; .It Bq Er EADDRNOTAVAIL -when an attempt is made to create a +when an attempt is made to create a socket with a network address for which no network interface exists. .El diff --git a/share/man/man4/uk.4 b/share/man/man4/uk.4 index ac02195d143..bb8121c3f1c 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/uk.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/uk.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: uk.4,v 1.5 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: uk.4,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: uk.4,v 1.3 1996/10/20 23:15:26 explorer Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 @@ -37,21 +37,21 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The .Nm uk -driver provides support for a +driver provides support for a process to address devices on the scsi bus for which there is no configured -driver. +driver. .Pp A scsi adapter must also be separately configured into the system before this driver makes sense. .Sh KERNEL CONFIGURATION If a count is given that number of -.Nm +.Nm devices will be configured into the kernel. .Sh IOCTLS -The +The .Nm driver has no ioctls of its own but rather acts as a medium for the -generic +generic .Xr scsi 4 ioctls. These are described in .Em sys/scsiio.h. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ uk{x} is the 'xth'unknown device found. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS All .Xr scsi 4 -debug ioctls work on +debug ioctls work on .Nm devices. .Sh SEE ALSO diff --git a/share/man/man4/unix.4 b/share/man/man4/unix.4 index df39a8c5d22..b37eb93826c 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/unix.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/unix.4 @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ that provides local (on-machine) interprocess communication through the normal .Xr socket 2 mechanisms. -The +The .Tn UNIX Ns -domain family supports the .Dv SOCK_STREAM @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ The protocol family does not support broadcast addressing or any form of .Dq wildcard -matching on incoming messages. +matching on incoming messages. All addresses are absolute- or relative-pathnames of other .Tn UNIX Ns -domain @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ or .Xr sendto 2 must be writable. .Sh PROTOCOLS -The +The .Tn UNIX Ns -domain protocol family is comprised of simple transport protocols that support the @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ and .Dv SOCK_DGRAM abstractions. .Dv SOCK_STREAM -sockets also support the communication of +sockets also support the communication of .Ux file descriptors through the use of the .Ar msg_control @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ and .Xr recvmsg 2 . .Pp Any valid descriptor may be sent in a message. -The file descriptor(s) to be passed are described using a +The file descriptor(s) to be passed are described using a .Ar struct cmsghdr that is defined in the include file .Aq Pa sys/socket.h . @@ -136,13 +136,13 @@ by the length field of the message; the length field is the sum of the size of the header plus the size of the array of file descriptors. .Pp -The received descriptor is a +The received descriptor is a .Em duplicate of the sender's descriptor, as if it were created with a call to .Xr dup 2 . Per-process descriptor flags, set with .Xr fcntl 2 , -are +are .Em not passed to a receiver. Descriptors that are awaiting delivery, or that are diff --git a/share/man/man4/vnd.4 b/share/man/man4/vnd.4 index bc436724d54..7355d6a05aa 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/vnd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/vnd.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: vnd.4,v 1.10 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: vnd.4,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: vnd.4,v 1.1 1995/12/30 18:10:48 thorpej Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Jason R. Thorpe. @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ not for building disk-images, and the .Nm ) variant that goes through the buffercache, thereby maintaining cache-coherency after the -block-device is closed which makes it suitable for creating disk images. +block-device is closed which makes it suitable for creating disk images. The latter is not good for swapping on, though. .Pp This document assumes that you're familiar with how to generate kernels, diff --git a/share/man/man4/wd.4 b/share/man/man4/wd.4 index 770a03c5eb0..7b7794ea424 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/wd.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/wd.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: wd.4,v 1.2 1999/06/05 13:18:33 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: wd.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1998, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ .Cd "wd* at wdc?" .Sh DESCRIPTION The -.Nm wd +.Nm wd driver provides support for random access disk drives, using standard ST506/ESDI/IDE controllers. .Sh FILES diff --git a/share/man/man4/xl.4 b/share/man/man4/xl.4 index cf9b5716f25..6d5980c6b02 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/xl.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/xl.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: xl.4,v 1.11 1999/07/08 22:40:48 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: xl.4,v 1.12 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, 1998 .\" Bill Paul <wpaul@ctr.columbia.edu>. All rights reserved. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ For example, .Pp .Sh DIAGNOSTICS .Bl -diag -.It "xl%d: couldn't map memory" +.It "xl%d: couldn't map memory" A fatal initialization error has occurred. .It "xl%d: couldn't map interrupt" A fatal initialization error has occurred. @@ -185,16 +185,16 @@ the author considers it a manufacturing defect. .Xr ifmedia 4 , .Xr ifconfig 8 .Sh HISTORY -The +The .Nm device driver first appeared in .Fx 3.0 , -and +and .Ox support was added in .Ox 2.4 . .Sh AUTHOR -The +The .Nm driver was written by .An Bill Paul Aq wpaul@ctr.columbia.edu . diff --git a/share/man/man4/ym.4 b/share/man/man4/ym.4 index 99fa155bc4e..30d9d1f949c 100644 --- a/share/man/man4/ym.4 +++ b/share/man/man4/ym.4 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ym.4,v 1.2 1998/09/06 22:23:20 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ym.4,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:48 aaron Exp $ .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Constantine Paul Sapuntzakis .\" All rights reserved .\" @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the .\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. .\" 3. The author's name or those of the contributors may not be used to -.\" endorse or promote products derived from this software without +.\" endorse or promote products derived from this software without .\" specific prior written permission. .\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR(S) AND CONTRIBUTORS @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ The .Nm driver provides support for Yamaha OPL3-SAX chipset-based cards. -cards. +cards. .Sh BUGS The "FM" DAC, wavetable synth, and MIDI port are not @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Lots of work needed. .Xr mixer 4 , .Xr wss 4 .Sh HISTORY -This driver is a thin wrapper around the +This driver is a thin wrapper around the .Xr wss 4 driver. The diff --git a/share/man/man5/core.5 b/share/man/man5/core.5 index 2b7dd0d19a4..9c9014f0519 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/core.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/core.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: core.5,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:04 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: core.5,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: core.5,v 1.4 1994/11/30 19:31:11 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 @@ -71,9 +71,9 @@ defined by the .Dv UPAGES manifest in the .Aq Pa sys/param.h -file. The +file. The .Fa u . -area starts with a +area starts with a .Fa user structure as given in .Aq Pa sys/user.h . @@ -90,9 +90,9 @@ in the .Fa u . area. The amount of stack image in the core file is given (in pages) by the -variable +variable .Fa u_ssize -in the +in the .Ar u . area. The size of a diff --git a/share/man/man5/dir.5 b/share/man/man5/dir.5 index 6d8251e67e2..d5fdcca06bd 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/dir.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/dir.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: dir.5,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:04 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: dir.5,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: dir.5,v 1.5 1995/03/28 17:30:20 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ It consists of records (directory entries) each of which contains information about a file and a pointer to the file itself. Directory entries may contain other directories as well as plain files; such nested directories are referred to as -subdirectories. +subdirectories. A hierarchy of directories and files is formed in this manner and is called a file system (or referred to as a file system tree). .\" An entry in this tree, diff --git a/share/man/man5/disktab.5 b/share/man/man5/disktab.5 index ec1ff384417..e65ee872c96 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/disktab.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/disktab.5 @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ to initialize the disk label on the disk. The format is patterned after the .Xr termcap 5 -terminal database. Entries in +terminal database. Entries in .Nm consist of a number of colon .Pq Sq \&: @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ known for the disk, separated by .Dq \&| characters. The last name given should be a long name fully identifying -the disk. +the disk. .Pp The following list indicates the normal values stored for each disk entry: diff --git a/share/man/man5/ethers.5 b/share/man/man5/ethers.5 index 09d5baac0b3..02a7021d68d 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/ethers.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/ethers.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ethers.5,v 1.9 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ethers.5,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: ethers.5,v 1.2 1994/11/30 19:31:16 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Written by Roland McGrath <roland@frob.com>. Public domain. @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ indicates the beginning of a comment; characters up to the end of the line are not interpreted by routines which search the file. .Pp Ethernet addresses are expressed as six hexadecimal numbers separated by -colons. The functions described in +colons. The functions described in .Xr ethers 3 can read and produce this format. .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man5/fbtab.5 b/share/man/man5/fbtab.5 index 56a16b12869..224f59882a5 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/fbtab.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/fbtab.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: fbtab.5,v 1.3 1998/11/26 04:25:58 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: fbtab.5,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd August 22, 1994 .Dt FBTAB 5 @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ whitespace. .It Login Device The device you have logged in on (e.g., .Dq /dev/ttyv0 ) . -.It File Permission +.It File Permission An octal permission number (0600), as used by .Xr chmod 2 . .It Other devices diff --git a/share/man/man5/fs.5 b/share/man/man5/fs.5 index 115ff8cb186..27fd7130108 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/fs.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/fs.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: fs.5,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: fs.5,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: fs.5,v 1.3 1994/11/30 19:31:17 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ of .Dq blocks . File system blocks of at most size .Dv MAXBSIZE -can +can be optionally broken into 2, 4, or 8 pieces, each of which is addressable; these pieces may be .Dv DEV_BSIZE , @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Note that super-blocks are never more than size The path name on which the file system is mounted is maintained in .Fa fs_fsmnt . .Dv MAXMNTLEN -defines the amount of space allocated in +defines the amount of space allocated in the super-block for this name. The limit on the amount of summary information per file system is defined by @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ For a 4096 byte block size, it is currently parameterized for a maximum of two million cylinders. .Pp Per cylinder group information is summarized in blocks allocated -from the first cylinder group's data blocks. +from the first cylinder group's data blocks. These blocks are read in from .Fa fs_csaddr (size diff --git a/share/man/man5/fstab.5 b/share/man/man5/fstab.5 index aac829bed5c..dbd1a270664 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/fstab.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/fstab.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: fstab.5,v 1.8 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: fstab.5,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: fstab.5,v 1.5.2.1 1995/11/16 20:11:11 pk Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1989, 1991, 1993 @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ contains descriptive information about the various file systems. .Nm fstab is only read by programs, and not written; -it is the duty of the system administrator to properly create +it is the duty of the system administrator to properly create and maintain this file. Each filesystem is described on a separate line; fields on each line are separated by tabs or spaces. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ describes the block special device or remote filesystem to be mounted. For filesystems of type .Tn ffs , -the special file name is the block special file name, +the special file name is the block special file name, and not the character special file name. If a program needs the character special file name, the program must create it by appending an @@ -101,23 +101,23 @@ An ISO9660 CD-ROM filesystem. .It fdesc An implementation of .Pa /dev/fd . -.It ffs +.It ffs A local .Tn UNIX filesystem. .It kernfs Various and sundry kernel statistics. -.It mfs +.It mfs A local memory-based .Tn UNIX filesystem. .It msdos An MS-DOS FAT filesystem. -.It nfs +.It nfs A Sun Microsystems compatible Network File System. .It procfs A local filesystem containing process information. -.It swap +.It swap A disk partition to be used for swapping. .It union A translucent filesystem. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ program to determine the order in which filesystem checks are done at reboot time. The root filesystem should be specified with a .Fa fs_passno -of 1, and other filesystems should have a +of 1, and other filesystems should have a .Fa fs_passno of 2. Filesystems within a drive will be checked sequentially, diff --git a/share/man/man5/group.5 b/share/man/man5/group.5 index ca0eae43ca9..31a6bbb22d4 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/group.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/group.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: group.5,v 1.3 1998/11/29 15:47:23 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: group.5,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: group.5,v 1.4 1995/07/28 06:41:39 phil Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ field is an optional encrypted password. This field is rarely used and an asterisk is normally placed in it rather than leaving it blank. -The +The .Ar member field contains the names of users granted the privileges of .Ar group . diff --git a/share/man/man5/netgroup.5 b/share/man/man5/netgroup.5 index 4a1b2ef2118..59169ce0b69 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/netgroup.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/netgroup.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: netgroup.5,v 1.6 1999/03/11 01:35:05 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: netgroup.5,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: netgroup.5,v 1.3 1995/03/18 14:58:34 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ database. .Pp These functions operate on the .Xr db -version of the +version of the .Nm .Pq Pa netgroup.db file which can be generated using @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ If that file is not present, and the system supports NIS, then the .Nm NIS maps are used. The NIS maps are also used if the .Nm -file contains a +file contains a .Dq + entry. .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man5/networks.5 b/share/man/man5/networks.5 index 263d6da1352..a240277f339 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/networks.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/networks.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: networks.5,v 1.7 1998/11/29 15:47:24 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: networks.5,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: networks.5,v 1.3 1994/11/30 19:31:23 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ indicates the beginning of a comment; characters up to the end of the line are not interpreted by routines which search the file. This file is normally created from the official network data base maintained at the Network Information Control Center -.Pq Tn NIC , +.Pq Tn NIC , though local changes may be required to bring it up to date regarding unofficial aliases and/or unknown networks. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ from the Internet address manipulation library, Network names may contain any printable character other than a field delimiter, newline, or comment character. .Pp -The +The .Nm file is largely obsoleted by the network information facilities of the name server in the following way: diff --git a/share/man/man5/passwd.conf.5 b/share/man/man5/passwd.conf.5 index 9d0a9d0ba44..ca45ef801c2 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/passwd.conf.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/passwd.conf.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: passwd.conf.5,v 1.7 1998/11/26 04:25:59 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: passwd.conf.5,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:38 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright 1997 Niels Provos <provos@physnet.uni-hamburg.de> .\" All rights reserved. @@ -42,12 +42,12 @@ file, consisting of describes the configuration of the password cipher used to encrypt local or YP passwords. .Pp -There are default, user and group specific stanzas. If no user +There are default, user and group specific stanzas. If no user or group stanza to a specific option is available, the default stanza is used. .Pp -To differentiate between user and group stanzas, groups are prefixed +To differentiate between user and group stanzas, groups are prefixed with a single dot .Pq Sq \&. . .Pp @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ The cipher to use for local passwords. Possible values are: .Dq md5 , and .Dq blowfish,<rounds> . -For +For .Dq newsalt the value of rounds is a 24-bit integer with a minmum of 7250 rounds. For diff --git a/share/man/man5/printcap.5 b/share/man/man5/printcap.5 index af2d191c7ea..da3773fbf8f 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/printcap.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/printcap.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: printcap.5,v 1.8 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: printcap.5,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: printcap.5,v 1.7 1998/02/20 12:24:50 hubertf Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 @@ -53,11 +53,11 @@ used to describe line printers. The spooling system accesses the file every time it is used, allowing dynamic addition and deletion of printers. Each entry in the data base is used to describe one printer. This data base may not be -substituted for, as is possible for +substituted for, as is possible for .Xr termcap , because it may allow accounting to be bypassed. .Pp -The default printer is normally +The default printer is normally .Dq lp , though the environment variable .Ev PRINTER @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ style text files If the local line printer driver supports indentation, the daemon must understand how to invoke it. .Sh FILTERS -If a printer is specified via +If a printer is specified via .Cm lp (either local or remote), the @@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ daemon creates a pipeline of .Dq filters to process files for various printer types. The pipeline is not set up for remote printers specified via -.Cm rm -unless the local host is the same as the remote printer host +.Cm rm +unless the local host is the same as the remote printer host given. The filters selected depend on the flags passed to .Xr lpr 1 . @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ may log either to or using .Xr syslog 3 , and must not ignore -.Dv SIGINT . +.Dv SIGINT . .Sh LOGGING Error messages generated by the line printer programs themselves (that is, the diff --git a/share/man/man5/remote.5 b/share/man/man5/remote.5 index af11bee31ad..fb566372469 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/remote.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/remote.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: remote.5,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: remote.5,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: remote.5,v 1.4 1997/04/20 00:05:27 mellon Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 @@ -72,11 +72,11 @@ Entries named .Dq tip\&* and .Dq cu\&* -are used as default entries by +are used as default entries by .Xr tip , and the .Xr cu -interface to +interface to .Xr tip , as follows. When .Xr tip @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ interface is used, entries of the form are used. .Sh CAPABILITIES Capabilities are either strings (str), numbers (num), or boolean -flags (bool). A string capability is specified by +flags (bool). A string capability is specified by .Em capability Ns Ar = Ns Em value ; for example, .Dq dv=/dev/harris . @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Auto call unit type. (num) The baud rate used in establishing a connection to the remote host. -This is a decimal number. +This is a decimal number. The default baud rate is 300 baud. .It Cm \&cm (str) @@ -134,20 +134,20 @@ Disconnect message sent to the host when a disconnect is requested by the user. .It Cm \&du (bool) -This host is on a dial-up line. +This host is on a dial-up line. .It Cm \&dv (str) .Tn UNIX -device(s) to open to establish a connection. +device(s) to open to establish a connection. If this file refers to a terminal line, .Xr tip 1 attempts to perform an exclusive open on the device to insure only one user at a time has access to the port. .It Cm \&el (str) -Characters marking an end-of-line. +Characters marking an end-of-line. The default is -.Dv NULL . +.Dv NULL . .Dq ~ escapes are only recognized by @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ after one of the characters in or after a carriage-return. .It Cm \&fs (str) -Frame size for transfers. +Frame size for transfers. The default frame size is equal to .Dv BUFSIZ . .It Cm \&hd @@ -168,13 +168,13 @@ echo should be performed. (str) Input end-of-file marks. The default is -.Dv NULL . +.Dv NULL . .It Cm \&oe (str) Output end-of-file string. The default is -.Dv NULL . -When +.Dv NULL . +When .Xr tip is transferring a file, this string is sent at end-of-file. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ The default is even parity. (str) Telephone number(s) for this host. If the telephone number field contains -an @ sign, +an @ sign, .Xr tip searches the file .Pa /etc/phones diff --git a/share/man/man5/rpc.5 b/share/man/man5/rpc.5 index 257c6afac92..9e231e12725 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/rpc.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/rpc.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.5,v 1.3 1998/11/29 15:47:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: rpc.5,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: rpc.5,v 1.2 1994/11/30 19:31:30 jtc Exp $ .\" @(#)rpc.5 2.2 88/08/03 4.0 RPCSRC; from 1.4 87/11/27 SMI; .\" @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ A indicates the beginning of a comment; characters up to the end of the line are not interpreted by routines which search the file. .Sh EXAMPLES -Here is an example of the +Here is an example of the .Pa /etc/rpc file from the Sun RPC Source distribution. .Bd -literal -offset indent @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ status 100024 bootparam 100026 ypupdated 100028 ypupdate keyserv 100029 keyserver -tfsd 100037 +tfsd 100037 nsed 100038 nsemntd 100039 .Ed diff --git a/share/man/man5/services.5 b/share/man/man5/services.5 index 504abb5b505..022fa635f25 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/services.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/services.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: services.5,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: services.5,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: services.5,v 1.3 1994/11/30 19:31:31 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993 @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ aliases .Pp Items are separated by any number of blanks and/or tab characters. The port number and protocol name -are considered a single +are considered a single .Em item ; a .Dq / diff --git a/share/man/man5/stab.5 b/share/man/man5/stab.5 index 3e17f0bc596..33bb6f32d95 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/stab.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/stab.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: stab.5,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: stab.5,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: stab.5,v 1.3 1994/11/30 19:31:33 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ struct nlist { The low bits of the .Fa n_type field are used to place a symbol into -at most one segment, according to +at most one segment, according to the following masks, defined in .Aq Pa a.out.h . A symbol can be in none of these segments by having none of these segment @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ and .Fa n_value fields of the given -.Fa n_type . +.Fa n_type . .Em sdb uses the .Fa n_desc diff --git a/share/man/man5/utmp.5 b/share/man/man5/utmp.5 index eb9b0c07a7e..5d324c09f1b 100644 --- a/share/man/man5/utmp.5 +++ b/share/man/man5/utmp.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: utmp.5,v 1.10 1999/05/23 14:11:05 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: utmp.5,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:39 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: utmp.5,v 1.5 1994/11/30 19:31:35 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ file. .Pp .Nm wtmp can grow rapidly on busy systems, so daily or weekly rotation -is recommended. +is recommended. If any one of these files does not exist, it is not created. They must be created manually and are maintained by .Xr newsyslog 8 . @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ see .Xr login 1 ) . The .Xr login -program then records the new login time in the +program then records the new login time in the .Nm lastlog file. .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man7/ascii.7 b/share/man/man7/ascii.7 index ff6fc131b51..b16e9e7307e 100644 --- a/share/man/man7/ascii.7 +++ b/share/man/man7/ascii.7 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ascii.7,v 1.2 1998/11/29 15:47:25 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ascii.7,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:37 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: ascii.7,v 1.3 1994/11/30 19:07:06 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1990, 1993 @@ -50,18 +50,18 @@ set: 000 nul 001 soh 002 stx 003 etx 004 eot 005 enq 006 ack 007 bel 010 bs 011 ht 012 nl 013 vt 014 np 015 cr 016 so 017 si 020 dle 021 dc1 022 dc2 023 dc3 024 dc4 025 nak 026 syn 027 etb -030 can 031 em 032 sub 033 esc 034 fs 035 gs 036 rs 037 us -040 sp 041 ! 042 " 043 # 044 $ 045 % 046 & 047 ' -050 ( 051 ) 052 * 053 + 054 , 055 - 056 . 057 / -060 0 061 1 062 2 063 3 064 4 065 5 066 6 067 7 -070 8 071 9 072 : 073 ; 074 < 075 = 076 > 077 ? -100 @ 101 A 102 B 103 C 104 D 105 E 106 F 107 G -110 H 111 I 112 J 113 K 114 L 115 M 116 N 117 O -120 P 121 Q 122 R 123 S 124 T 125 U 126 V 127 W -130 X 131 Y 132 Z 133 [ 134 \e\ 135 ] 136 ^ 137 _ -140 ` 141 a 142 b 143 c 144 d 145 e 146 f 147 g -150 h 151 i 152 j 153 k 154 l 155 m 156 n 157 o -160 p 161 q 162 r 163 s 164 t 165 u 166 v 167 w +030 can 031 em 032 sub 033 esc 034 fs 035 gs 036 rs 037 us +040 sp 041 ! 042 " 043 # 044 $ 045 % 046 & 047 ' +050 ( 051 ) 052 * 053 + 054 , 055 - 056 . 057 / +060 0 061 1 062 2 063 3 064 4 065 5 066 6 067 7 +070 8 071 9 072 : 073 ; 074 < 075 = 076 > 077 ? +100 @ 101 A 102 B 103 C 104 D 105 E 106 F 107 G +110 H 111 I 112 J 113 K 114 L 115 M 116 N 117 O +120 P 121 Q 122 R 123 S 124 T 125 U 126 V 127 W +130 X 131 Y 132 Z 133 [ 134 \e\ 135 ] 136 ^ 137 _ +140 ` 141 a 142 b 143 c 144 d 145 e 146 f 147 g +150 h 151 i 152 j 153 k 154 l 155 m 156 n 157 o +160 p 161 q 162 r 163 s 164 t 165 u 166 v 167 w 170 x 171 y 172 z 173 { 174 | 175 } 176 ~ 177 del .Ed .Pp @@ -70,20 +70,20 @@ The set: .Bd -literal -offset left 00 nul 01 soh 02 stx 03 etx 04 eot 05 enq 06 ack 07 bel -08 bs 09 ht 0a nl 0b vt 0c np 0d cr 0e so 0f si +08 bs 09 ht 0a nl 0b vt 0c np 0d cr 0e so 0f si 10 dle 11 dc1 12 dc2 13 dc3 14 dc4 15 nak 16 syn 17 etb -18 can 19 em 1a sub 1b esc 1c fs 1d gs 1e rs 1f us -20 sp 21 ! 22 " 23 # 24 $ 25 % 26 & 27 ' -28 ( 29 ) 2a * 2b + 2c , 2d - 2e . 2f / -30 0 31 1 32 2 33 3 34 4 35 5 36 6 37 7 -38 8 39 9 3a : 3b ; 3c < 3d = 3e > 3f ? -40 @ 41 A 42 B 43 C 44 D 45 E 46 F 47 G -48 H 49 I 4a J 4b K 4c L 4d M 4e N 4f O -50 P 51 Q 52 R 53 S 54 T 55 U 56 V 57 W -58 X 59 Y 5a Z 5b [ 5c \e\ 5d ] 5e ^ 5f _ -60 \` 61 a 62 b 63 c 64 d 65 e 66 f 67 g -68 h 69 i 6a j 6b k 6c l 6d m 6e n 6f o -70 p 71 q 72 r 73 s 74 t 75 u 76 v 77 w +18 can 19 em 1a sub 1b esc 1c fs 1d gs 1e rs 1f us +20 sp 21 ! 22 " 23 # 24 $ 25 % 26 & 27 ' +28 ( 29 ) 2a * 2b + 2c , 2d - 2e . 2f / +30 0 31 1 32 2 33 3 34 4 35 5 36 6 37 7 +38 8 39 9 3a : 3b ; 3c < 3d = 3e > 3f ? +40 @ 41 A 42 B 43 C 44 D 45 E 46 F 47 G +48 H 49 I 4a J 4b K 4c L 4d M 4e N 4f O +50 P 51 Q 52 R 53 S 54 T 55 U 56 V 57 W +58 X 59 Y 5a Z 5b [ 5c \e\ 5d ] 5e ^ 5f _ +60 \` 61 a 62 b 63 c 64 d 65 e 66 f 67 g +68 h 69 i 6a j 6b k 6c l 6d m 6e n 6f o +70 p 71 q 72 r 73 s 74 t 75 u 76 v 77 w 78 x 79 y 7a z 7b { 7c | 7d } 7e ~ 7f del .Ed .Pp @@ -92,20 +92,20 @@ The set: .Bd -literal -offset left 0 nul 1 soh 2 stx 3 etx 4 eot 5 enq 6 ack 7 bel - 8 bs 9 ht 10 nl 11 vt 12 np 13 cr 14 so 15 si + 8 bs 9 ht 10 nl 11 vt 12 np 13 cr 14 so 15 si 16 dle 17 dc1 18 dc2 19 dc3 20 dc4 21 nak 22 syn 23 etb - 24 can 25 em 26 sub 27 esc 28 fs 29 gs 30 rs 31 us - 32 sp 33 ! 34 " 35 # 36 $ 37 % 38 & 39 ' - 40 ( 41 ) 42 * 43 + 44 , 45 - 46 . 47 / - 48 0 49 1 50 2 51 3 52 4 53 5 54 6 55 7 - 56 8 57 9 58 : 59 ; 60 < 61 = 62 > 63 ? - 64 @ 65 A 66 B 67 C 68 D 69 E 70 F 71 G - 72 H 73 I 74 J 75 K 76 L 77 M 78 N 79 O - 80 P 81 Q 82 R 83 S 84 T 85 U 86 V 87 W - 88 X 89 Y 90 Z 91 [ 92 \e\ 93 ] 94 ^ 95 _ - 96 ` 97 a 98 b 99 c 100 d 101 e 102 f 103 g -104 h 105 i 106 j 107 k 108 l 109 m 110 n 111 o -112 p 113 q 114 r 115 s 116 t 117 u 118 v 119 w + 24 can 25 em 26 sub 27 esc 28 fs 29 gs 30 rs 31 us + 32 sp 33 ! 34 " 35 # 36 $ 37 % 38 & 39 ' + 40 ( 41 ) 42 * 43 + 44 , 45 - 46 . 47 / + 48 0 49 1 50 2 51 3 52 4 53 5 54 6 55 7 + 56 8 57 9 58 : 59 ; 60 < 61 = 62 > 63 ? + 64 @ 65 A 66 B 67 C 68 D 69 E 70 F 71 G + 72 H 73 I 74 J 75 K 76 L 77 M 78 N 79 O + 80 P 81 Q 82 R 83 S 84 T 85 U 86 V 87 W + 88 X 89 Y 90 Z 91 [ 92 \e\ 93 ] 94 ^ 95 _ + 96 ` 97 a 98 b 99 c 100 d 101 e 102 f 103 g +104 h 105 i 106 j 107 k 108 l 109 m 110 n 111 o +112 p 113 q 114 r 115 s 116 t 117 u 118 v 119 w 120 x 121 y 122 z 123 { 124 | 125 } 126 ~ 127 del .Ed .Sh FILES diff --git a/share/man/man7/environ.7 b/share/man/man7/environ.7 index 3c8ca3fcac0..44eec731eb9 100644 --- a/share/man/man7/environ.7 +++ b/share/man/man7/environ.7 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: environ.7,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:08 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: environ.7,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:37 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: environ.7,v 1.4 1995/07/03 19:45:07 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993 @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ The size of the block units used by several commands, most notably and .Xr ls 1 . .Ev BLOCKSIZE -may be specified in units of a byte by specifying a number, +may be specified in units of a byte by specifying a number, in units of a kilobyte by specifying a number followed by .Dq K or @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ The sequence of directories, separated by colons, searched by .Xr execvp 3 , etc. when looking for an executable file. Initially, -.Ev PATH +.Ev PATH is set to .Dq /usr/bin:/bin by diff --git a/share/man/man7/hier.7 b/share/man/man7/hier.7 index de5b427486e..1e9a1ec4ae9 100644 --- a/share/man/man7/hier.7 +++ b/share/man/man7/hier.7 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: hier.7,v 1.10 1999/05/16 19:57:38 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: hier.7,v 1.11 1999/07/09 13:35:37 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: hier.7,v 1.7 1994/11/30 19:07:10 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Alternate (backup) location for the root user's home directory. User utilities fundamental to both single and multi-user environments. .It Li /bsd Pure kernel executable (the operating system loaded into memory -at boot-time). +at boot-time). .It Li /dev/ Block and character device files. .Pp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Block and character device files. .It Li MAKEDEV Script for creating device files (see .Xr makedev 8 ) . -.It Li fd/ +.It Li fd/ File descriptor files (see .Xr fd 4 ) . .El @@ -81,14 +81,14 @@ Local timezone information (see .It Li disklabels/ Backup disklabels (see .Xr disklabel 8 ) . -.It Li kerberosIV/ +.It Li kerberosIV/ Configuration files for the Kerberos version IV system (see .Xr kerberos 1 ) . -.It Li mtree/ +.It Li mtree/ .Xr mtree configuration files (see .Xr mtree 8 ) . -.It Li namedb/ +.It Li namedb/ .Xr named configuration files (see .Xr named 8 ) . @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ System programs and administration utilities fundamental to both single and multi-user environments. .It Li /stand/ Programs used in a stand-alone environment. -.It Li /tmp/ +.It Li /tmp/ Temporary files, usually an .Xr mfs 8 memory-based filesystem (the contents @@ -240,13 +240,13 @@ Example .Dq \&. (dot) files for new accounts. .It Li tabset/ -Tab description files for a variety of terminals; used in +Tab description files for a variety of terminals; used in the termcap file (see .Xr termcap 5 ) . .It Li tmac/ Text processing macros (see .Xr nroff 1 -and +and .Xr troff 1 ) . .It Li zoneinfo/ Timezone configuration information (see @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Source for files in Multi-purpose log, temporary, transient, and spool files. .Pp .Bl -tag -width "preserve/" -compact -.It Li account/ +.It Li account/ System accounting files. .Pp .Bl -tag -width Fl -compact @@ -317,11 +317,11 @@ command scheduling files (see .Xr at 1 ) . .It Li backups/ Miscellaneous backup files. -.It Li db/ +.It Li db/ Miscellaneous automatically generated system-specific database files. -.It Li games/ +.It Li games/ Miscellaneous game status and log files. -.It Li log/ +.It Li log/ Miscellaneous system log files. .Pp .Bl -tag -width Fl -compact @@ -330,13 +330,13 @@ Login/logout log (see .Xr wtmp 5 ) . .El .Pp -.It Li mail/ +.It Li mail/ User mailbox files. .It Li preserve/ Temporary home of files preserved after an accidental death of an editor (see .Xr ex 1 ) . -.It Li quotas/ +.It Li quotas/ Filesystem quota information files. .It Li run/ System information files describing various info about the @@ -348,32 +348,32 @@ Database of current users (see .Xr utmp 5 ) . .El .Pp -.It Li rwho/ +.It Li rwho/ .Xr rwho data files (see .Xr rwhod 8 , .Xr rwho 1 , and .Xr ruptime 1 ) . -.It Li spool/ +.It Li spool/ Miscellaneous printer and mail system spooling directories. .Pp .Bl -tag -width Fl -compact -.It Li ftp/ +.It Li ftp/ Commonly ~ftp; the anonymous ftp root directory. -.It Li mqueue/ +.It Li mqueue/ Undelivered mail queue (see .Xr sendmail 8 ) . .It Li output/ Line printer spooling directories. -.It Li uucp/ +.It Li uucp/ .Xr uucp spool directory. .It Li uucppublic/ Commonly ~uucp; public uucp temporary directory. .El .Pp -.It Li tmp/ +.It Li tmp/ Temporary files that are kept between system reboots. .El .El @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Temporary files that are kept between system reboots. .Xr whatis 1 , .Xr whereis 1 , .Xr which 1 , -.Xr fsck 8 +.Xr fsck 8 .Sh HISTORY A .Nm diff --git a/share/man/man7/mdoc.samples.7 b/share/man/man7/mdoc.samples.7 index 27626f93935..2f67423a06b 100644 --- a/share/man/man7/mdoc.samples.7 +++ b/share/man/man7/mdoc.samples.7 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: mdoc.samples.7,v 1.18 1999/07/06 01:44:29 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: mdoc.samples.7,v 1.19 1999/07/09 13:35:37 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: mdoc.samples.7,v 1.5 1996/04/03 20:17:34 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ manual .Xr mdoc 7 . This is a technical .Em faux pas -as almost all of the macros in +as almost all of the macros in .Nm \-mdoc are parsed, but as it was cumbersome to constantly refer to macros as being callable and being able to call other macros, @@ -1133,7 +1133,7 @@ anywhere else in the man page without problems, but in the .Sx SYNOPSIS section it causes a line break after its use. Its main purpose is to present the function type in kernel normal form -of a section two or three man page by forcing the +of a section two or three man page by forcing the function name to appear on the next line. .Pp .Dl Usage: .Ft type ... \*(Pu diff --git a/share/man/man7/ports.7 b/share/man/man7/ports.7 index cd88e08ed6d..42504afcebc 100644 --- a/share/man/man7/ports.7 +++ b/share/man/man7/ports.7 @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $OpenBSD: ports.7,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:09 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ports.7,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:37 aaron Exp $ .\" $FreeBSD: ports.7,v 1.7 1998/06/23 04:38:50 hoek Exp $ .\" .Dd January 25, 1998 @@ -37,13 +37,13 @@ The .Nm OpenBSD Ports Collection (shamelessly stolen from the FreeBSD Ports Collection) offers a simple way for users and administrators to install applications. -Each +Each .Em port contains any patches necessary to make the original application source code compile and run on BSD. Compiling an application is as simple as typing .Ic make -in the port directory! The +in the port directory! The .Pa Makefile automatically fetches the application source code, either from a local disk or via ftp, unpacks it diff --git a/share/man/man8/afterboot.8 b/share/man/man8/afterboot.8 index a5724164ceb..9c1fdd09204 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/afterboot.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/afterboot.8 @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ For example, to view the manual page on the .Xr ls 1 command, type: .Ic man 1 ls . -.\" +.\" .\" XXX This should be an enumerated list .\" .Ss Login @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ Check what is running by typing as root and see if anything unexpected is present. Do you need anything else? Do you wish to change things? e.g. if you do not -like root getting standard output of the daily scripts, and want only +like root getting standard output of the daily scripts, and want only the security scripts that are mailed internally, you can type .Ic crontab -e and change some of the lines to read: @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ etc. .Xr route 8 , .Xr umount 8 , .Xr vipw 8 , -.Xr ypbind 8 +.Xr ypbind 8 .Sh HISTORY This document first appeared in .Ox 2.2 . diff --git a/share/man/man8/boot_config.8 b/share/man/man8/boot_config.8 index 80c578549a1..f4c4694409d 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/boot_config.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/boot_config.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: boot_config.8,v 1.8 1999/05/23 14:11:24 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: boot_config.8,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Mats O Jansson .\" All rights reserved. @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ option when OpenBSD prompts for a kernel to boot: use ? for file list, or carriage return for defaults use hd(1,a)/bsd to boot sd0 when sd0 is also installed .No "Boot: [[[wd(0,a)]/bsd][-abcdrs]] :" Ic -c -Booting... +Booting... avail mem = 28188672 using 430 buffers containing 1761280 bytes of memory User Kernel Config @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ an attribute. UKC> .Ed .Pp -It is possible to add new devices, but only devices that were linked into the +It is possible to add new devices, but only devices that were linked into the kernel. If a new device is added, following devices will be renumbered. .Pp .Bd -literal diff --git a/share/man/man8/compat_freebsd.8 b/share/man/man8/compat_freebsd.8 index 47fcaa10c05..f663b34c6c1 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/compat_freebsd.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/compat_freebsd.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: compat_freebsd.8,v 1.5 1998/09/13 03:50:23 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: compat_freebsd.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: compat_linux.8,v 1.1 1995/03/05 23:30:36 fvdl Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Frank van der Linden @@ -39,9 +39,9 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION OpenBSD supports running FreeBSD binaries. Most binaries should work, except programs that use FreeBSD-specific features. These include -i386-specific calls, such as syscons utilities, and audio devices. +i386-specific calls, such as syscons utilities, and audio devices. .Pp -The FreeBSD compatibility feature is active for kernels compiled +The FreeBSD compatibility feature is active for kernels compiled with the .Nm COMPAT_FREEBSD option enabled. @@ -165,8 +165,8 @@ they don't conflict with their OpenBSD counterparts. A good idea would be to install them in /usr/local/bin as ldconfig-freebsd and ldd-freebsd. .Pp -Run the FreeBSD ldconfig program with directory arguments in -which the FreeBSD runtime linker should look for shared libs. +Run the FreeBSD ldconfig program with directory arguments in +which the FreeBSD runtime linker should look for shared libs. /usr/lib are standard, you could run like the following: .Pp .Bl -tag -width 123 -compact -offset indent @@ -175,10 +175,10 @@ which the FreeBSD runtime linker should look for shared libs. .It me@openbsd% ldconfig-freebsd /usr/X11R6/lib /usr/local/lib .El .Pp -Note that argument directories of ldconfig are +Note that argument directories of ldconfig are mapped to /emul/freebsd/XXXX by OpenBSD's compat code, and should exist as such on your system. -Make sure /emul/freebsd/var/run/ld.so.hints exists when you run +Make sure /emul/freebsd/var/run/ld.so.hints exists when you run FreeBSD's ldconfig, if not, you may lose OpenBSD's /var/run/ld.so.hints. FreeBSD ldconfig should be statically @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ libXt.so.6.0 XFree86-3.1.1/X311bin.tgz .\" libXt.so.3 oldlibs .Ed .Pp -The Files called ``bindist.??'' are tar-ed, gzipped and split, +The Files called ``bindist.??'' are tar-ed, gzipped and split, so you can extract contents by ``cat bindist.?? | tar zpxf -''. .Pp Extract the files from these gzipped tarfiles in your /emul/freebsd directory diff --git a/share/man/man8/compat_svr4.8 b/share/man/man8/compat_svr4.8 index a43dd6de7ba..e946c32a223 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/compat_svr4.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/compat_svr4.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: compat_svr4.8,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:24 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: compat_svr4.8,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: compat_svr4.8,v 1.1 1996/07/06 17:14:50 christos Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Christos Zoulas @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" Stolen from compat_linux.8,v 1.2 1995/10/16 20:17:59 fvdl +.\" Stolen from compat_linux.8,v 1.2 1995/10/16 20:17:59 fvdl .\" .Dd July 6, 1996 .Dt compat_svr4 8 diff --git a/share/man/man8/compat_ultrix.8 b/share/man/man8/compat_ultrix.8 index 9740e811d0c..d3a987f00aa 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/compat_ultrix.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/compat_ultrix.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: compat_ultrix.8,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:27 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: compat_ultrix.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Jonathan Stone .\" All rights reserved. @@ -46,11 +46,11 @@ Most executables will work. The exceptions include programs that use proprietary, Ultrix-specific features (LAT, CI support, DECnet support) and various system calls, ioctl()'s, or Ultrix kernel semantics that are difficult to emulate (e.g., Ultrix packetfilter) or -buggy (e.g., Ultrix YP). +buggy (e.g., Ultrix YP). .Pp All Ultrix executables are static, so no shared libraries are required for Ultrix compatiblity. However, Ultrix is based on a -.Bx 4.3 +.Bx 4.3 alpha release. Ultrix commands and libraries are often much older than their OpenBSD or even SunOS 4.x equivalents, and may require incompatible @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ lookups for all Ultrix name services. .Sh BUGS RISC Ultrix YP(NIS) is known to not work. The Ultrix YP libraries have a consistent endian-ness bug. Ultrix YP client will not inter-operate -with the OpenBSD +with the OpenBSD .Xr ypbind 8 process. The only workaround is to use /etc/svc.conf to disable YP(NIS). @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ process. The only workaround is to use The ndbm hashed-password file used by Ultrix are incompatible with the db hashed-password file used by OpenBSD. There is no good solution for this. (YP would be a good one, if Ultrix YP worked.) -.Pp +.Pp The API used by Xservers to talk to the kernel is currently compatible with Ultrix 4.1. An implementation of the Ultrix 4.2 Xws interface (used by X11R6) is in progress. diff --git a/share/man/man8/diskless.8 b/share/man/man8/diskless.8 index 98f3105c8ed..bdd68df3ea2 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/diskless.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/diskless.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: diskless.8,v 1.8 1999/05/07 22:03:09 jason Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: diskless.8,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: diskless.8,v 1.7.4.1 1996/05/30 18:58:10 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Assuming the client's hostname is to be .Pp .Bl -tag -width 2.1 -compact .It 1. -Add an entry to +Add an entry to .Pa /etc/ethers corresponding to the client's ethernet address: .Bd -literal -offset indent -compact diff --git a/share/man/man8/makedev.8 b/share/man/man8/makedev.8 index f490ee79d05..cba183047a9 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/makedev.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/makedev.8 @@ -45,10 +45,10 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm MAKEDEV is a shell script normally used to install -special files. It resides in the +special files. It resides in the .Pa /dev directory, as this is the normal location of special files. -Arguments to +Arguments to .Nm MAKEDEV are usually of the form .Ar device-name Ns Sy \&? @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ console cassette device(s), devices would be made for the appropriate system. .It Sy local Create those devices specific to the local site. This -request causes the shell file +request causes the shell file .Pa /dev/MAKEDEV.local to be executed. Site specific commands, such as those used to setup dialup lines as @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ should be included in this file. .El .Pp -Since all devices are created using +Since all devices are created using .Xr mknod 8 , this shell script is useful only to the super-user. .Sh DIAGNOSTICS diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.atari/MAKEDEV.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.atari/MAKEDEV.8 index f6c172e8b87..7ef92d8e5fb 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/man8.atari/MAKEDEV.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/man8.atari/MAKEDEV.8 @@ -145,5 +145,5 @@ The special file directory. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr intro 4 , .Xr config 8 , -.Xr mknod 8 , +.Xr mknod 8 , .Xr special 8 diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/MAKEDEV.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/MAKEDEV.8 index 31e94a32bba..52fc332d4d7 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/MAKEDEV.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/MAKEDEV.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.6 1999/05/23 14:11:23 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:35 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ .Sh DESCRIPTION The shell script .Nm MAKEDEV , -found in the +found in the .Pa /dev directory, is used to create the common special files. See @@ -161,5 +161,5 @@ The special file directory. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr intro 4 , .Xr config 8 , -.Xr mknod 8 , +.Xr mknod 8 , .Xr special 8 diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/crash.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/crash.8 index d72ec57e986..c9968efe239 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/crash.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/man8.hp300/crash.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: crash.8,v 1.3 1999/06/05 04:16:07 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: crash.8,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:35 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ for details. .Pp To analyze a dump you should begin by running .Xr adb 1 -with the +with the .Fl k flag on the system load image and core dump. If the core image is the result of a panic, diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.i386/MAKEDEV.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.i386/MAKEDEV.8 index e04049aee75..69e61df9b07 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/man8.i386/MAKEDEV.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/man8.i386/MAKEDEV.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.9 1999/05/23 14:11:23 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997, Jason Downs. All rights reserved. .\" @@ -186,5 +186,5 @@ The special file directory. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr intro 4 , .Xr config 8 , -.Xr mknod 8 , +.Xr mknod 8 , .Xr special 8 diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.i386/boot.com.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.i386/boot.com.8 index ccc926fd996..5a6c514f767 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/man8.i386/boot.com.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/man8.i386/boot.com.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: boot.com.8,v 1.3 1999/05/23 14:11:23 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: boot.com.8,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1990, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ that time, the default kernel .Em bsd is loaded from the root directory of the DOS C: partition. .Sh CAVEATS -The file +The file .Pa /usr/mdec/boot.com and a valid kernel file must be copied to the root directory of the DOS C: partition. diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.sun3/MAKEDEV.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.sun3/MAKEDEV.8 index b0359ccb25f..be3e7626ead 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/man8.sun3/MAKEDEV.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/man8.sun3/MAKEDEV.8 @@ -132,5 +132,5 @@ The special file directory. .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr intro 4 , .Xr config 8 , -.Xr mknod 8 , +.Xr mknod 8 , .Xr special 8 diff --git a/share/man/man8/man8.vax/drtest.8 b/share/man/man8/man8.vax/drtest.8 index 72af19331ef..fc930e032e8 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/man8.vax/drtest.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/man8.vax/drtest.8 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)drtest.8 6.3 (Berkeley) 3/16/91 -.\" $Id: drtest.8,v 1.3 1999/05/23 14:11:22 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: drtest.8,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:35 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 16, 1991 .Dt DRTEST 8 @@ -40,19 +40,19 @@ .Nd standalone disk test program .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm Drtest -is a standalone program used to read a disk -track by track. -It was primarily intended as a test program +is a standalone program used to read a disk +track by track. +It was primarily intended as a test program for new standalone drivers, but has shown -useful in other contexts as well, such as +useful in other contexts as well, such as verifying disks and running speed tests. For example, when a disk has been formatted (by .Xr format 8 ) , you can check that -hard errors has been taken care of by running +hard errors has been taken care of by running .Nm drtest . -No hard errors should be found, but in many cases +No hard errors should be found, but in many cases quite a few soft .Tn ECC errors will be reported. @@ -62,10 +62,10 @@ While is running, the cylinder number is printed on the console for every 10th cylinder read. .Sh EXAMPLE -A sample run of +A sample run of .Xr drtest -is shown below. -In this example (using a 750), +is shown below. +In this example (using a 750), .Nm drtest is loaded from the root file system; usually it @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ As usual, ``#'' and ``@'' may be used to edit input. .Bd -unfilled -offset indent -compact .Li \&>>> Ns Sy B/3 .Li \&%% -.Li \&loading hk(0,0)boot +.Li \&loading hk(0,0)boot .Li \&Boot .Li \&: Sy \&hk(0,0)drtest .Li Test program for stand-alone up and hp driver @@ -94,11 +94,11 @@ As usual, ``#'' and ``@'' may be used to edit input. .Em (...to abort halt machine with \&^P) .Ed .Sh DIAGNOSTICS -The diagnostics are intended to be self explanatory. Note, however, that +The diagnostics are intended to be self explanatory. Note, however, that the device number in the diagnostic messages is identified as .Em typeX -instead of +instead of .Em type(a,u) where .Ar X diff --git a/share/man/man8/rc.8 b/share/man/man8/rc.8 index 497c401faba..90377593691 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/rc.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/rc.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rc.8,v 1.5 1999/05/23 14:11:23 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: rc.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ is the command script that is invoked by .Xr init 8 during an automatic reboot and after single user mode is exited; it performs system housekeeping chores and starts up system daemons. -.Nm rc.local +.Nm rc.local is the script holding commands which are pertinent only to a specific site. .Nm rc.securelevel diff --git a/share/man/man8/rc.conf.8 b/share/man/man8/rc.conf.8 index 70a0e3c565b..04d3c96f543 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/rc.conf.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/rc.conf.8 @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ series in order to set shell variables used therein to control the behaviour of the scripts. .Pp There are three sections in this file. The first is used to turn features -on or off. For example, whether the system runs the +on or off. For example, whether the system runs the .Nm sendmail daemon is determined by the line in this section .Bd -literal -indent xxx @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ nfsd_flags="-tun 4" .Ed provides command-line arguments for the nfs server. .Pp -This particular line instructs +This particular line instructs .Xr nfsd 8 to start four copies of the server. On a busy file server, 8 (or more) copies are recommended. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ On a busy file server, 8 (or more) copies are recommended. and the detailed documentation given for each server that is configurable in this fashion. .Sh HISTORY -The file +The file .Nm rc.conf first appeared in .Ox 2.2 . diff --git a/share/man/man8/ssl.8 b/share/man/man8/ssl.8 index b8d08b88cbf..cc47fc20b8a 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/ssl.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/ssl.8 @@ -5,9 +5,9 @@ .Nm ssl .Nd details for libssl and libcrypto .Sh DESCRIPTION -This document describes some of the issues relating to the use of +This document describes some of the issues relating to the use of Eric Young's libssl and libcrypto libraries. This document -is intended as an overview of what the libraries do, what uses them, +is intended as an overview of what the libraries do, what uses them, and the slightly unorthodox way of upgrading the library. .Pp The SSL libraries (libssl and libcrypto) implement the @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ are most commonly used by the .Ar https protocol for encrypted web transactions. -Due to patent issues in the United States, there are +Due to patent issues in the United States, there are problems with shipping a fully functional implementation of these protocols anywhere in the world, as such shipment would include shipping .Ar into @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ is .Pp The .Ar https -protocol used by web browsers (in modern incarnations), +protocol used by web browsers (in modern incarnations), allows for the use of .Ar SSL version 3 and @@ -115,8 +115,8 @@ The most common uses of will require you to generate a server certificate, which is provided by your host as evidence of its identity when clients make new connections. The certificates reside in the -.Pa /etc/ssl -directory, with the keys in the +.Pa /etc/ssl +directory, with the keys in the .Pa /etc/ssl/private directory. .Pp @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Private keys can be encrypted using .Ar 3DES and a passphrase to protect their integrity should the encrypted file be disclosed, However it is -important to note that encrypted server keys mean that the passphrase +important to note that encrypted server keys mean that the passphrase needs to be typed in every time the server is started. If a passphrase is not used, you will need to be absolutely sure your key file is kept secure. @@ -170,11 +170,11 @@ shared libraries to support as described above. Once that is done, you can generate .Ar RSA -certificates that will be usable by +certificates that will be usable by .Xr httpd 8 for .Ar https -transactions. +transactions. .Bd -literal -offset indent # ssleay genrsa -out /etc/ssl/private/server.key 1024 .Ed @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ have to type in when starting servers .Bd -literal -offset indent # ssleay genrsa -des3 -out /etc/ssl/private/server.key 1024 .Ed -.Pp +.Pp The next step is to generate a .Ar Certificate Signing Request which is used @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ This .Pa server.csr file can then be given to .Ar Certifying Authority -who will sign the key. One such CA is +who will sign the key. One such CA is .Ar Thawte Certification which you can reach at .Ar http://www.thawte.com/. @@ -214,11 +214,11 @@ You can also sign the key yourself, using the command: -signkey /etc/ssl/private/server.key -out /etc/ssl/server.crt .Ed .Pp -With +With .Pa /etc/ssl/server.crt -and +and .Pa /etc/ssl/private/server.key -in place, you should be able to start +in place, you should be able to start .Xr httpd 8 with the .Ar -DSSL @@ -228,13 +228,13 @@ transactions with your machine on port 443. .Sh BUGS .Pp .Nm ssleay -and +and .Nm libssl have nearly nonexistent documentation. Most documentation consists of examples and README files in the sources. Mail beck@openbsd.org to assist or encourage him to finish the job. -.Pp +.Pp The world needs more .Ar DSA capable diff --git a/share/man/man8/vpn.8 b/share/man/man8/vpn.8 index 25438d045fe..fc41f1da160 100644 --- a/share/man/man8/vpn.8 +++ b/share/man/man8/vpn.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: vpn.8,v 1.22 1999/07/07 20:04:31 kjell Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: vpn.8,v 1.23 1999/07/09 13:35:36 aaron Exp $ .\" Copyright 1998 Niels Provos <provos@physnet.uni-hamburg.de> .\" All rights reserved. .\" @@ -42,19 +42,19 @@ linked via a cryptographically secured tunnel to the security gateway of the other subnet. .Xr ipsec 4 is used to provide the necessary network-layer cryptographic services. -This document describes the configuration process for setting up a +This document describes the configuration process for setting up a .Nm VPN . .Pp Briefly, creating a VPN consists of the following steps .Bl -enum -compact .It -Choose a key exchange method: manual keyed or +Choose a key exchange method: manual keyed or .Xr photurisd 8 .It Create a Security Association (SA) for each endpoint .It Create the appropriate IPSec flows -.It +.It Configure your firewall rules appropriately .El .Ss Choosing a key exchange method @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ manual (symmetric shared secret) .El .Pp At present VPNs between private (RFC 1918) networks must use -manual keying, as +manual keying, as .Xr photurisd 8 can only be used if the IP address of the security gateway actually falls within the range of addresses being tunnelled to. @@ -76,11 +76,11 @@ This can clearly never occur if the addresses being tunnelled to are non-routable private networks. .Ss Generating Manual Keys The shared secret symmetric keys used to create a VPN can -be any hexadecimal value, so long as both sides of the connection use -the same values. Since the security of the VPN is based on these keys +be any hexadecimal value, so long as both sides of the connection use +the same values. Since the security of the VPN is based on these keys being unguessable, it is very important that the keys be chosen using a strong random source. One practical method of generating them -is by using the +is by using the .Xr random 4 device. To produce 160 bits of randomness, for example, do a: .Bd -literal @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ ipsecadm new esp -spi SPI_OUT -src A_EXTERNAL_IP -dst B_EXTERNAL_IP -forcetunnel -enc 3des -auth sha1 -key ENCRYPTION_KEY -authkey AUTHENTICATION_KEY - + ipsecadm new esp -spi SPI_IN -src B_EXTERNAL_IP -dst A_EXTERNAL_IP -forcetunnel -enc 3des -auth sha1 @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ ipsecadm new esp -spi SPI_IN -src B_EXTERNAL_IP .Ss Creating IPSec Flows Both IPsec gateways need to configure .Xr ipsec 4 -routes with the +routes with the .Xr ipsecadm 8 tool: .Pp @@ -175,28 +175,28 @@ ipsecadm flow -dst A_EXTERNAL_IP -spi SPI_OUT -proto esp A_EXTERNAL_IP 255.255.255.255 .Ed .Pp -Furthermore, unless manual keying is used, +Furthermore, unless manual keying is used, both security gateways need to start the .Xr photurisd 8 key management daemon with the .Fl v -flag and make sure it is configured properly on both sides to +flag and make sure it is configured properly on both sides to provide the required security services (typically, encryption and authentication). .Ss Configuring Firewall Rules .Xr ipf 8 needs to be configured such that all packets from the outside are blocked -by default. Only successfully IPSec-processed packets (from the -.Nm enc0 -interface), or -key management packets (for -.Xr photurisd 8 , +by default. Only successfully IPSec-processed packets (from the +.Nm enc0 +interface), or +key management packets (for +.Xr photurisd 8 , .Tn UDP packets with source and destination ports of 468) should be allowed to pass. -.Pp +.Pp The .Xr ipf 5 -rules for a tunnel which uses encryption (the ESP IPsec protocol) and +rules for a tunnel which uses encryption (the ESP IPsec protocol) and .Xr photurisd 8 on security gateway A might look like this: .Bd -literal @@ -221,12 +221,12 @@ If there are no other .Xr ipf 5 rules, the "quick" clause can be added to the last three rules. .Sh EXAMPLES -To create a manual keyed VPN between two class C networks using +To create a manual keyed VPN between two class C networks using 3DES encryption and the following IP addresses: .Pp .Bd -literal A_INTERNAL_IP = 10.0.50.1 - A_EXTERNAL_IP = 192.168.1.254 + A_EXTERNAL_IP = 192.168.1.254 B_EXTERNAL_IP = 192.168.2.1 B_INTERNAL_IP = 10.0.99.1 .Ed @@ -338,9 +338,9 @@ Firewall configuration file .El .Sh BUGS .Xr photurisd 8 -can not be used in VPN mode unless both of the security gateway IP addresses +can not be used in VPN mode unless both of the security gateway IP addresses lie within the network ranges being tunnelled to. -In situations where the gateway IP is outside the desired netrange, such +In situations where the gateway IP is outside the desired netrange, such as with private (RFC 1918) networks, manual keying must be used. This should be fixed in the next release. .Sh SEE ALSO diff --git a/share/man/man9/fetch.9 b/share/man/man9/fetch.9 index 56d60387f28..1d19ef7431a 100644 --- a/share/man/man9/fetch.9 +++ b/share/man/man9/fetch.9 @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Fetches a word of data from the user-space address The .Nm routines are deprecated. -All new code should use +All new code should use .Fn copyin . .Sh RETURN VALUES The diff --git a/share/man/man9/inittodr.9 b/share/man/man9/inittodr.9 index c6e70154d67..3ed0d82df42 100644 --- a/share/man/man9/inittodr.9 +++ b/share/man/man9/inittodr.9 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: inittodr.9,v 1.4 1999/05/23 14:11:40 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: inittodr.9,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:34 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: inittodr.9,v 1.2 1996/03/27 21:16:06 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Christopher G. Demetriou @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Those heuristics include: .It If the battery-backed clock has a valid time, it is used. .It -If the battery-backed clock does not have a valid time, and +If the battery-backed clock does not have a valid time, and the time provided in .Fa base is within reason, diff --git a/share/man/man9/panic.9 b/share/man/man9/panic.9 index 616d75eaf06..af585a9d8fd 100644 --- a/share/man/man9/panic.9 +++ b/share/man/man9/panic.9 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: panic.9,v 1.1 1997/05/29 15:14:50 kstailey Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: panic.9,v 1.2 1999/07/09 13:35:34 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: panic.9,v 1.2 1996/10/09 17:20:04 explorer Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Michael Graff. @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ is a .Xr printf 3 style format string. The message is printed to the console and the location pointed to by the global char pointer -.Fa panicstr +.Fa panicstr is set to the address of the message text for retrival from the OS core dump. .Pp diff --git a/share/man/man9/shutdownhook_establish.9 b/share/man/man9/shutdownhook_establish.9 index c10940e7f59..9e70584eb0a 100644 --- a/share/man/man9/shutdownhook_establish.9 +++ b/share/man/man9/shutdownhook_establish.9 @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ rely on many system services (including file systems, and timeouts and other interrupt-driven services), or even basic system integrity (because the system could be rebooting after a crash). .Sh RETURN VALUES -If successful, +If successful, .Fn shutdownhook_establish returns an opaque pointer describing the newly established shutdown hook. Otherwise, it returns NULL. diff --git a/share/man/man9/spl.9 b/share/man/man9/spl.9 index 870a1338117..ccc88882655 100644 --- a/share/man/man9/spl.9 +++ b/share/man/man9/spl.9 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: spl.9,v 1.2 1999/05/23 14:11:40 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: spl.9,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:35 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: spl.9,v 1.1 1997/03/11 06:15:05 mikel Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Michael Long. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ are: .Bl -tag -width splsoftserialXX .It Fn splhigh blocks all hard and soft interrupts. It is used for code that cannot -tolerate any interrupts, like hardware context switching code and +tolerate any interrupts, like hardware context switching code and the .Xr ddb 4 in-kernel debugger. diff --git a/share/man/man9/store.9 b/share/man/man9/store.9 index 0fe51a5948e..3a2d5c4cb1f 100644 --- a/share/man/man9/store.9 +++ b/share/man/man9/store.9 @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ to the user-space address The .Nm routines are deprecated. -All new code should use +All new code should use .Fn copyout . .Sh RETURN VALUES The diff --git a/share/man/man9/time.9 b/share/man/man9/time.9 index 98352b5fda4..b71177b8b65 100644 --- a/share/man/man9/time.9 +++ b/share/man/man9/time.9 @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ The .Va runtime variable holds the time that the system switched to the current process. -It is set after each context switch, +It is set after each context switch, and is updated when the system time is adjusted with .Xr settimeofday 2 . Because diff --git a/share/termtypes/termcap.5 b/share/termtypes/termcap.5 index b750b416c1c..0c684ce8b1b 100644 --- a/share/termtypes/termcap.5 +++ b/share/termtypes/termcap.5 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ .\" SUCH DAMAGE. .\" .\" from: @(#)termcap.5 6.11 (Berkeley) 3/6/93 -.\" $Id: termcap.5,v 1.5 1999/07/08 09:41:43 hugh Exp $ +.\" $Id: termcap.5,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:49 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 6, 1993 .Dt TERMCAP 5 @@ -1808,7 +1808,7 @@ user preferences. .It Pa /usr/share/misc/termcap File containing terminal descriptions. .It Pa /usr/share/misc/termcap.db -Hash database file containing terminal descriptions (see +Hash database file containing terminal descriptions (see .Xr cap_mkdb 1 ) . .El .Sh SEE ALSO diff --git a/sys/arch/alpha/stand/installboot.8 b/sys/arch/alpha/stand/installboot.8 index 9a50dbccfa7..65ad7392bd3 100644 --- a/sys/arch/alpha/stand/installboot.8 +++ b/sys/arch/alpha/stand/installboot.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: installboot.8,v 1.5 1999/07/08 22:56:00 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: installboot.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:33 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: installboot.8,v 1.2 1997/04/06 08:41:11 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Christopher G. Demetriou. All rights reserved. @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ and hence is limited in size to 7680 bytes .Pc , and a second-stage boot program that resides in the filesystem proper .Po -typically with the name +typically with the name .Pa /boot .Pc . The first-stage boot program is loaded into memory by the SRM console diff --git a/sys/arch/amiga/stand/binpatch/binpatch.8 b/sys/arch/amiga/stand/binpatch/binpatch.8 index 5458c86da8d..ed936d70c42 100644 --- a/sys/arch/amiga/stand/binpatch/binpatch.8 +++ b/sys/arch/amiga/stand/binpatch/binpatch.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: binpatch.8,v 1.3 1999/05/23 14:11:27 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: binpatch.8,v 1.4 1999/07/09 13:35:31 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: binpatch.8,v 1.3 1994/10/26 02:06:54 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Christian E. Hopps @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ .Dt BINPATCH 8 amiga .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm binpatch +.Nm binpatch .Nd examine and or modify initialized data in a binary file. .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm binpatch diff --git a/sys/arch/amiga/stand/boot/installboot.8 b/sys/arch/amiga/stand/boot/installboot.8 index fc9564365c8..88d51f49865 100644 --- a/sys/arch/amiga/stand/boot/installboot.8 +++ b/sys/arch/amiga/stand/boot/installboot.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: installboot.8,v 1.4 1999/07/08 22:56:01 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: installboot.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:30 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: installboot.8,v 1.1.1.1 1996/11/29 23:36:30 is Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Paul Kranenburg @@ -54,13 +54,13 @@ DraCo) floppy disks in Amiga format (880K/1760k). .Pp In presence of more than one bootable partiton/floppy disk, the partition is chosen by the bootpriority (from the RDB), which can be overridden by -the operator from the boot menu (on Amiga machines, hold down the outer +the operator from the boot menu (on Amiga machines, hold down the outer mouse buttons during boot; on DraCo machines, press the left mouse button when prompted). .Pp -On RDB devices, the whole bootblock is loaded by the ROM. The number of +On RDB devices, the whole bootblock is loaded by the ROM. The number of boot blocks in the RDB partition entry must be correct. -.Pp +.Pp On floppy disks, the ROM always loads the first two blocks (1024 bytes), and the bootblock allocates memory and loads the whole bootblock on startup. .Pp @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ The name of the character special device specifying the partition on which the bootstrap is to be installed. .El .Sh EXAMPLES -The following command will install the +The following command will install the boot program in the bootblock area on .Dq sd0a : .Bd -literal -offset indent @@ -95,8 +95,8 @@ If .Nm is used on the whole disk partition, the RDB will be overwritten. .Pp -Some third-party accellerator boards are not auto-configuring. You won't -be able to use their memory when booting from the bootblock after a cold +Some third-party accellerator boards are not auto-configuring. You won't +be able to use their memory when booting from the bootblock after a cold start. .Pp Some third-party disk controllers don't support bootblock booting. diff --git a/sys/arch/amiga/stand/loadkmap/loadkmap.8 b/sys/arch/amiga/stand/loadkmap/loadkmap.8 index bea3e11550f..c3eafabb53e 100644 --- a/sys/arch/amiga/stand/loadkmap/loadkmap.8 +++ b/sys/arch/amiga/stand/loadkmap/loadkmap.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: loadkmap.8,v 1.2 1999/07/08 22:56:02 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: loadkmap.8,v 1.3 1999/07/09 13:35:31 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1999 .\" Marc Espie. All rights reserved. @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ .Nm loadkmap .Nd load keyboard map .Sh SYNOPSIS -.Nm -.Op Ar file +.Nm loadkmap +.Op Ar file .Sh DESCRIPTION .Nm loads the specified keyboard map @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ sources to those keymap files. .Xr ite 4 .Sh BUGS The format of the keymap files is ill-specified, incomplete, and likely -to change in the future. +to change in the future. .Nm should be replaced by the more generic .Xr kbd 1 , diff --git a/sys/arch/atari/stand/binpatch/binpatch.8 b/sys/arch/atari/stand/binpatch/binpatch.8 index a32e7ff2493..2d17244a563 100644 --- a/sys/arch/atari/stand/binpatch/binpatch.8 +++ b/sys/arch/atari/stand/binpatch/binpatch.8 @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ .Dt BINPATCH 8 atari .Os .Sh NAME -.Nm binpatch +.Nm binpatch .Nd examine and or modify initialized data in a binary file. .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm binpatch diff --git a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/kbdio/kbdio.8 b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/kbdio/kbdio.8 index 4505c8ac7a6..dcaf6e60577 100644 --- a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/kbdio/kbdio.8 +++ b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/kbdio/kbdio.8 @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: kbdio.8,v 1.5 1999/07/08 22:56:06 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: kbdio.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:31 aaron Exp $ +.\" .\" -.\" .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Joerg Wunsch -.\" +.\" .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" This program is free software. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ .\" 4. The name of the developer may not be used to endorse or promote .\" products derived from this software without specific prior written .\" permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE DEVELOPERS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. -.\" -.\" +.\" +.\" .Dd April 15, 1995 .Dt KBDIO 8 i386 .Os diff --git a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/kcon/kcon.1 b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/kcon/kcon.1 index d2676c33568..34977224eb3 100644 --- a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/kcon/kcon.1 +++ b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/kcon/kcon.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: kcon.1,v 1.6 1999/07/08 22:57:15 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: kcon.1,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:31 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1995 Hellmuth Michaelis .\" @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm kcon .Op Fl d Ar delay -.Op Fl l +.Op Fl l .Op Fl m Ar map .Op Fl o .Op Fl p diff --git a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/keycap/keycap.5 b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/keycap/keycap.5 index a393f4d55d0..0e12b434532 100644 --- a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/keycap/keycap.5 +++ b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/keycap/keycap.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: keycap.5,v 1.6 1999/07/07 10:50:08 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: keycap.5,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:32 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992,1993,1994 Hellmuth Michaelis @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ upper case and blanks for readability. .It "de bool Resets Keyboard mapping to compiled-in default" .It "D<n> bool Disables key <n> completely" -.It "m<n> num specify key numbers for ALT keys +.It "m<n> num specify key numbers for ALT keys .It "l<n> num specify key numbers for ALTGR keys .It "h<n> num specify key numbers for SHIFT keys .It "t<n> num specify key numbers for CONTROL keys diff --git a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/loadfont/loadfont.1 b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/loadfont/loadfont.1 index 1ef22c99bfe..e162dbc9be6 100644 --- a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/loadfont/loadfont.1 +++ b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/loadfont/loadfont.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: loadfont.1,v 1.6 1999/07/08 22:57:16 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: loadfont.1,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:32 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1995 Hellmuth Michaelis .\" @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ VT220 driver on EGA and VGA boards into the font ram of this boards. The options are as follows: .Bl -tag -width Ds .It Fl c -Specifies the slot, the font is to load into. EGA boards have four +Specifies the slot, the font is to load into. EGA boards have four slots and VGA boards have eight slots available for downloading fonts. .It Fl d Specifies the devicefile to use. diff --git a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/pcvtdoc/pcvt.4 b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/pcvtdoc/pcvt.4 index f4c444dc836..b571d9fcea6 100644 --- a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/pcvtdoc/pcvt.4 +++ b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/pcvtdoc/pcvt.4 @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pcvt.4,v 1.11 1999/07/07 10:50:08 aaron Exp $ -.\" +.\" $OpenBSD: pcvt.4,v 1.12 1999/07/09 13:35:32 aaron Exp $ +.\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1995 Hellmuth Michaelis, Brian Dunford-Shore, .\" Joerg Wunsch and Holger Veit. -.\" +.\" .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -88,9 +88,9 @@ Despite the complexity of options, if installed in a normal OpenBSD configuration with the default options, on a standard i386 architecture system, you can use multiple virtual terminals. The key sequence used to move among virtual terminals are, -at least on a North American keyboard, +at least on a North American keyboard, .Em CTRL+ALT+Fn, -where +where .Em n can be from one to four on the standard system, and higher if you have created addition /dev/ttyC* entries. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Completely independent virtual terminals for MDA/HGC/CGA/EGA and VGA .It Fully remappable keyboard to support national keyboards .It -All VT220 character sets plus ISO Latin-1 and DEC technical supported +All VT220 character sets plus ISO Latin-1 and DEC technical supported .It VT220 downloadable character set supported when run on EGA/VGA .It @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ caps shift - swaps case of letter, ASCII code generating key, .It KBD_SCROLL stop output, -.It KBD_FUNC +.It KBD_FUNC function key, .It KBD_KP keypad keys, @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ struct screeninfo { int pure_vt_mode; /* flag, pure VT mode or HP/VT mode */ /* on write, if -1, no change */ int screen_size; /* screen size */ - /* on write, if -1, no change */ + /* on write, if -1, no change */ int force_24lines; /* force 24 lines if 25 lines VT mode */ /* or 28 lines HP mode to get pure */ /* VT220 screen size */ @@ -709,7 +709,7 @@ struct pcvtid { int rmajor; /* revision number, major */ #define PCVTIDMAJOR 3 int rminor; /* revision number, minor */ -#define PCVTIDMINOR 00 +#define PCVTIDMINOR 00 }; .Ed diff --git a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/scon/scon.1 b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/scon/scon.1 index ea3456bfb08..23f4240dac8 100644 --- a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/scon/scon.1 +++ b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/scon/scon.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: scon.1,v 1.7 1999/07/08 22:57:16 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: scon.1,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:32 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1995 Hellmuth Michaelis and Joerg Wunsch .\" @@ -81,13 +81,13 @@ driver. The options are as follows: .Bl -tag -width Ds .It Fl a -Returns a string describing the video adaptor found by pcvt, the string +Returns a string describing the video adaptor found by pcvt, the string returned could be MDA, HGC, CGA, EGA, VGA or UNKNOWN. .It Fl c -Specify the screen number the current (displayed) screen should be switched +Specify the screen number the current (displayed) screen should be switched to. .It Fl d -Specify the device filename (i.e. /dev/ttyC2) further operations specified on +Specify the device filename (i.e. /dev/ttyC2) further operations specified on the command line should be applied to. .It Fl f Some programs which silently assume 24 lines when they run on a VT220 show @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Sets 132 columns mode Sets 80 columns mode. .El .Pp -When switching between HP and VT mode, when switching the force 24 lines +When switching between HP and VT mode, when switching the force 24 lines mode on and off, or when switching between 80 and 132 columns operation, the screen is cleared, the scrolling region is reset and the cursor is placed in the home position. diff --git a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/vgaio/vgaio.8 b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/vgaio/vgaio.8 index a8af2f2a144..5924513e541 100644 --- a/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/vgaio/vgaio.8 +++ b/sys/arch/i386/isa/pcvt/Util/vgaio/vgaio.8 @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: vgaio.8,v 1.5 1999/07/08 22:56:06 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: vgaio.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:32 aaron Exp $ +.\" .\" -.\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994,1995 Joerg Wunsch -.\" +.\" .\" All rights reserved. -.\" +.\" .\" This program is free software. -.\" +.\" .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions .\" are met: @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ .\" 4. The name of the developer may not be used to endorse or promote .\" products derived from this software without specific prior written .\" permission. -.\" +.\" .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE DEVELOPERS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. -.\" -.\" +.\" +.\" .Dd December 31, 1994 .Dt VGAIO 8 i386 .Os @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ the .Aq Em regnumber , or any of the other tokens are ignored. They are not required anyway. -The +The .Dq Em mi register does not require an argument .Aq Em regnumber ; diff --git a/sys/arch/i386/stand/biosboot/biosboot.8 b/sys/arch/i386/stand/biosboot/biosboot.8 index 0540146c81c..c007bd30cf1 100644 --- a/sys/arch/i386/stand/biosboot/biosboot.8 +++ b/sys/arch/i386/stand/biosboot/biosboot.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: biosboot.8,v 1.9 1999/05/23 14:11:28 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: biosboot.8,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:33 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Michael Shalayeff .\" All rights reserved. @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ .\" 4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission. .\" -.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR -.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED +.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR +.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE .\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE .\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL @@ -48,17 +48,17 @@ In order for to load the second-stage bootstrap, it has a table inside it which describes .Xr boot 8 's -location. +location. .Nm must be installed by, and have its block table filled in by, the .Xr installboot 8 -program. As this data is BIOS dependant, you must re-run +program. As this data is BIOS dependant, you must re-run .Xr installboot 8 each time you reinstall .Xr boot 8 or move your disk or software between machines and/or controllers. .Pp -When +When .Nm receives control from either the BIOS or the MBR it will print the message: .Pp @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ has been used in for the device you are booting from. .Sh NOTES The practice of making OpenBSD use the whole disk (ie: having -.Nm +.Nm as the MBR) has been deprecated, and will not work on certain BIOS versions. There is a lot of strange behaviour with different BIOS's, one of well known lobotomy cases is that the BIOS does not pass the right boot drive diff --git a/sys/arch/i386/stand/boot/boot.8 b/sys/arch/i386/stand/boot/boot.8 index e127e95f297..6952fcb218b 100644 --- a/sys/arch/i386/stand/boot/boot.8 +++ b/sys/arch/i386/stand/boot/boot.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: boot.8,v 1.11 1999/05/16 19:57:54 alex Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: boot.8,v 1.12 1999/07/09 13:35:33 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Michael Shalayeff .\" All rights reserved. @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ .\" 4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission. .\" -.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR -.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED +.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR +.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE .\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE .\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL diff --git a/sys/arch/i386/stand/installboot/installboot.8 b/sys/arch/i386/stand/installboot/installboot.8 index 54b02a4ddf5..8a78b3dba54 100644 --- a/sys/arch/i386/stand/installboot/installboot.8 +++ b/sys/arch/i386/stand/installboot/installboot.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: installboot.8,v 1.20 1999/07/08 22:56:07 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: installboot.8,v 1.21 1999/07/09 13:35:33 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Michael Shalayeff .\" All rights reserved. @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ .\" 4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission. .\" -.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR -.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED +.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR +.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED .\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE .\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE .\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL diff --git a/sys/arch/mvme68k/stand/installboot/installboot.8 b/sys/arch/mvme68k/stand/installboot/installboot.8 index f241cfca7b3..31a1a88d248 100644 --- a/sys/arch/mvme68k/stand/installboot/installboot.8 +++ b/sys/arch/mvme68k/stand/installboot/installboot.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $Id: installboot.8,v 1.4 1999/07/08 22:56:08 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: installboot.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:34 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd 31 May 1995 .Dt INSTALLBOOT 8 mvme68k @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ the raw device, but that is not allowed with the kernel .Nm securelevel variable set to a value greater than zero (the default), so .Nm installboot -only works in single-user mode (or insecure mode - see +only works in single-user mode (or insecure mode - see .Xr init 8 ). .Sh "SEE ALSO" .Xr disklabel 8 , diff --git a/sys/arch/mvme88k/stand/installboot/installboot.8 b/sys/arch/mvme88k/stand/installboot/installboot.8 index c82f7a26f82..b862b0d487f 100644 --- a/sys/arch/mvme88k/stand/installboot/installboot.8 +++ b/sys/arch/mvme88k/stand/installboot/installboot.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $Id: installboot.8,v 1.4 1999/07/08 22:56:09 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: installboot.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:34 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd 31 May 1995 .Dt INSTALLBOOT 8 mvme88k @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ on which the file system containing is mounted. .El .Sh EXAMPLE -.Bd -literal -offset +.Bd -literal -offset cd /usr/mdec cp bootsd / installboot -v /bootsd ./bootxx /dev/rsd0a @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ the raw device, but that is not allowed with the kernel .Nm securelevel variable set to a value greater than zero (the default), so .Nm installboot -only works in single-user mode (or insecure mode - see +only works in single-user mode (or insecure mode - see .Xr init 8 ). .Sh "SEE ALSO" .Xr disklabel 8 , diff --git a/sys/arch/sun3/stand/installboot/installboot.8 b/sys/arch/sun3/stand/installboot/installboot.8 index 69e006151ee..684f72abdf4 100644 --- a/sys/arch/sun3/stand/installboot/installboot.8 +++ b/sys/arch/sun3/stand/installboot/installboot.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $Id: installboot.8,v 1.6 1999/07/08 22:56:11 deraadt Exp $ +.\" $Id: installboot.8,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:34 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd 31 May 1995 .Dt INSTALLBOOT 8 sun3 @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ the raw device, but that is not allowed with the kernel .Nm securelevel variable set to a value greater than zero (the default), so .Nm installboot -only works in single-user mode (or insecure mode - see +only works in single-user mode (or insecure mode - see .Xr init 8 ). .Sh "SEE ALSO" .Xr disklabel 8 , diff --git a/sys/dev/microcode/aic7xxx/aic7xxx_asm.1 b/sys/dev/microcode/aic7xxx/aic7xxx_asm.1 index 3dbeece1bb1..6ba7a14b327 100644 --- a/sys/dev/microcode/aic7xxx/aic7xxx_asm.1 +++ b/sys/dev/microcode/aic7xxx/aic7xxx_asm.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: aic7xxx_asm.1,v 1.5 1999/07/03 02:11:12 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: aic7xxx_asm.1,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:34 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1994, 1995 .\" Justin T. Gibbs. All rights reserved. @@ -11,10 +11,10 @@ .\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright .\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the .\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. -.\" 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products +.\" 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products .\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission. .\" -.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR +.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. .\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ .Op Fl o Ar file .Ar source-file .Sh DESCRIPTION -The Adaptec aic7xxx family of asics are single chip SCSI controllers with a +The Adaptec aic7xxx family of asics are single chip SCSI controllers with a RISC like command processor. This assembler parses the language outlined in the Adaptec technical document .%T "AIC-7770 (EISA/ISA Bus Master Single-Chip SCSI Host Adaptor) Data Book" @@ -48,24 +48,24 @@ and produces ascii output intended for a C byte array. .Pp The aic7xxx assembler is required to compile kernels with aic7xxx SCSI adaptor support (AHA-274x, AHA-284x, AHA-294x controllers) and is compiled, -installed, and used automatically in the kernel compile directory when +installed, and used automatically in the kernel compile directory when necessary. .Pp The options are as follows: .Bl -tag -width Ds .It Fl D Ar variable=value -Define +Define .Ar variable -to be +to be .Ar value in the global context -.It Fl d +.It Fl d Turn on debugging -.It Fl v +.It Fl v Print version information -.It Fl o Ar file +.It Fl o Ar file Redirect assembler output to .Ar file .Sh AUTHOR -This aic7770 assembler was written by +This aic7770 assembler was written by John Aycock (aycock@cpsc.ucalgary.ca) diff --git a/usr.bin/banner/banner.1 b/usr.bin/banner/banner.1 index 53edd504886..430e4991b3c 100644 --- a/usr.bin/banner/banner.1 +++ b/usr.bin/banner/banner.1 @@ -1,18 +1,18 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: banner.1,v 1.4 1999/06/05 01:21:19 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: banner.1,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:29 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: banner.1,v 1.1.1.1 1995/04/09 05:53:04 cgd Exp $ .\" .\" @(#)Copyright (c) 1995, Simon J. Gerraty. -.\" +.\" .\" This is free software. It comes with NO WARRANTY. .\" Permission to use, modify and distribute this source code .\" is granted subject to the following conditions. .\" 1/ that the above copyright notice and this notice .\" are preserved in all copies and that due credit be given -.\" to the author. +.\" to the author. .\" 2/ that any changes to this code are clearly commented .\" as such so that the author does not get blamed for bugs .\" other than his own. -.\" +.\" .\" Please send copies of changes and bug-fixes to: .\" sjg@zen.void.oz.au .\" diff --git a/usr.bin/login/login.1 b/usr.bin/login/login.1 index 15d2bf6acbc..5f4b940662e 100644 --- a/usr.bin/login/login.1 +++ b/usr.bin/login/login.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: login.1,v 1.9 1999/06/05 01:21:32 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: login.1,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:29 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: login.1,v 1.7 1995/08/31 22:52:33 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1990, 1993 @@ -102,9 +102,9 @@ exists, changes the protection and ownership of certain devices specified in this file. .Pp -If the file +If the file .Pa /var/log/failedlogin -exists, +exists, .Nm will record failed login attempts in this file. .Pp diff --git a/usr.bin/vacation/vacation.1 b/usr.bin/vacation/vacation.1 index da294f497d7..006c3ad753a 100644 --- a/usr.bin/vacation/vacation.1 +++ b/usr.bin/vacation/vacation.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: vacation.1,v 1.9 1999/06/06 07:03:16 pjanzen Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: vacation.1,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:30 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: vacation.1,v 1.5 1995/08/31 21:57:08 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1987, 1990, 1991, 1993 @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ please contact Keith Bostic <bostic@CS.Berkeley.EDU>. .Pp Any occurrence of the string .Li $SUBJECT -in +in .Pa .vacation.msg will be replaced by the subject of the message that triggered the .Nm vacation diff --git a/usr.bin/vgrind/vgrindefs.5 b/usr.bin/vgrind/vgrindefs.5 index 58c6978b567..3219f7635b3 100644 --- a/usr.bin/vgrind/vgrindefs.5 +++ b/usr.bin/vgrind/vgrindefs.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: vgrindefs.5,v 1.6 1999/07/03 02:11:09 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: vgrindefs.5,v 1.7 1999/07/09 13:35:30 aaron Exp $ .\" $NetBSD: vgrindefs.5,v 1.3 1994/11/17 08:28:07 jtc Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993 @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ file contains all language definitions for .Xr vgrind 1 . The data base is -very similar to +very similar to .Xr termcap 5 . .Sh FIELDS The following table names and describes each field: @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ The following table names and describes each field: .It "kw str a list of keywords separated by spaces" .El .Sh EXAMPLES -The following entry, which describes the C language, is +The following entry, which describes the C language, is typical of a language entry: .Bd -literal C|c:\ @@ -96,11 +96,11 @@ are of two types: Boolean capabilities which indicate that the language has some particular feature and string -capabilities which give a regular expression or +capabilities which give a regular expression or keyword list. .Sh REGULAR EXPRESSIONS .Nm vgrindefs -uses regular expression which are very similar to those of +uses regular expression which are very similar to those of .Xr ex 1 and .Xr lex 1 . @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ would match "tramp", "steamer", "trampflies", or "steamerflies". .Sh KEYWORD LIST The keyword list is just a list of keywords in the language separated by spaces. If the "oc" boolean is specified, indicating that upper -and lower case are equivalent, then all the keywords should be +and lower case are equivalent, then all the keywords should be specified in lower case. .Sh FILES .Bl -tag -width /usr/share/misc/vgrindefs -compact diff --git a/usr.bin/w/uptime.1 b/usr.bin/w/uptime.1 index a6396b08bed..c4f1b264201 100644 --- a/usr.bin/w/uptime.1 +++ b/usr.bin/w/uptime.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: uptime.1,v 1.4 1999/06/05 01:21:49 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: uptime.1,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:30 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1990, 1993, 1994 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ .Sh SYNOPSIS .Nm uptime .Sh DESCRIPTION -The +The .Nm uptime utility displays the current time, the length of time the system has been up, diff --git a/usr.bin/yacc/yacc.1 b/usr.bin/yacc/yacc.1 index 50b1f62b122..2d180ec7342 100644 --- a/usr.bin/yacc/yacc.1 +++ b/usr.bin/yacc/yacc.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: yacc.1,v 1.5 1999/07/03 02:11:09 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: yacc.1,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:30 aaron Exp $ .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1990 The Regents of the University of California. .\" All rights reserved. .\" @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ will not insert the #line directives. .It Fl o Ar output_file The .Fl o -option specifies an explicit +option specifies an explicit .It Fl p Ar symbol_prefix The .Fl p diff --git a/usr.sbin/ac/ac.8 b/usr.sbin/ac/ac.8 index 938e6a486d6..59804393e3c 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/ac/ac.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/ac/ac.8 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.\" $Id: ac.8,v 1.4 1999/06/05 22:16:18 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: ac.8,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:53 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd March 15, 1994 .Dt AC 8 @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ .Nm ac .Nd connect time accounting .Sh SYNOPSIS -.Nm +.Nm ac .Op Fl dp .\".Op Fl c Ar console .Op Fl t Ar tty diff --git a/usr.sbin/adduser/rmgroup.8 b/usr.sbin/adduser/rmgroup.8 index 7f37f30368d..0449bcc8991 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/adduser/rmgroup.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/adduser/rmgroup.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: rmgroup.8,v 1.5 1999/07/02 20:11:47 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: rmgroup.8,v 1.6 1999/07/09 13:35:53 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Wolfram Schneider <wosch@FreeBSD.org>. Berlin. .\" All rights reserved. @@ -36,11 +36,11 @@ .Nm rmgroup .Ar group .Sh DESCRIPTION -.Nm +.Nm deletes the specified Unix .Ar group -from group database. -.Nm +from group database. +.Nm will not delete the system groups wheel, daemon, kmem, sys, tty, operator, bin, nogroup, nobody, or groups with gid 0. Do not delete these groups. diff --git a/usr.sbin/cron/crontab.1 b/usr.sbin/cron/crontab.1 index 899736d9ba2..5a02decfbad 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/cron/crontab.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/cron/crontab.1 @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ .\" * Paul Vixie <paul@vix.com> uunet!decwrl!vixie!paul .\" */ .\" -.\" $Id: crontab.1,v 1.4 1999/07/07 10:50:11 aaron Exp $ +.\" $Id: crontab.1,v 1.5 1999/07/09 13:35:53 aaron Exp $ .\" .Dd June 8, 1999 .Dt CRONTAB 1 @@ -24,11 +24,11 @@ .Nm crontab .Nd maintain crontab files for individual users (V3) .Sh SYNOPSIS -.Nm +.Nm crontab .Op Fl u Ar user .Ar file .br -.Nm +.Nm crontab .Op Fl u Ar user .Oo .Fl l No \&| diff --git a/usr.sbin/cron/crontab.5 b/usr.sbin/cron/crontab.5 index 7c00c99778f..39a26a47776 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/cron/crontab.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/cron/crontab.5 @@ -15,8 +15,8 @@ .\" * Paul Vixie <paul@vix.com> uunet!decwrl!vixie!paul .\" */ .\" -.\" $Id: crontab.5,v 1.7 1999/07/07 10:50:11 aaron Exp $ -.\" +.\" $Id: crontab.5,v 1.8 1999/07/09 13:35:53 aaron Exp $ +.\" .Dd June 8, 1999 .Dt CRONTAB 5 .Os @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ at these times on these dates run this command .Dc . There may be a system .Nm crontab -.Pf ( Pa /etc/crontab ) +.Pf ( Pa /etc/crontab ) and each user may have their own .Nm crontab .Pf ( Pa /var/cron/tabs/<user> ) . @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ non-space character is a pound sign .Pq Ql # are comments, and are ignored. Note that comments are not allowed on the same line as -.Xr cron 8 +.Xr cron 8 commands, since they will be taken to be part of the command. Similarly, comments are not allowed on the same line as environment variable settings. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ and and .Ev HOME are set from the -.Pa /etc/passwd +.Pa /etc/passwd line of the .Nm crontab Ns \&'s owner. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ commands in If .Ev MAILTO is defined (and non-empty), -mail is sent to the user so named. If +mail is sent to the user so named. If .Ev MAILTO is defined but empty .Pq Ev MAILTO \&= Sq , diff --git a/usr.sbin/named/man/dig.1 b/usr.sbin/named/man/dig.1 index 1666e477a2a..8da9d68e113 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/named/man/dig.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/named/man/dig.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: dig.1,v 1.14 1999/07/07 10:50:14 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: dig.1,v 1.15 1999/07/09 13:35:54 aaron Exp $ .\" $From: dig.1,v 8.2 1997/06/01 20:34:33 vixie Exp $ .\" .\" ++Copyright++ 1993 @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ structure. .Bl -tag -width Pa -compact -offset indent .It Pa /etc/resolv.conf initial domain name and name server addresses -.It Pa DiG.env +.It Pa DiG.env default save file for default options .El .Sh ENVIRONMENT diff --git a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/create/pkg_create.1 b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/create/pkg_create.1 index 1c1fadf5023..bee4f47253a 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/pkg_install/create/pkg_create.1 +++ b/usr.sbin/pkg_install/create/pkg_create.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: pkg_create.1,v 1.8 1999/07/03 02:11:09 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: pkg_create.1,v 1.9 1999/07/09 13:35:53 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" FreeBSD install - a package for the installation and maintainance .\" of non-core utilities. diff --git a/usr.sbin/tcpdump/tcpdump.8 b/usr.sbin/tcpdump/tcpdump.8 index d0034fd1700..76d1a6d5582 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/tcpdump/tcpdump.8 +++ b/usr.sbin/tcpdump/tcpdump.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: tcpdump.8,v 1.17 1999/07/07 10:50:14 aaron Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: tcpdump.8,v 1.18 1999/07/09 13:35:54 aaron Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1994, 1995, 1996 .\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. @@ -1046,7 +1046,7 @@ arp who\&-has csam tell rtsg arp reply csam is\&-at CSAM .Ed .Pp -In this example, Ethernet addresses are in caps and internet +In this example, Ethernet addresses are in caps and internet addresses in lower case. The first line says that rtsg sent an arp packet asking for the Ethernet address of internet host csam. csam @@ -1268,7 +1268,7 @@ Host h2opolo asked the domain server on helios for an address record .Pq Ar qtype Ns \&=A associated with the name ucbvax.berkeley.edu. -The query +The query .Ar id was 3. The @@ -1282,7 +1282,7 @@ protocol headers. The query operation was the normal one .Pq Query so the .Ar op -field was omitted. If +field was omitted. If .Ar op had been anything else, it would have been printed between the @@ -1330,7 +1330,7 @@ Name server responses are formatted as .Bd -ragged -offset indent .Ar src No > Ar dst : .Ar id op rcode flags -.Ar a +.Ar a / .Ar n / @@ -1359,7 +1359,7 @@ and headers. The .Ar op .Pq Query -and +and .Ar rcode .Pq NoError were omitted, as was the @@ -1457,8 +1457,8 @@ on fh If one is lucky, as in this case, the file handle can be interpreted as a major,minor device number pair, followed by the inode number and generation number. -Wrl replies with a -.Ar stat +Wrl replies with a +.Ar stat of ok and the contents of the link. .Pp In the third line, sushi asks wrl to lookup the name @@ -1487,7 +1487,7 @@ also prints the and fragmentation fields, which have been omitted from this example. In the first line, sushi asks wrl to read 8192 bytes from file 21,11/12.195, -at byte offset 24576. Wrl replies with a +at byte offset 24576. Wrl replies with a .Ar stat of ok; the packet shown on the @@ -1535,7 +1535,7 @@ keeps track of .Dq recent requests, and matches them to the replies using the -.Ar xid +.Ar xid .Pq transaction ID . If a reply does not closely follow the corresponding request, it might not be parsable. @@ -1584,7 +1584,7 @@ file may contain blank lines or comment lines .Pp AppleTalk addresses are printed in the form .Bd -ragged -offset indent -.Ar net Ns . Ns Ar host Ns . +.Ar net Ns . Ns Ar host Ns . .Ns Ar port .Pp e.g. diff --git a/usr.sbin/ypserv/ypserv/ypserv.acl.5 b/usr.sbin/ypserv/ypserv/ypserv.acl.5 index b7eb0c4f2ed..00654efd858 100644 --- a/usr.sbin/ypserv/ypserv/ypserv.acl.5 +++ b/usr.sbin/ypserv/ypserv/ypserv.acl.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ypserv.acl.5,v 1.9 1999/07/08 09:41:44 hugh Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ypserv.acl.5,v 1.10 1999/07/09 13:35:53 aaron Exp $ .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Mats O Jansson <moj@stacken.kth.se> .\" All rights reserved. .\" @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ has more than one IP address then all will be added to the list. > .Op Ic netmask <netname|netnumber> .Pp -If the +If the .Ic netmask part of the command isn't given then the netmask will be assumed to be a class A, B or C net depending on the net number. |